ECE - A-18 - I To IVyear-29jun20-2

B.
Tech-ECE - I to IV year 2018-19
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS,
COURSE STRUCTURE
AND
DETAILED SYLLABUS
FOR
B.Tech - ECE
(Applicable for the Batches admitted from 2018-2019)
DEPARTMENT OF
ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SREENIDHI INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
(An Autonomous Institution approved by UGC and affiliated to JNTUH)
Yamnampet, Ghatkesar, Hyderabad - 501 301
June, 2019
1
B.Tech-ECE - I to IV year 2018-19
B. Tech (Electronics and Communication Engineering)
Program objective:
The main objectives of the B.Tech (ECE) program are to produce engineering graduates who are
technically well prepared for the industries with necessary core knowledge and are able to succeed long-
term in engineering/entrepreneurship careers, and who are well prepared for higher studies across India
and the abroad.
Our curriculum is developed keeping in mind the latest developments and technologies in major areas
such as telecommunications, defense, IT related areas. We also encourage the development of necessary
skills for integration of hardware and software components. We believe that many creative inventions
may take birth at the boundaries of multi-disciplinary domains, and hence our curriculum is developed
revolving around not only professional domains, but also multidisciplinary and allied fields.
The first two years of this program begins with a set of introductory courses, like Mathematics, physics,
English, computer languages, Basic Electronics courses, Signals and Systems including basic
communication engineering courses, which provide students with a firm foundation in mathematics,
Electronics and Communication Engineering. These courses are equally balanced and supplemented with
laboratory courses using state-of-the art Tools.
The last two years of study focuses on the design and analysis of complex systems in the fields of both
electronics and Communications. In addition, students have been provided with options to take courses
from other streams from a pool of Open and Professional Electives. These advanced courses give broad
opening for research and help them to choose specialization in their higher studies. A generous allotment
of open electives allows students to learn foreign languages like French, German, Spanish; and it
includes computing with a business focus.
Having completed this course, a student is prepared to work independently or collectively in the
specialized as well as multi-disciplinary domains and for higher studies.
Vision
To emerge as a globally accepted institution of higher learning aiming at achieving excellence in the
disciplines of technical, scientific, management, humanities and social sciences through high quality
teaching, learning, research, consultancy and extension activities stepped in Indian values and national
priorities.
2
Mission
To prepare Electronics and Communication Engineering graduates to be a life-long learner with core
competence in basic sciences and engineering fundamentals with necessary breadth so that they can
succeed in industry or to peruse higher studies or to become a entrepreneur and enabled to design and
create novel products required for the society at large by shaping our department as an excellent centre of
engineering education.
Programme Educational Objectives
PEO-I:
To provide strong foundation in basic sciences including mathematics and engineering fundamentals
required to solve engineering problems so that they will be able to identify, formulate and apply
creatively their understanding of sciences and core engineering to design solutions and systems for the
problems arising in the context of public health and safety, cultural, societal and environmental
considerations.
PEO-II:
To develop core competences in the field of Electronics and Communication Engineering to conduct
experiments, analyze, design and use appropriate techniques and tools to provide optimum solutions with
professional engineering practices considering the social responsibilities and environmental issues.
PEO-III
To inculcate individual &team work, leadership, professional ethics, IPR and regulatory issues in
multidisciplinary areas and to develop good communication skills for ensuring their professional career
advancements.
PEO-IV:
To promote entrepreneurship with sufficient knowledge of project/financial management techniques and
to engage in lifelong learning in the broad context of technological change.
3
Programme Outcomes
Engineering Graduates will be able to:
PO.1. Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering

fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex
engineering problems.
PO.2. Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze
complex engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first
principles of mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
PO.3. Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering
problems and design system components or processes that meet the specified needs
with appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural,
societal, and environmental considerations.
PO.4. Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and
research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of
data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.
PO.5. Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and
modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex
engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations.
PO.6. The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to
assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent
responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice.
PO.7. Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional
engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the
knowledge of, and need for sustainable development.
PO.8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and
responsibilities and norms of the engineering practice.
PO.9. Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or
leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
PO.10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with
the engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to
comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation, make effective
presentations, and give and receive clear instructions.
PO.11. Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a
member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary
environments.
PO.12. Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to
engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of
technological change.
4
PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES of B. Tech-ECE
The graduates will be able to:
PSO.1. Apply the fundamental knowledge of mathematics and fundamental core subjects
in E.C.E stream to identify, formulate and solve the problems in the areas of
Embedded Systems, Signal and Image processing, VLSI Technology & Design,
Wireless communication systems.
PSO.2. Apply modern engineering and CAD tools for the analysis, design and
development of circuits and systems in the various areas of the Electronics and
Communication Engineering.
PSO.3. Apply engineering knowledge both as an individual and as a team member in a
multi-disciplinary environment pertaining to social and cultural context.
PSO.4. Demonstrate the necessary technical, managerial and soft skills to work in the
core industry & IT sector and also engage in life-long learning in the context of
technological change.
5
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS
FOR B.TECH. REGULAR STUDENTS
WITH EFFECT FROM
THE ACADEMIC YEAR 2018-19
(A-18)
1.0 Under-Graduate Degree Programme in Engineering & Technology (E&T)
1.1 SNIST offers a 4-year (8 semesters) Bachelor of Technology (B.Tech.) degree programme,
under Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) with effect from the academic year 2018-19 in the
following branches of Engineering.
Sl. No. Branch

1. Civil Engineering
2. Electrical and Electronics Engineering
3. Mechanical Engineering
4. Electronics and Communication Engineering
5. Computer Science and Engineering
6. Information Technology
7. Electronics and Computer Engineering
1.2. Credits (Semester system for B.Tech year)
The existing credit system of giving one credit for a lecture hour/ tutorial hour per week and
giving 0.5 credit for every hour of practical and drawing shall be continued in these regulations
also.
2.0 Eligibility for admission
2.1 Admission to the Under graduate courses merit rank obtained by graduate programs shall be
made either on the basis of the rank of the candidate in entrance test conducted by the
Telangana State Government (EAMCET) or on the basis of any other order of merit approved by
the University, subject to reservations as prescribed by the government from time to time.
However admissions under Management / NRI Category shall be made on the relevant orders
issued by Govt. of Telangana from time to time.
2.2 The medium of instruction for the entire under graduate programme of study in E&T will be
English only.
3.0 B.Tech. Programme structure
3.1 A student after securing admission shall pursue the under graduate programme in B.Tech. in a
minimum period of four academic years (8 semesters), and a maximum period of eight academic
years (16 semesters) starting from the date of commencement of first year first semester, failing
which student shall forfeit seat in B.Tech course. However, the student can take two more years
for appearing the examinations to clear the backlog subjects.
In the First year it is structured to provide 39 credits and the credits in II , III and IV years should
not exceed 127 credits as per AICTE model curriculum for the B.Tech. programme. Each student
6
shall secure 166 credits (with CGPA >5) required for the completion of the undergraduate
programme and Award of B.Tech Degree.
Each student shall secure 166 total credits (with CGPA ≥ 5) for the completion of the under
graduate programme for the award of the B.Tech. degree. However, any revision made in this
regard and approved by the Academic Council of the college by Parent University shall be
implemented from the date of the revision.
3.2 UGC/AICTE specified definitions/ descriptions are adopted appropriately for various terms and
abbreviations stated below.
3.2.1 Semester scheme
Each under graduate programme is of 4 academic years (8 semesters) with the academic year
being divided into two semesters of 22 weeks ( 90 instructional days) each, each semester having
- ‘Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)’ and ‘Semester End Examination (SEE)’.
Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) and Credit Based Semester System (CBSS) as indicated
curriculum / course structure as suggested by AICTE are followed.
3.2.2 Credit courses

• A student in a semester has to earn credits which shall be assigned to each subject/ course in
an L: T: P: C (lecture periods: tutorial periods: practical periods: credits) structure based on
the following general pattern.
• One credit for one hour/ week offered in the entire semester for theory lecture (L) / Tutorial
(T) courses.
• One credit for two hours/ week offered in the entire semester for laboratory/ practical (P)
courses.
• The orientation program recommended by AICTE in the model curriculum consisting of
courses like Mandatory Induction program for 3 weeks i.e. Human Values and Ethics in
higher education.
• However there will be an end examination and will also reflect in the Memo of Marks. The
grading will be as follows.
% of Marks Secured in a Letter Grade

Subject/Course
Greater than or equal to 90% O (Outstanding)
80 and less than 90% A+ (Excellent)
70 and less than 80% A (Very Good)
60 and less than 70% B+(Good)
50 and less than 60% B (Average)
40 and less than 50% C (Pass)
Below 40% F (FAIL)
Absent Ab
• Other mandatory courses i.e ., Environmental Science and Ecology, Indian standards in
concerned branch also will not have credits but evaluation will be done as per the above
table. A student can not obtain degree unless he / she completes all the mandatory courses.
7
3.2.3 Subject Course Classification
All subjects / courses offered for the under graduate programme in E&T (B.Tech. Degree
programmes) are broadly classified as follows. The Institution has followed almost all the
guidelines issued by AICTE/UGC.
The groups of the subjects shall be as given in the table given hereunder along with the credits
suggested by AICTE
Sl. Category Suggested Breakup

No. of Credits
(Total 160)
1 Humanities and social sciences including Management 12*
courses
2 Basic Science courses 25*
3 Engineering Science courses including workshop, 24*
drawing, basics of electrical / mechanical / computer etc
4 Professional core courses 48*
5 Professional Elective courses relevant to chosen 18*
specialization / branch
6 Open Electives from other technical and / or emerging 18*
subjects
7 Project work, seminar and internship in industry or 15*
elsewhere
8 Mandatory courses (Environmental Sciences, Induction (Non-credit)
training, Indian constitution, Essence of Indian
Traditional Knowledge)
Total 160*
The Academic council of the institution has approved the total number of credits to be 166. The various
groups of subjects mentioned above shall have credits suggested above with minor variations.
4.0 Course registration
4.1 A ‘faculty advisor or counselor’ shall be assigned to a group of 20 students, who will advise
student about the under graduate programme, its course structure and curriculum, choice/option
for Professional and open Electives based on their employment potential / further studies.
4.2 The student will progress semester after semester as the Institute is following cohort system to
satisfying the conditions of promotion to the next semester.
4.3 In the present system there shall be five subjects in each professional elective stream and
three subjects in open elective stream. A student can opt for a stream of professional/ open
electives which should be submitted to the faculty advisor/ Councilor and copy of it to the
Examination section through the Head of the department. A copy of it will be retained with the
Head of the department/ faculty advisor / councilor and the student.
4.4. The student can take one extra subject in each semester and can complete the program in 3
½ years but original degree will be issued along with his / her batch mates after 4 years.
8
4.5 The purpose of offering Elective Streams in both Professional and Open Electives is to facilitate
the students to have a minor specialization based on their interest, so that they will have multi
disciplinary exposure. Hence , a student is to take a stream of Electives in either in Professional /
Open Elective. He shall not be permitted to opt for other elective subjects in other streams in
subsequent semesters.
4.6 Dropping of Electives may be permitted, only after obtaining prior approval from the faculty
advisor / counselor, ‘within a period of 15 days from the beginning of the current semester.
5.0 Subjects / courses to be offered
5.1 A typical section (or class) nominal strength for each semester shall be 60.
5.2 A subject / course may be offered to the students, only if a minimum of 30 students opt for it. The
maximum strength of a section is limited to 80.
6.0 Attendance requirements:
6.1 A student shall be eligible to appear for the semester end examinations, if student acquires a
minimum of 75% of attendance in aggregate of all the subjects / courses (excluding attendance
in mandatory courses, Internship during II year, NCC / NSO and NSS) for that semester.
6.2 Shortage of attendance in aggregate upto 10% (65% and above and below 75%) in each semester
may be condoned by the college academic committee on genuine and valid grounds, based on the
student’s representation with supporting evidence.
6.3 A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condoning of shortage of attendance as decided by
finance committee of SNIST from time to time.
6.4 Shortage of attendance below 65% in aggregate shall NO CASE be condoned.
6.5 Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester are not eligible to
take their end examinations of that semester.
They get detained and their admission for that semester shall stand cancelled.
They will not be promoted to the next semester. They may seek re-admission for all those
subjects registered in that semester in which student was detained, by seeking re-admission into
that semester as and when offered; in case if there are any professional electives and / or open
electives, the same may also be re-registered if offered. However, if those electives are not
offered in later semesters, then alternate electives may be chosen from the same set of elective
subjects offered under that category.
6.6 A student fulfilling the attendance requirement in the present semester shall not be eligible for
readmission into the same semester.
7.0 Academic requirements

The following academic requirements have to be satisfied, in addition to the attendance
requirements mentioned in item no.6.
9
7.1 A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the academic requirements and earned the
credits allotted to each subject / course, if student secures not less than 35% marks (24 out
of 70 marks) in the semester end examination, and a minimum of 40% of marks in the sum
total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester End
Examination) taken together; in terms of letter grades, this implies securing ‘C’ grade or
above in that subject / course.
7.2 A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the academic requirements and earned the credits
allotted to UG mini-project and seminar, if student secures not less than 40% marks (i.e. 40 out
of 100 allotted marks) in each of them. The student would be treated as failed, if student
(i) does not complete all the mandatory courses offered during the course
(ii) does not submit a report on internship mini-project, or does not make a presentation of
the same before the evaluation committee as per schedule, or
(iii) does not present the seminar as required in the I year to IV year or
(iv) secures less than 40% marks in UG mini-project/ seminar evaluations.
Student may reappear once for each of the above evaluations, when they are scheduled again; if
student fails in such ‘one reappearance’ evaluation also, student has to reappear for the same in
the next subsequent semester, as and when it is scheduled.
7.3 Promotion Rules based upon credits
S. No. Promotion Conditions to be fulfilled

1 First year First Regular course of study of first year first semester and
Semester to Second should have satisfied the minimum requirement of
Semester attendance to appear I year I semester.
2 First year to i. Regular course of study of first year First and second
second year first semesters.
semester ii. Must have secured at least 50% of credits (19) upto
first year second semester from all the relevant
regular and supplementary examinations, whether the
student takes those examinations or not.
3 II Year I Semester Regular course of study of s e c o n d year first
. to II Semester semester.
4 Second year to i. Regular course of study of First and second
third year first semesters of second year.
semester ii. Must have secured at least 60% of credits (49)
upto second year second semester from all the
relevant regular and supplementary examinations,
whether the student takes those examinations or not.
5 Third year first Regular course of study of third year first semester.
semester to
second semester
6 Third year second i. Regular course of study of third year second semester.
semester to fourth ii. Must have secured 60% of credits (79) up to third
year first semester year second semester from all the relevant regular
and supplementary examinations, whether the
student takes those examinations or not.
7 Fourth year first Regular course of study of fourth year first semester.
semester to fourth
year second
semester
10
7.4 A student (i) shall attend for all courses / subjecs covering 166 credits as specified and listed in
the course structure, (ii) fulfils all the attendance and academic requirements for 166 credits, (iii)
earn all 166 credits by securing SGPA > 5.0 (in each semester), and CGPA (at the end of each
successive semester) > 5.0, (iv) passes all the mandatory courses, to successfully complete the
under graduate programme. The performance of the student in these 166 credits shall be taken
into account for the calculation of ‘the final CGPA (at the end of under graduate programme),
and shall be indicated in the grade card of IV year II semester.
7.5 If a student registers for some more ‘extra subjects’ (in the parent department or other
departments / branches of Engg.) other than those listed subjects as specified in the course
structure of his Department, the performances in those ‘ extra subjects’ will not be taken into
account while calculating the SGPA and CGPA. For such ‘extra subjects’ registered, Percentage
% of marks and letter grade alone will be indicated in the grade card as a performance measure,
subject to completion of the attendance and academic requirements as stated in regulations 6 and
7.1 to 7.4 above.
7.6 A student eligible to appear in the semester end examination for any subject / course, but absent
from it or failed (thereby failing to secure ‘C’ grade or above) may reappear for that subject/
course in the supplementary examination as and when conducted. In such cases, CIE assessed
earlier for that subject / course will be carried over, and added to the marks obtained in the
supplementary examination for evaluating performance in that subject.
7.7 A student detained in a semester due to shortage of attendance, may be re-admitted when
the same semester is offered in the subsequent academic years for the fulfillment of
academic requirements.
The academic regulations under which student has been readmitted shall be applicable.
However, no grade allotments or SGPA / CGPA calculations will be done for the entire
semester in which student has been detained.
7.8 A student detained due to lack of credits, shall be promoted to the next academic year only
after acquiring the required academic credits.
The academic regulations under which student has been readmitted shall be applicable to him /
her.
8.0 Evaluation - Distribution and weightage of marks
8.1 The performance of a student in each semester shall be evaluated subject-wise for a maximum of
100 marks for a theory and 100 marks for a practical subject with 30 marks Continuous Internal
Evaluations (CIE) and 70 marks for Semester End Examinatins (SEE)
In addition, Internship industry-oriented mini-project, group project, Project – I will also be

evaluated for 100 marks, Project – II for 100 marks, Technical Seminar and comprehensive viva
for 100 marks each.
11
The continuous internal evaluation for Project – I in IV year I semester shall consist of :
Sl.No Description Marks

1 Literature survey and presenting seminar at the 10 marks
end of 6 weeks
2 Report 10 marks
3 Demonstration/presentation at the end of 14 10 marks
weeks
4 Total sessional marks 30 marks
Semester end examination - 70 marks
Pattern of external evaluation for Project – I in IV year I semester.

1 Final report 10
marks
2 Presentation 10
marks
3 Demonstration/defence of project 50
marks
4 Total sessional marks 70
marks
The continuous internal evaluation for Project – II in IV year II semester shall consist of :
Division of marks for External Evaluation for project II – 30 Marks

1 Progress of Project work and the corresponding interim report as 5 marks
evaluated by Project Review Committee at the end of 6 weeks
2 Seminar at the end of 6 weeks 5 marks
3 Progress of Project work as evaluated by Project Review 5 marks
Committee at the end of 11 weeks
4 Seminar at the end of 11 weeks 5 marks
5 Evaluation by Project Review Committee at the end of 15 weeks 5 marks
and Final Project Report
6 Final presentation and defence of project 5 marks
Total 30 marks
Division of marks for External Evaluation for project II – 70 Marks

1 Final Project Report 10 marks
2 Presentation 20 marks
3 Demonstration / Defense of Project 40 marks
4 TOTAL 70 marks
12
8.2 For all the other theory and lab subjects the distribution of marks shall be 30 for Continuous
Internal Evaluation (CIE) and 70 for the Semester End-Examination (SEE).
8.3 Theory Subjects
8.3.1 Pattern for Continuous Internal Evaluation ( CIE) 30 marks
The following procedure is to be adopted for awarding internal marks of 30 for all the B. Tech. students
from the Academic Year 2018-19
The distribution of marks for continuous internal evaluation (30 marks) is shown below. Average of two
Mid Tests will be taken for final award of marks.
a) Part – A of Mid Test will have 10 questions – 5 marks
b) Part – B of Mid Test will have 3 questions (1 from each unit) and student
has to answer 2 questions - 10 marks
c) Part – C Mid Test Question Paper Will have 3 questions – One from
each unit taken from assignment questions. Student has to answer
1 question out of 3 questions - 3 marks
d) Multiple choice questions (10) - 5 marks
e) Assignment – I three questions from each unit – total of 9 questions

to be submitted before first mid test - 2 marks
Similarly assignment – II will be given to be Submitted before Mid Test II

and average of two assignments will be considered.
f) Attendance - 3 marks
g) Class notes - 2 marks
Total 30 marks
Three marks are assigned for each theory course for those students who put in attendance in a
graded manner as given below:
S.No. Attendance Range Marks Awarded

1. 65 % and above but less than 75% 1
2. 75% and above and less than 85% 2
3. 85% and above 3
Marks for attendance shall be added to each subject based on average of attendance of all subjects put
together.
13
If any candidate is absent in any subject or mid-term examination, and he/she wishes to improve
performance, a third mid-test will be conducted for that student by the Institution in the entire syllabus,
on the same day of Semester End Examination (SEE) for 2 1/2 hours. That result will be treated as III mid
test and average of better two will be considered. III mid test will have Part-A (compulsory) and Part-B
with essay type questions and three out of four questions are to be answered.
b) Pattern for External Examinations - (70 marks)
• There shall be external examination in every theory course and consists of two parts (Part-A &
Part-B). The total time duration for this semester end examination will be 3 hours.
• Part-A shall have 20 marks, which is compulsory. It will have 10 short questions set with 2
marks each. There shall be atleast one question to each of the six units and the number of
questions from any unit shall not exceed two.
• Part-B of the question paper shall have essay type questions for 50 marks and shall have 8
questions out of which any 5 are to be answered. At least one question must appear from each
Unit. . Seventh question must have 2 to 3 bits taken from 1st, 2nd, and 3rd units and 8th question
also with 2 to 3 bits taken from 4th, 5th and 6th units, such that not more than 2 questions shall
be from any one unit. All the questions carry equal marks.
8.4 Pattern of Evaluation for Lab subjects - (100 marks)
8.4.1 For practical subjects there shall be a continuous evaluation during the semester for 30 sessional
marks and 70 marks for semester end examination. Out of the 30 marks for Continuous Internal
Evaluation, the distribution of marks is as follows
S. No Item Marks
1. Day to Day work 05 marks
2. Final Record and viva 09 marks
3. Average of two tests including viva 05 marks
4. Lab Based Project Report viva and 08 marks
demo
5. Attendance 03 marks
Total 30 marks
8.4.2 The semester end examination for 70 marks for the lab subjects shall be conducted by an external
examiner and an internal examiner appointed by the Chief Superintendent of Examinations of the
college. The marks are distributed as follows:
S. No Item Marks
1. Procedure to experiment and Tabulation 10 marks
2. Conduct of experiment, observation, Calculation 30 marks
3. Results including graphs, discussions and 20 marks
conclusion
4. Viva voce and Record 10 marks
Total 70 marks
14
8.4.3 In case computer based examinations
S. No Item Marks
1. Flow chart and algorithms 10 marks
2. Program writing and execution 30 marks
3. Result and conclusions 20 marks
4. Viva voce and Record 10 marks
Total 70 marks
8.5 For the subject having design and / or drawing, (such as Engineering Drawing and
Machine Drawing), the distribution shall be 30 marks for internal evaluation (10 marks for
day-to-day work including drawing,3 marks for home assignment work, 12 marks for
average of two internal tests and 2 marks for class notes 3 marks for attendance) and 70
marks for end semester examination.
There shall be two internal tests in a Semester and the average of the two shall be considered for
the award of marks for internal tests.
Third test facility can be availed as mentioned above (8.3.1 (i) (a) and (b)
8.6. Technical Seminar (100 marks)
There shall be a technical seminar evaluated for 100 marks from I year to III year I Seemester.
The evaluation is purely internal and will be conducted as follows:

1 10
Literature survey, topic and content
2 Presentation including PPT 15
3 Seminar Notes 10
4 Interaction 05
5 Report 10
6 Attendance in the seminar class 10
7 Punctuality in giving seminar as per Scheduled time 10
and date
8 Mid Semester Viva (on the seminar topics 10
completed up to the end of 9th week
9 End Semester Viva 20
Total 100 Marks
15
Student must secure 40% i.e. 40 marks to be successful
* According to the syllabus approved by the Academic Council as per Board of studies
recommendations
8.7 Comprehensive Viva-voce (II-II, III-II and IV-II*)
There shall be comprehensive viva voce as stated above which will be evaluated for 100 marks.
Out of 100 marks, 30 marks are internal and 70 marks are external.
S.No. Description marks

1 First mid-sessional viva at the end of 5 weeks (Internal) 15 marks
2 Second mid-sessional viva at the end of 10 weeks 15 marks
(Internal)
3 Final viva during practical examinations (External) 70 marks
4 Total 100 Marks
--
* According to the syllabus approved by the Academic Council as per Board of Studies
recommendations
8.7.2 The evaluation of comprehensive viva-voce has to be carried out by two teachers independently
and average be taken.
The sessional marks awarded by the Department are not final.

They are subject to scrutiny by a committee constituted by the college and scaling is done
wherever necessary.
The recommendations of the Committee are final and binding.
8.8 The laboratory records and internal test papers shall be preserved in the respective departments
as per the college norms and shall be produced to the Committee of the college or any external
agency like AICTE, NAAC, JNTUH, NBA etc., as and when the same are called for.
8.9. There shall be an industrial oriented Mini Project / Summer Internship, in collaboration with an
industry of their specialization. Students will register for this immediately after III year II
semester examinations and pursue it during summer vacation. Industrial Oriented Mini Project /
Summer Internship shall be submitted in a report form and presented before the committee in IV
year I semester similarly summer internship in an Industry of their specialization will be given
for B.Tech II year II semester students and pursue it in the summer vacation. A report on
summer internship shall be submitted and presented before the committee in III year I semester
and IV year I semester. It shall be evaluated for 30 internal marks and 70 external marks. The
committee consists of an external examiner, Head of the Department, supervisor of the Industrial
Oriented mini project / Summer Internship and a senior faculty member of the department.
16
8.10 The laboratory marks and the internal marks awarded by the college are subject to scrutiny and
scaling by the Departmental committees wherever necessary. In such cases, the internal and
laboratory marks awarded by the department will be referred to a committee. The committee
will arrive at a scaling factor and the marks will be scaled accordingly. The recommendation of
the committee is final and binding. The laboratory records and internal test papers shall be
preserved in the respective departments as per the college rules and produced before the visiting
committee as and when asked for.
8.11. For mandatory courses of Induction Programme (Human values, and Ethics in Higher
Education), Environmental Science and Ecology, Indian Standards a student has to secure 40
marks out of 100 marks (i.e. 40% of the marks allotted) in the continuous internal evaluation and
external examination for passing the subject / course. These marks should also be uploaded
along with the internal marks of other subjects.
9.0 Grading procedure
9.1 Marks will be awarded to indicate the performance of student in each theory subject, laboratory /
practicals, seminar, UG mini project and UG major project.
Based on the percentage of marks obtained (Continuous Internal Evaluation plus Semester
End Examination, both taken together) as specified in item 8 above, a corresponding letter grade
shall be given.
9.2 As a measure of the performance of student, a 10-point absolute grading system using the
following letter grades (as per UGC / AICTE guidelines) and corresponding percentage of marks
shall be followed:
% of Marks Secured in a Letter Grade Grade Points

Subject / Course (UGC Guidelines) (GP)
(Class Intervals)
Greater than or equal to 90% O
(Outstanding) 1
0
A+
80% and less than 90% (Excellent) 9
A
70% and less than 80% (Very Good) 8
B+
60% and less than 70% (Good) 7
50% and less than 60% B 6
(Average)
40% and less than 50% C 5
(Pass)
Below 40% F (FAIL) 0
Absent Ab 0
17
9.3 A student obtaining ‘F’ grade in any subject shall be deemed to have ‘failed’ and is required to
reappear as a ‘supplementary student’ in the semester end examination, as and when offered. In
such cases, internal marks in those subjects will remain the same as those obtained earlier.
9.4 A student who has not appeared for examination in any subject, ‘Ab’ grade will be allocated in
that subject, and student shall be considered ‘failed’. Student will be required to reappear as a
‘supplementary student’ in the semester end examination, as and when offered.
9.5 A letter grade does not indicate any specific percentage of marks secured by the student, but it
indicates only the range of percentage of marks.
9.6 A student earns grade point (GP) in each subject / course, on the basis of the letter grade secured
in that subject / course. The corresponding ‘credit points’ (CP) are computed by multiplying the
grade point with credits for that particular subject/ course.
Credit points (CP) = grade point (GP) x credits …. For a course
9.7 The student passes the subject / course only when GP is not less than 5 (i.e. ‘C’ grade or
above)
9.8 The semester grade point average (SGPA) is calculated by dividing the sum of credit points (CP)
secured from all subjects / courses registered in a semester, by the total number of credits
registered during that semester. SGPA is rounded off to two decimal places. SGPA is thus
computed as
 
N N
SGPA = { i 1
Ci Gi } / { i 1
Ci } …. For each semester
(i.e., upto and inclusive of S semesters, S 2),
where ‘N’ is the total number of subjects (as specifically required and listed under the course
structure of the parent department) the student has ‘registered’ i.e., from the 1st semester
onwards upto and inclusive of the 8th semester, ‘j’ is the subject indicator index (takes into
account the subjects from 1 to 8 semesters), C J is the number of credits allotted to the Jth
subjects and Gj represents the grade points (GP) corresponding to the letter grade awarded for
that Jth subject.
After registration and completion of the first year first semester, SGPA of that semester itself
may be taken as the CGPA, as there are no cumulative effects.
Illustration of calculation of SGPA
Letter Grade Credit

Course / Subject Credits Grade Points Points
Course 1 4 A 8 4 x 8 = 32
Course 2 4 O 10 4 x 10 = 40
Course 3 4 C 5 4 x 5 = 20
Course 4 3 B 6 3 x 6 = 18
Course 5 3 A+ 9 3 x 9 = 27
Course 6 3 C 5 3 x 5 = 15
21 152
SGPA = 152/21 = 7.24
18
Illustration of calculation of CGPA:
Course / Credits Letter Grade Points Credit points

Subject Grade Points
I Year I
Semester
Course 1 4 A 8 4 x 8 = 32
Course 2 4 A 9 4 x 9 = 36
Course 3 4 +B 6 4 x 6 = 24
Course 4 3 O 10 3 x 10 = 30
Course 5 3 B 7 3 x 7 = 21
Course 6 3 +A 8 3 x 8 = 24
I Year II
Semester
Course 7 4 B 7 4 x 7 = 28
Course 8 4 +O 10 4 x 10 = 40
Course 9 4 A 8 4 x 8 = 32
Course 10 3 B 6 3 x 6 = 18
Course 11 3 C 5 3 x 5 = 15
Course 12 3 A 9 3 x 9 = 27
Total Credits = 42 + Total Credit Points =327
CGPA = 327/42 = 7.79
9.9 For merit ranking or comparison purposes or any other listing, only the ‘rounded off’ values of
the CGPAs will be used.
9.10 For calculations listed in regulations 9.6 to 9.9, performance in failed subjects/ courses (securing
F grade) will also be taken into account, and the credits of such subjects/courses will also be
included in the multiplications and summations.
After passing the failed subject(s) newly secured letter grades will be taken into account for
calculation of SGPA and CGPA.
However, mandatory courses will not be taken into consideration.
10.0 Passing standards
10.1 A student shall be declared successful or ‘passed’ in a semester, if student secures a GP ≥ 5 (‘C’
grade or above) in every subject/course in that semester (i.e. when student gets an SGPA 5.00 at
the end of that particular semester); and a student shall be declared successful or ‘passed’ in the
entire under graduate programme, only when gets a CGPA 5.00 for the award of the degree as
required.
10.2 After the completion of each semester, a grade card or grade sheet (or transcript) shall be issued
to all the registered students of that semester, indicating the letter grades and credits earned. It
will show the details of the courses registered (course code, title, no. of credits, and grade earned
etc.), credits earned, SGPA, and CGPA.
11.0 Declaration of results
11.1 Computation of SGPA and CGPA are done using the procedure listed in 9.6 to 9.9.
19
11.2 For final percentage of formula may be used.
12.0 Award of degree marks equivalent to the computed final CGPA, the following
% of Marks = (final CGPA – 0.5) x 10
12.1 A student who registers for all the specified subjects/ courses as listed in the course structure and
secures the total number of credits (with CGPA >5.0), within 8 academic years from the date of
commencement of the first academic year, shall be declared to have ‘qualified’ for the award of
the B.Tech. degree in the chosen branch of Engineering as selected at the time of admission.
12.2 A student who qualifies for the award of the degree as listed in item 12.1 shall be placed in the
following classes.
12.3 Students with final CGPA (at the end of the under graduate programme) 8.00 and above, and
fulfilling the following conditions -
(i) Should have passed all the subjects/courses in ‘first appearance’ within the first 4 academic
years (or 8 sequential semesters) from the date of commencement of first year first semester.
(ii) Should have secured a CGPA 8.00, at the end of each of semesters, starting from first year first
semester onwards.
(iii) Should not have been detained or prevented from writing the end semester examinations in
any semester due to shortage of attendance or any other reason, shall be placed in ‘FIRST
CLASS WITH DISTINCTION’, otherwise FIRST CLASS only.
12.4 Students with final CGPA (at the end of the under graduate programme) ≥ 6.5 but ≤ 8.00, shall
be placed in ‘FIRST CLASS’.
12.5 Students with final CGPA (at the end of the under graduate programme) ≥ 6 but ≤ 6.5, shall be
placed in ‘SECOND CLASS’.
12.6 All other students who qualify for the award of the degree (as per item 12.1), with final CGPA
(at the end of the under graduate programme) ≥ 5 but ≤ 6, shall be placed in ‘pass class’.
12.7 A student with final CGPA (at the end of the under graduate programme) < 5.00 will not be
eligible for the award of the degree.
12.8 Students fulfilling the conditions listed under item 12.3 alone will be eligible for award of
‘university rank’ and ‘gold medal’.
13.0 Withholding of results
13.1 If the student has not paid the fees to the university / college at any stage, or has dues pending due
to any reason whatsoever, or if any case of indiscipline is pending, the result of the student may
be withheld, and student will not be allowed to go into the next higher semester. The award or
issue of the degree may also be withheld in such cases.
14.0 Transitory regulations
14.1 A student who has discontinued for any reason, or has been detained for want of
attendance or lack of required credits as specified, or who has failed after having undergone the
degree programme, may be considered eligible for readmission to the same subjects / courses (or
equivalent subjects/ courses, as the case may be), and same professional electives / open electives
20
(or from set/category of electives or equivalents suggested, as the case may be) as and when they
are offered (within the time-frame of 8 years from the date of commencement of student's first
year first semester).
A student admitted in one academic regulation and he is getting readmission in some other
academic regulations , the college has to offer substitute / additional subjects based on the
comparison of two academic regulations. The details of substitute / additional subjects offered
with the recommendations of board of studies of the concerned branch has to be given from time
to time.
15.0 Student transfers
15.1 There shall be no branch transfers after the completion of admission process.
15.2 The students seeking transfer to Sreenidhi Institute of Science and Technology ( SNIST) from
various other Universities / institutions have to pass the failed subjects which are equivalent to
the subjects of SNIST, and also pass the subjects of SNIST which the students have not studied
at the earlier institution.
Further, though the students have passed some of the subjects at the earlier semesters of SNIST,
the students have to study substitute subjects in SNIST and get sessional marks by attending 3 rd
mid test and paying requisite fee as per the rules.
15.3 The transferred students from other Universities/ institutions to SNIST who are on rolls to be
provide one chance to write the CEE (internal marks) in the failed subjects and /or subjects not
studied as per the clearance letter issued by the Institution.
15.4 The autonomous affiliated colleges have to provide one chance to write the internal examinations
in the failed subjects and /or subjects not studied, to the students transferred from other
universities / institutions to SNIST who are on rolls, as per the clearance (equivalence) letter
issued by the University.
16.0 Scope
16.1 The academic regulations should be read as a whole, for the purpose of any interpretation.
16.2 In case of any doubt or ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of the
Academic Council is final and binding.
16.3 The Institution may change or amend the academic regulations, course structure or syllabi at any
time, and the changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all students with effect from
the date notified by the Institution.
21
Academic Regulations for B.Tech.

(LATERAL ENTRY SCHEME)
w.e.f the AY 2019-20
1. Eligibility for award of B. Tech. Degree (LES)

The Lateral Entry Scheme (LES) students after securing admission shall pursue a course of
study for not less than three academic years and not more than six academic years failing which
he will forfeit the seat.
2. The student shall register and secure for all the credits with CGPA ≥ 5 from II year to IV year
B.Tech. programme (LES) as per the regulations for the award of B.Tech. degree. Out of the
total credits secured, the student can avail exemption up to 6 credits, that is, one open
elective subject and one professional elective subject or two professional elective subjects
resulting in 160 credits for B.Tech programme performance evaluation.
3. The students, who fail to fulfil the requirement for the award of the degree in six academic years
from the year of admission, shall forfeit their seat in B.Tech.
4. The attendance requirements of B. Tech. (Regular) shall be applicable to B.Tech. (LES).
5. Promotion rules based on credits
S. Promotion Conditions to be fulfilled

No1 Second year first semester to Regular course of study of second year first semester.
second year second semester
2 Second year second semester to (i) Regular course of study of second year second semester.
third year first semester (ii) Must have secured at least 29 credits
out of 48 credits i.e., 60% of credits up to second year second
semester from all the relevant regular and supplementary
examinations, whether the student takes those examinations or
not.
3 Third year first semester to third Regular course of study of third year first semester.
year second semester
4 Third year second semester to (i) Regular course of study of third year second semester.
fourth year first semester (ii) Must have secured at least 58 credits out of 96 credits
i.e., 60% of credits up to third year second semester from
all the relevant regular and supplementary examinations,
whether the student takes those examinations or not.
5 Fourth year first semester to Regular course of study of fourth year first semester.
fourth year second semester
6. All the other regulations as applicable to B. Tech. 4-year degree course (Regular) will hold
good for B. Tech. (Lateral Entry Scheme).
22
MALPRACTICES
RULES
DISCIPLINARY ACTION FOR / IMPROPER CONDUCT IN EXAMINATIONS
Nature of Malpractice/Improper
conduct Punishment
If the student:
Possesses or keeps accessible in
examination hall, any paper, note book,
programmable calculators, cell phones,
pager, palm computers or any other form
of material concerned with or related to the
subject of the examination (theory or
practical) in which student is appearing but Expulsion from the examination hall and
has not made use of (material shall include cancellation of the performance in that subject only.
1. (a) any marks on the body of the student
which can be used as an aid in the subject
of the examination)
Gives assistance or guidance or receives

it from any other student orally or by Expulsion from the examination hall and
any other body language methods or cancellation of the performance in that subject only
(b) communicates through cell phones with any of all the students involved. In case of an outsider,
student or persons in or outside the exam he will be handed over to the police and a case is
hall in respect of any matter. registered against him.
Expulsion from the examination hall and

Has copied in the examination hall from any cancellation of the performance in that subject and
paper, book, programmable calculators, all other subjects the student has already appeared
palm computers or any other form of including practical examinations and UG major
material relevant to the subject of the project and shall not be permitted to appear for the
2. examination (theory or practical) in which remaining examinations of the subjects of that
the student is appearing. semester/year.
The hall ticket of the student is to be cancelled and
sent to the university.
The student who has impersonated shall be

expelled from examination hall. The student is also
debarred and forfeits the seat. The performance of
the original student who has been impersonated,
shall be cancelled in all the subjects of the
examination (including practicals and UG major
project) already appeared and shall not be allowed
3. Impersonates any other student in to appear for examinations of the remaining
connection with the examination. subjects of that semester/year. The student is also
debarred for two consecutive semesters from class
work and all university examinations. The
continuation
23
of the course by the student is subject to the

academic regulations in connection with forfeiture
of seat. If the imposter is an outsider, he will
be handed over to the police and a case is registered
against him.

cancellation of performance in that subject and all
the other subjects the student has already appeared
Smuggles in the answer book or additional including practical examinations and UG major
sheet or takes out or arranges to send out project and shall not be permitted for the
the question paper during the examination remaining examinations of the subjects of that
or answer book or additional sheet, during semester/year. The student is also debarred for two
4. or after the examination. consecutive semesters from class work and all
university examinations. The continuation of the
course by the student is subject to the academic
regulations in connection with forfeiture of seat.
Uses objectionable, abusive or offensive

language in the answer paper or in
5. letters to the examiners or writes to the Cancellation of the performance in that subject.
examiner requesting him to award pass
marks.
Refuses to obey the orders of the chief
superintendent/assistant – superintendent /
any officer on duty or misbehaves or
creates disturbance of any kind in and
around the examination hall or organizes a
walk out or instigates others to walk out, or
threatens the officer-in charge or any person
on duty in or outside the examination hall of
any injury to his person or to any of his
relations whether by words, either spoken or
written or by signs or by visible In case of students of the college, they shall be
representation, assaults the officer-in- expelled from examination halls and cancellation
charge, or any person on duty in or outside of their performance in that subject and all
the examination hall or any of his relations, other subjects the student(s) has (have) already
or indulges in any other act of misconduct appeared and shall not be permitted to appear for
or mischief which result in damage to or the remaining examinations of the subjects of that
destruction of property in the examination semester/year. The students also are debarred and
6. hall or any part of the college campus or forfeit their seats. In case of outsiders, they will
engages in any other act which in the be handed over to the police and a police case is
opinion of the officer on duty amounts to registered against them.
use of unfair means or misconduct or has
the tendency to disrupt the orderly conduct
of the examination.
24

cancellation of performance in that subject and all
the other subjects the student has already appeared
including practical examinations and UG major
project and shall not be permitted for the
Leaves the exam hall taking away answer remaining examinations of the subjects of that
script or intentionally tears of the script semester/year. The student is also debarred for two
or any part thereof inside or outside the consecutive semesters from class work and all
7. examination hall. university examinations. The continuation of the
course by the student is subject to the academic
regulations in connection with forfeiture of seat.

cancellation of the performance in that subject and
all other subjects the student has already appeared
Possess any lethal weapon or firearm in the including practical examinations and UG major
examination hall. project and shall not be permitted for the
8. remaining examinations of the subjects of that
semester/year. The student is also debarred and
forfeits the seat.
Student of the colleges expulsion from the

examination hall and cancellation of the
performance in that subject and all other subjects
the student has already appeared including practical
If student of the college, who is not a examinations and UG major project and shall not be
student for the particular examination or any permitted for the remaining examinations of the
person not connected with the college subjects of that semester/year. The student is also
indulges in any malpractice or improper debarred and forfeits the seat.
9. conduct mentioned in clause 6 to 8.
Person(s) who do not belong to the college will be
handed over to police and, a police case will be
registered against them.

cancellation of the performance in that subject and
all other subjects the student has already appeared
Comes in a drunken condition to the including practical examinations and UG major
10. examination hall. project and shall not be permitted for the
remaining examinations of the subjects of that
semester/year.
Cancellation of the performance in that subject

and all other subjects the student has appeared
including practical examinations and UG major
Copying detected on the basis of project of that semester/year examinations.
11. internal evidence, such as, during valuation
or during special scrutiny.
25
12. If any malpractice is detected which is not covered in the above clauses 1 to 11 shall be reported to
the university for further action to punishment. award suitable
Malpractices identified by squad or special invigilators
1. Punishments to the students as per the above guidelines.
2. Punishment for institutions: (if the squad reports that the college is encouraging malpractices)
a. A show cause notice shall be issued to the college. b. Impose a suitable fine on the college.
c. Shifting the examination centre from the college to another college for a specific period of not
less than one year.
***
26
A-18 Curriculum (Course Structure) for B. Tech (I Year to IV Year) - ECE under autonomous
I Year I Semester ECE
Sl. Course Course code Name of the Course L T P C Marks

No Type CIE SEE
1. BS 7HC05 Engineering Physics 3 1 0 4 30 70
2. ES 7AC02 Network Analysis 3 0 0 3 30 70
3. BS 7HC06 Engineering Mathematics – I 3 1 0 4 30 70
4. ES 7BC02 Engineering Graphics & Design 1 0 4 3 30 70
5. HS 7HC02 English (Oral communication 1 0 0 1 30 70
skills)
6. MC 7HC20 Human Values and Professional 3 0 0 0 30 70
Ethics in Higher Education Grade
Evaluation
7. BS 7HC65 Engineering Physics lab 0 0 3 1.5 30 70
8. ES 7AC61 Electrical Circuits and Network 0 0 2 1 30 70
Analysis lab
9 HS 7HC62 English (Oral communication 0 0 2 1 30 70
skills) Lab
10 PW 7C191 Technical Seminar-I 0 0 2 1 100 -
Total 11 2 11 19.5 370 630
I Year II Semester ECE
Sl.No Course Type Course code Name of the Course L T P C Marks
CIE SEE
1. BS 7HC03 Chemistry 3 1 0 4 30 70
2. ES 7FC01 Problem Solving 3 0 0 3 30 70
using C
3. BS 7HC08 Engineering 3 1 0 4 30 70
Mathematics – II
4. ES 7BC01 Workshop/ 1 0 0 1 30 70
Manufacturing
practices
5. HS 7HC01 English (Reading, 1 0 0 1 30 70
Listening and Writing)
6. BS 7HC63 Chemistry Lab 0 0 3 1.5 30 70
7. ES 7FC71 Problem Solving 0 0 3 1.5 30 70
using C Lab
8. ES 7BC61 Workshop/ 0 0 3 1.5 30 70
Manufacturing
practices lab
9. HS 7HC61 English (Reading, 0 0 2 1 30 70
Listening and Writing)
Lab
10. PW 7C292 Technical Seminar - II 0 0 2 1 100 -
Total 11 2 14 19.5 370 630
27
A-18 Curriculum (Course Structure) for B. Tech (I Year to IV Year) - ECE under autonomous
II Year I Semester (III-Semester)

S. Course Code Course Title L T P Credits Marks
N Type CIE SEE
o
1 PC 7C301 Electronic Devices and Circuits 3 - - 3 30 70
2 PC 7C302 Digital Logic Design 3 - - 3 30 70
3 PC 7C303 Signals and Systems 2 1 - 3 30 70
4 ES 7C304 Probability Theory and Stochastic 2 1 - 3 30 70
Process
5 BS 7HC13 Transform Techniques 2 - - 2 30 70
6 ES 7AC43 Electrical Technology 2 - - 2 30 70
7 ES 7BC04 Elements of Mechanical Engineering 2 - - 2 30 70
8 MC 7HC21 Environmental Science and Ecology 3 - - - 30 70
Grade
Evaluation
9 PC 7C371 Electronic Devices and Circuits Lab - - 2 1 30 70
10 ES 7AC94 Electrical Technology Lab - - 2/2 0.5 30 70
11 PC 7C372 Digital Logic Design Lab - - 2/2 0.5 30 70
12 PW 7C393 Technical Seminar-III - - 2 1 100 -
Total 19 2 7 21 430 770
II Year II Semester (IV-Semester)
1 PC 7C405 Analog Circuits 3 - - 3 30 70
2 PC 7CC06 Electromagnetic Waves and 2 1 - 3 30 70
Transmission Lines
3 PC 7CC07 Analog Communications 3 - - 3 30 70
4 PC 7DC11 Computer Organization and 3 - - 3 30 70
Architecture
5 ES 7EC01 Data Structures 3 - - 3 30 70
6 HS 7ZC01 Management Science and Financial 2 - - 2 30 70
Accounting
7 PC 7C473 Basic Simulation Lab - - 2 1 30 70
8 PC 7C474 Analog Circuits Lab - - 2 1 30 70
9 PC 7CC75 Analog Communications lab - - 2 1 30 70
10 PC 7C494 Technical Seminar-IV - - 2 1 100 -
11 PW 7C496 Comprehensive Viva-Voce-I - - - 1 30 70
*
12 PW 7C461 Summer Industry Internship-I - - - - - 100
Total 15 1 9 22 300 700
*Evaluation will be done along with III-I Subjects
28
III Year I Semester (V-Semester)

S. Code Course Title L T P Credits Marks
No CIE SEE
PC 7CC08 30 70
1 IC Applications 3 - - 3
PC 7CC09 30 70
2 Digital Communications 3 - - 3
30 70
3 PC 7DC05 Microprocessors and 3 - - 3
Microcontrollers
PC 7AC07 30 70
4 Control Systems 3 - - 3
30 70
5 OE Open Elective – I 3 - - 3
30 70
6 BS 7H518 Quantative Analysis 1 1 - 2
30 70
7 PC 7DC71 Microprocessors and Micro - - 4 2
Controllers Lab
PC 7CC76 30 70
8 IC Applications Lab - - 4 2
PC 7C577 30 70
9 Digital Communications Lab - - 4 2
PW 7C461 30 70
10 Summer Industry Internship – I - - - 1
- - 2 1 100 -
11 PW 7C595 Technical Seminar-V
Total 16 1 14 25 400 700
III Year II Semester (VI-Semester)
30 70
1 PC 7CC10 Digital Signal Processing 3 - - 3
30 70
2 PC 7C611 VLSI Technology and Design 3 - - 3
30 70
3 PC 7C612 Internet of Things and 3 - - 3
Applications
30 70
4 PC 7CC13 Antennas and Wave Propagations 3 - - 3
30 70
5 PE Professional Elective – I 3 - - 3
30 70
6 BS 7H619 Logical Reasoning 1 1 - 2
30 70
7 PC 7CC78 Digital Signal Processing Lab - - 4 2
30 70
8 PC 7C679 VLSI Design Lab - - 4/2* 1
30 70
9 PC 7C680 Internet of Things and - - 4/2* 1
Applications Lab
30 70
10 HS 7HC74 Soft skills and Technical - - 2 1
communication
30
11 PW 7C697 Comprehensive Viva-Voce-II - - - 1
30 70
12 PW 7C663 Group Project - - 4 2
PW 7C662 Summer Industry Internship-II* - - - -
13
Total 16 1 14 25 360 840
*Evaluation will be done along with IV-I Subjects
29
IV Year I Semester (VII-Semester)

1 PC 7EC05 Computer Networks 3 - - 3 30 70
2 PC 7C714 2 - - 2 30 70
Microwave and Optical
Communications
3 OE Open Elective – II 3 - - 3 30 70
4 PE Professional Elective – II 3 - - 3 30 70
5 PE Professional Elective – III 3 - - 3 30 70
6 PC 7EC75 Computer Networks Lab - - 4/2 1 30 70
7 PC 7C781 Antenna Simulation Lab - - 4/2 1 30 70
8 PC 7C782 Micro Wave and Optical - - 4/2 1 30 70
Communications Lab
9 PW 7C764 Project – I - - 4 2 100 -
10 PW 7C662 Summer Industry Internship - II - - - 1 30 70
Total 14 0 10 20 370 630
IV Year II Semester (VIII-Semester)

1 OE Open Elective – III 3 - - 3 30 70
2 PE Professional Elective – IV 3 - - 3 30 70
3 PE Professional Elective – V 3 - - 3 30 70
4 PW 7C865 Project – II - - 10 5 50 150
Total 9 10 14 140 360
30
Professional Electives
S. No Code Stream Course Title

Professional Elective-I
1 7C615 VLSI Digital Design through Verilog
2 7C616 Embedded System Embedded C Programming
3 7C617 Signal Processing Digital Image and Video Processing
4 7CC18 Communications Cellular and Mobile communications
SWAYAM MOOCS Course*
*The department will identify the MOOCS Course from the available courses in SWAYAM portal for the
semester.
Professional Elective-II
5 7C719 VLSI CMOS Digital IC Design
6 7C720 Embedded System Embedded Python Programming
7 7C721 Signal Processing DSP Processors and Architectures
8 7CC22 Communications Wireless Communications and Networks
Professional Elective-III
9 7C723 VLSI Degital Design Verification with System Verilog
10 7C724 Embedded System Embedded System Design
11 7C725 Signal processing Artificial Neural Networks
12 7C726 Communications Software defined radio
Professional Elective-IV
13 7C827 Digital Design and Verification with Universal
VLSI
Verification Methodology
14 7C828 Embedded System Embedded Real Time Operating Systems
15 7CC29 Signal Processing Artificial Intelligence
16 7C830 1. Satellite Communications
Communications
17 7C831 2. Radar Communications
Professional Elective-V
18 7C832 VLSI Mixed Signal Design
19 7C833 Embedded System System-on-Chip Architecture
20 7C834 Signal Processing Machine Learning
21 7C835 Communications 5G Communications
31
Open Electives
Code Stream Course Title

Open Elective-I
7ZC05 Finance Banking Operations, Insurance and Risk Management.
7EC65 Computer Science JAVA Programming
7ZC22 Entrepreneurship Basics of Entrepreneurship
7ZC25 Social Sciences Stream Indian polity and Economy
7CC36 ECE Stream Fundamentals of signal processing
7CC37 Fundamentals of digital circuits & Microprocessors
7AC47 EEE stream Power Electronic Devices and Converters
7BC51 Mechanical Stream Smart Materials
Open Elective-II
7ZC19 Entrepreneurship, Project Management and Structured
Finance
Finance
7FC23 Computer Science Data Base Systems
7ZC30 Entrepreneurship Advanced Entrepreneurship
7ZC26 Social Sciences Stream Ecology and disaster management
7CC38 ECE Stream Communication Theory
7AC44 EEE stream Fundamentals of Measurements and Instruments.
7BC53 Mechanical Stream Principles of operation Research
7BC52 Mechanical Stream Principles of manufacturing process
SWAYAM MOOCS Course*
*The department will identify the MOOCS Course from the available courses in SWAYAM portal for
the semester.
Open Elective-III
7ZC15 Finance Financial Institutions , Markets and services
7EC67 Computer Science Operating systems concepts
7ZC24 Entrepreneurship Innovation and Design Thinking.
7ZC27 Social Sciences Stream Indian History, culture and Geography
7CC39 ECE Stream Introduction to VLSI and Embedded Systems
7AC45 EEE stream Fundamentals of Renewable energy sources
7BC55 Mechanical Stream Principles of Automation and Robotics
S. No Course Type Abbreviation

1 HS Humanities and Social Science including Management Courses
2 BS Basic Science Courses
3 ES Engineering Science Courses
4 MC Mandatory Courses
5 PC Professional Core Courses
6 PW Project Work, Seminar Internship in industry
7 PE Professional Electives
8 OE Open Electives
32
Syllabus for B.Tech. I year I Semester
Electronics and Communication and Engineering
ENGINEERING PHYSICS
L T P C
Code: 7HC05 ENGINEERING PHYSICS 3 1 0 4
Course Objectives
 To know about the semiconductors, types, carrier concentration, Thermistor, Hall effect and also
to understand the concept of PN-junction, I-V Characteristics, LED, Solar Cell and Photo diode.
 Explain about the Quantum Mechanics to understand wave particle duality, necessity of quantum
mechanics to explore the behavior of sub atomic particles. Schroedinger’s Time Independent
Wave Equation, Physical Significance of the Wave Function – Application of Schroedinger wave
equation.
 To understand the basic concepts of normal light, Laser and its applications and to know about
the fiber optics, principle (TIR), Numerical Aperture, Types of optical Fibers, Step index and
graded index Fibers, attenuation in optical fibers. Applications: optical fiber communication
system, fiber optic sensors, medical endoscopy.
 To study the concepts of magnetism and superconductivity, Bohr magneton, Hysteresis nature,
domain structure, Meissner effect, types of superconductors, BCS theory and applications of
superconductors.
 To understand the concepts of dielectrics, polarizations and its types, internal fields, Clausius-
Mossitti equation, Frequency and temperature effect on dielectrics and its applications – Piezo-
electricity, pyro-electricity and ferro-electricity.
 To discuss about the nano-technology, preparation techniques and characterization (XRD, SEM
& TEM), CNTs and to know about the fundamentals of radioactivity and its applications.
Unit:1
Semiconductors
Fermi Level in Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconductors, calculation of carrier concentration of Intrinsic
and Extrinsic Semiconductors, Direct & Indirect Band Gap Semiconductors, Thermistor, Hall Effect in
semiconductors and applications.
Semiconductor devices
Formation of PN Junction and working of PN Junction. Energy Diagram of PN Diode, Diode equation
(Quantitative treatment), I-V Characteristics of PN Junction, Application - LED, Solar Cell and Photo
diode.
Unit:2
Wave nature of particles, Schroedinger equation and its application
Waves and Particles, de Broglie Hypothesis, Matter waves, Davisson and Germer’s Experiment, G.P.
Thomson Experiment, Heisenberg’s Uncertainty Principle, Schroedinger’s Time Independent Wave
Equation – Physical Significance of the Wave Function – Application of Schroedinger wave equation -
Particle in One Dimensional Potential Box.
33
Unit:3
Lasers
Characteristics of LASER, Spontaneous and Stimulated Emission of Radiation, Meta-stable State,

Population Inversion, Lasing Action, Einstein’s Coefficients and Relation between them and
significance, Ruby Laser, Helium-Neon Laser, Semiconductor Diode Laser, Applications of Lasers.
Fiber optics
Introduction, Principle of Optical Fiber, Acceptance Angle and Acceptance Cone, Numerical Aperture,
Types of Optical Fibers, Step index and graded index Fibers Attenuation in Optical Fibers. Applications:
Optical Fiber communication system, Fiber Optic Sensors, Medical Endoscopy.
Unit:4
Magnetic and Superconducting materials
Permeability, Field Intensity, Magnetic Induction, Magnetization, Magnetic Susceptibility, Origin of

Magnetic Moment, Bohr Magneton. Hysteresis behavior of Ferro Magnetic materials based on Domain
theory. Hard and Soft Magnetic Materials, Properties of Anti-Ferro and Ferri Magnetic Materials and
their applications,
Super conductivity, effect of Magnetic Field, Critical current density, Meissner effect, Type-I and Type-
II superconductors, BCS theory, applications of
superconductors.
Unit:5
Dielectric materials and their properties
Electric Dipole, Dipole Moment, Dielectric Constant, Electric Susceptibility, Electronic and Ionic
polarizability (Quantitative) Orientation Polarization (Qualitative), Internal fields in Solids, Clausius -
Mossotti equation, Frequency and temperature effect on Dielectrics (Qualitative), Applications - Piezo-
electricity, Pyro-electricity and Ferro-electricity.
Unit:5
Nanotechnology
Origin of Nanotechnology, Nano Scale, Surface to Volume Ratio, Quantum Confinement, Bottom-up
Fabrication, Sol-gel, Precipitation, Chemical vapor Deposition(CVD); Top-down Fabrication; Thermal
evaporation, Ball Milling, Characterization of Nano materials (XRD&TEM), carbon nano tubes(CNTs),
Applications of Nano Materials.
Nuclear Energy: Radioactivity, Nuclear binding energy, Nuclear fission, Nuclear fusion, , β, γ rays
decay, Geiger-Muller counter and practical applications of nuclear physics.
34
Text Books:
1.B.K. Pandey & S. Chaturvedi Engineering Physics, Cengage Learning
2.D.K. Bhattacharya and Poonam Tandon, OXFORD university press.
Reference Books:
1. Charles Kittel, Introduction to Solid State Physics, John Wiley Publisher
2. A.S. Vasudeva , Modern engineering Physics, S Chand
3. Dekker, Solid State Physics
4. Dr.M.N. Avadhanulu, Engineering Physics, S Chand
5. Dekker, Solid State Physics
6. Halliday and Resnick, Physics
7. S.O. Pillai, Solid State Physics
8. P K Palanisamy, Engineering Physics, Sitech Publications
9. A. Ghatak - Optics
Course Outcomes
After completing the course, students will be able to
 Explain semiconductor behaviour, types, carrier concentration, Hall effect, Thermistor,

demonstrate and analyze semiconductor devices like a PN-junction, I-V characteristics, LED,
solar cell, photo diode and their applications.
 Differentiate the wave and particle, de-Broglie matter waves-its experimental evidence,
Schroedinger’s wave concept and its application for a particle in one dimension box.
 Explain about emission, its types, laser principle, types, working and its applications and to
reveals about TIR principle, optical fiber-types and signal propagation, attenuation,
communication system and applications of optical fibers (sensors and medical endoscopy)
 Reveals about the magnetism-its origin and types, Hysteresis, domain theory, Anti-ferro and ferri
magnetism superconductivity, experimental facts, theoretical analysis, types of superconductors
and its applications.
 Explain the basic concepts of dielectric materials, polarization and its types, local fields,
frequency and temperature effect on dielectrics and their applications (piezo, ferro and Pyro
electricity).
 Summarize nano & bulk concepts, surface to volume ratio, quantum confinement, CNTs and
preparation methods (physical & chemical), analysis the techniques like XRD, SEM, TEM and
also to understand the radioactivity, fusion & fission, alpha, beta and gamma rays decay and its
applications.
35
A b c d E f g h i j k l
X x x
Syllabus for B. Tech I Year I semester
Electronics and Communication Engineering (ECE)
NETWORKS ANALYSIS
Code: 7AC02
L T P C
3 - - 3
Course Objectives :
To make the students to understand:
1. The fundamentals of the basic elements and their application in electrical circuits.
2. The importance of network topology in analysis of electrical networks.
3. The basic concepts of magnetic circuits and their applications.
4. The concept of single phase circuits and their analysis.
5. The significance of resonance and its use
6. Verify the network theorem and their application in electrical networks.
Course Outcomes:
After completion of the course work the student will be able to
1. Apply Kirchhoff’s laws for solving electrical circuits.
2. Draw the network graph and solve the problems of electrical networks.
3. Analyze and solve the problems of composite magnetic circuits.
4. Understand the basic concepts of single phase AC circuits and ability to solve the problems related to
steady state analysis.
5. Compute for parameters like Q factor and bandwidth for resonance circuits.
6. Apply and solve the problem associated with electrical networks using network theorems
UNIT – I: INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS:

Circuit concept, R – L – C parameters, Voltage and current sources, Independent and dependent
sources, Source transformation, Kirchhoff’s Laws, Network reduction techniques, Series, Parallel, Series
- parallel, Star – to – delta and Delta – to – star transformation, Mesh analysis, Nodal analysis, Concept
of super mesh and super node. Voltage current relationship for passive elements (for different input
signals – square, ramp, saw tooth, triangular)
UNIT – II: NETWORK TOPOLOGY:

Definitions, Graph, Tree, Basic cut-set and basic tie-set matrices for planar networks, Loop and Nodal
methods of analysis of Networks using graph theory, Duality & dual networks
UNIT – III: MAGNETIC CIRCUITS:

Basic terms in Magnetic Circuits, Comparison between electric and magnetic circuits, Composite
magnetic circuit, Analysis of series, parallel magnetic circuits, Faraday’s Laws of electromagnetic
induction, Concept of self and mutual inductance, Dot convention, Co-efficient of coupling.
UNIT - IV: SINGLE PHASE A.C. CIRCUITS:

R.M.S. and Average values, Form factor for different periodic wave forms, j Notation, Complex and
polar forms of representation, Steady state analysis of R,L,C circuits (in series, parallel and series parallel
combinations) with sinusoidal excitation, Concept of Reactance, Impedance, Susceptance and
Admittance, Phase angle, Concept of power factor, Real, Reactive powers and Complex power.
UNIT – V: LOCUS DIAGRAMS & RESONANCE:

Locus diagrams of R-L, R-C circuits with variation of various parameters (series and parallel),
Resonance in series, parallel circuits, Concept of band width and Q factor.
36
UNIT – VI: NETWORK THEOREMS:

Tellegen’s, Superposition, Reciprocity, Thevenin’s, Norton’s, Maximum Power transfer, Millman’s and
Compensation theorems with D.C.& A.C. excitations.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Engineering circuit analysis - William Hayt and Jack E.Kemmerly, Tata McGraw - Hill Company, 6 th
edition.
2. Circuits & Networks - A.Sudhakar and Shyamamohan S.Palli, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 3rd edition.
REFERENCES:
1. Network Analysis - M.E. Vanvalkenberg, Printice Hall of India, 3rd edition
2. Circuit theory (Analysis & Synthesis) - A.Chakravarthy, Dhanpath Rai & Co., 6th edition.
3. Circuits & Networks – M.S. Sukhija, T.K. Nagasarkar, Oxford University Press, 2nd edition.
37
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS -1
(Common to EEE, ECE, ME, CE)
L T P/D C
Code: 7HC06 3 1 0 4
Pre Requisites: Mathematics Knowledge at Pre-University Level

Course Objectives: To make the students to understand and expected to learn
1. Special functions such as Beta & Gamma functions and their properties, evaluation of improper integrals
and the applications of definite integrals.
2. Mean value theorems and their applications to the given functions, series expansions of a function.
3. To test the convergence of a series and expansion of a function in sine and cosine terms.
4. Basic concepts of multivariable differential calculus.
5. About the linear system and some analytical methods for solution.
6. Concept of Eigen values and Eigen vectors their properties and applications.
Module 1: Calculus
Evolutes and involutes; Beta and Gamma functions and their properties; Evaluation of improper
integrals, Applications of definite integrals to evaluate surface areas and volumes of revolutions.
Module 2: Calculus
Rolle’s Theorem and Mean value theorems (Statements and Geometrical Interpretations if any); Taylor’s
and Maclaurin’s theorems with remainders (without proof); Taylor’s and Maclaurin’s series expansion.
Module 3: Sequences and series

Convergence of sequence and series, tests for convergence; Power series. Fourier series, Half range sine
and cosine series, Parseval’s theorem (without proof).
Module 4: Multivariable Calculus (Differentiation):

Limit, continuity and partial derivatives, total derivative; Maxima, minima and saddle points; Method of
Lagrange multipliers; Gradient, directional derivatives, Tangent plane; Concepts of divergence and curl
with physical significance.
Module 5: Matrices:
Inverse of a matrix by Gauss Jordan method, rank of a matrix; System of linear equations- Rank
method/Gauss Elimination method. Symmetric, skew-symmetric and orthogonal matrices;
Module 6: Matrices:
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors; Cayley - Hamilton Theorem, Diagonalization of matrices and Orthogonal
transformation.
Text Books:
(i) R K Jain and S R K Iyengar Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Narosa Publications.
(ii) Ramana B.V., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi, 11 th Reprint,
2010.
Reference Books:
(i) Erwin kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2006.
(ii) N.P. Bali and Manish Goyal, A text book of Engineering Mathematics, Laxmi Publications,
Reprint, 2008.
(iii) B.S. Grewal, Elementary Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers
(iv) C Sankaraiah, A Text book of Engineering Mathematics – I, VGS Book Links
38
(v) G.B. Thomas and R.L. Finney, Calculus and Analytic geometry, 9th Edition, Pearson, Reprint, 2002.
(vi) Veerarajan T., Engineering Mathematics for first year, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2008.
(vii) D. Poole, Linear Algebra: A Modern Introduction, 2nd Edition, Brooks/Cole, 2005.
(viii) Engineering mathematics, Ravish R.Singh, Mcgraw Hill Education.
Course Outcomes: After the course completion the students will be able to
1. Solve the problems using special functions; evaluate surface areas and volumes of revolutions.
2. Verify the mean value theorems and also express the given function in series form using Taylor’s theorem.
3. Determine the convergence, divergence or oscillating nature of a series and express the function as
trigonometric series.
4. Compute the extreme values of a function defined with and without constraints.
5. Check the consistency or inconsistency of a linear system and ability to solve real time problems.
6. Calculate the Eigen values and Eigen vectors of a matrix and their application for orthogonal
transformation.
`
39

ENGINEERING GRAPHICS & DESIGN
B.Tech I year I sem (EEE, ECE & ME) II sem (CSE, ECE, IT & CE)
L T P/D C
Code: 7BC02 1 0 4 3
Course objectives:
1: To teach students the basic principles of Engineering graphics and instruments used
2: To introduce the concept of projections in drawing and its applications for simple drawing
entities
3: To impart the knowledge of various types of solids and their projections in different position wrt
principle planes
4: To teach the concept of sections of solids and their applications
5: To develop a clear understanding of the basic principles involved in three dimensional

Engineering drawings.
6: To train the students for the extraction of multiple views from a solid model using AutoCAD
Course outcomes
After completing this course, the student will able to:
1) Get familiar to use the instruments to solve the engineering problem and draw various type of
curves used in engineering
2) Understand and Implement Orthographic projections and draw projections of simple drawing
entities such as points Lines, and Planes
3) Draw projections of different types of regular solids in various positions wrt principal planes of
projection
4) Draw Sections of various Solids including Cylinders, cones, prisms and pyramids and draw the
developments of these solids and their sections.
5) Construct Isometric Scale, Isometric Projections and Views and convert 3D views to 2D
orthographic views
6) Understand from basic sketching through 2D and 3-D solid modeling using computer aided
design (CAD) software
UNIT – I
Introduction to Engineering Drawing: Drawing Instruments and their uses, types of lines, Types and
uses of pencils, Lettering, Rules of dimensioning.
Curves used in Engineering Practice and their Constructions: Conic Sections including Rectangular
Hyperbola - General method, Cycloid, Epicyloid, and Involutes of circles.
40
UNIT – II
Orthographic Projection: Principles of Orthographic Projections – Conventions – First angle and third
angle projections (however all drawing exercises must be in first angle only) - Projection of Points, Lines
- Inclined to both planes, Projections of regular Plane, inclined planes - Auxiliary views.
UNIT –III
Projections of Regular Solids: Projections of Regular Solids: Prisms, Cylinders, Pyramids, Cones –
Axis inclined to both planes, Auxiliary views.
UNIT –IV
Sections and sectional views of Solids: Sections and Sectional views of Right Regular Solids – Prism,
Cylinder, Pyramid, Cone – Auxiliary views.
Development of Surfaces: Development of Surfaces of Right Regular Solids – Prisms, Cylinders,

Pyramids, Cones and their sections.
UNIT – V
Isometric Projections/views: Principles of Isometric Projection – Isometric Scale – Isometric Views –

Conventions – Isometric Views of Lines, Plane, Simple Solids. Conversion of isometric views to
orthographic views.
UNIT –VI
Overview of Computer Graphics : Demonstrating features of the CAD software - The Menu System,
Toolbars, , Dialog boxes and windows, Drawing entities - lines, circles, arcs etc and editing commands,
Dimensioning of objects,2D drawings-simple exercises , 3D wire-frame and shaded solids- Commands,
Boolean operations.
Text/Reference Books:
(i) Bhatt N.D., Panchal V.M. & Ingle P.R., (2014), Engineering Drawing, Charotar Publishing
House
(ii) Shah, M.B. & Rana B.C. (2008), Engineering Drawing and Computer Graphics, Pearson
Education
(iii) Agrawal B. & Agrawal C. M. (2012), Engineering Graphics, TMH Publication
(iv) Narayana, K.L. & P Kannaiah (2008), Text book on Engineering Drawing, Scitech Publishers
(v) AUTOCAD Software Theory and User Manuals
41
Syllabus for B.Tech. I year I Semester
Electronics and Communication Engineering
ENGLISH (ORAL COMMUNICATION SKILLS)
Branches: ECE, EEE and Mech (Sem-I) ECM, CSE, IT and Civil (Sem-II)
Course code: 7HC02 LTPC
1 0 0 1
Course Objectives: The course will develop the students’ ability to
- integrate listening and speaking skills

- communicate effectively
- speak effectively on a given topic
- master the art of presentation
- interact with peers in a group discussion
Unit-I : Listening Skills
1.1 Importance of Listening;

1.2 Types of listening
1.3 Barriers to Listening
1.4 Benefits of Listening
Unit-II: Oral Communication Skills -I
2.1 Types of Sentences – Assertive, Interrogative, Imperative and Exclamatory
2.2 Difference between Pauses, Gaps
2.3 Question Tags
Unit-III: Inter personal Communication
3.1. Self introduction , introducing others and Greetings
3.2 Asking and Giving Directions
3.3 Role Plays & Situational Dialogues
Unit-IV: Oral Communication Skills -II
4.1 Speaking on a particular topic - JAM
4.2 Use of cohesive devices in speaking
4.3 Common Errors in Spoken English
Unit-V: Presentation skills
5.1 Presentation Skills
5.2 Information Transfer
42
Unit-VI: Group Discussion
6.1 Importance of Group Discussion
6.2 Do’s and Don’ts of Group Discussion
Course Outcomes: After completing the course students will be able to

- understand, analyze and respond to the audience by listening effectively
- acquire the articulation of different types of sentences by practicing pause
patterns and question tags.
- translate and demonstrate self, participate effectively in activities like JAM,
extempore
- express and deliver a presentation on the given topic through role plays and
situational dialogues
- implement English language to meet the standards of corporate and real world
in a group.
Suggested Readings:
(i) Step by step learning language and life skills by Niruparani, Jayasree Mohanraj, Indira, Sailakshmi
Pearson Publishers
(ii) Communication skills for technical students by TM Farhathullah, Orient Black swan Publications
(iii) English for technical Communication by K.R. Lakshmi Narayan , Scitech Publications
(iv) Practical English Usage. Michael Swan. OUP. 1995.
(v) Communication Skills. Sanjay Kumar and Pushp Lata. Oxford University Press. 2011.
(vi) Exercises in Spoken English. Parts. I-III. CIEFL, Hyderabad. Oxford University Press
43

Electronics and Communications Engineering (ECE)
HUMAN VALUES AND PROFESSIONAL ETHICS IN HIGHER EDUCATION
Common to All Branches
L T P C
Code: 7HC20 3 - - -
Orientation Programme for First Year B.Tech Students Syllabus
Course Duration: Three Weeks Evaluation: Is done based on the Grading.
Course Objectives This introductory course input is intended
1. To help the students appreciate the essential 'VALUES' and 'SKILLS' to ensure sustained happiness and
prosperity, which are the core aspirations of all human beings.
2. To facilitate the development of a Holistic perspective among students towards life and profession as well as
towards happiness and prosperity based on a correct understanding of the Human reality and the rest of Existence.
Such a holistic perspective forms the basis of Universal Human Values and movement towards value-based living
in a natural way.
3. To highlight plausible implications of such a Holistic understanding in terms of ethical human conduct, trustful
and mutually fulfilling human behavior and mutually enriching interaction with Nature. Thus, this course is
intended to provide a much needed orientational input in value education to the young enquiring minds.
Course Outcomes: Student will be able to:
1. Learns Being a human, understands human values and purpose of education

2. Understands the importance of different harmony levels needed.
3. Understand self and being in the current moment are the sources of happiness.
4. Improves Learning capabilities and communication skills.
5. Understands and appreciate the importance of personality development and yoga for a holistic life.
6. Understands the essence of Morals, Ethics, Values and Social responsibilities for successful life.
UNIT – I: INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN VALUES: The current status of an individual, at the level of
Individual, Family, Society and Nature. Basis of Human Beings’ Conduct, Desire – Aim, Objective and Purpose.
Rationale of Success. Role of Education - Sanskar. Definition of Human aspiration, Human Conduct, Human Being
– Physical Facility and Relationships, Right Understanding for Human Being, Achievement of Prosperity.
UNIT – II: HARMONY AND HUMAN BEING: Understanding the co-existence of human being, Different
Harmony levels –Harmony in the Human Being, Harmony in the Family, Harmony in the Society and Harmony in
Nature / Existence. Understanding the Relationships, Harmony in the Family, Feelings in Relationship: Trust,
Respect, Affection, Care Guidance, Reverence, Glory, Gratitude and Love.
UNIT – III: THE CYCLE OF HAPPINESS: Meaning of Happiness and Unhappiness, Sources of Happiness,
Self Investigation, Five Dimensions of Human order – Education, Health, Production, Justice and Exchange.
Harmony at the Individual Level and Family level, Concerns at Individual, Family and Nature level. Different
approach of People behavior – Active, Reactive and Proactive. Resource depletion, Global Warming, Pollution,
Harmony in Nature.
UNIT – IV: IMPROVING LEARNING CAPABILITIES: Principles of learning, Study skills and E- Learning,
Listening skills, Soft skills and Employability skills, Effective Reading and Reviewing, Reading Comprehension,
Textbook Reading strategies, Effective Communication in English, Test taking strategies.
UNIT – V: PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT: Self Development, Goal Setting, Motivation, Time

Management, Positive Attitude, Building Self Confidence, Decision Making, The Discovery Wheel, Some
attributes of a good personality, Memory Management, Interpersonal Skills, Importance of Yoga and Meditation.
44
UNIT – VI: ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF STUDENTS: Responsibilities of the students in shaping
themselves, Effective and Successful Habits, Difference between studying in a Professional college and High
school / Junior college, Characteristics of a Successful Student, Morals, Ethics and Values, Some tips to students to
do well in B.tech program and also later in Professional Career.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Improving Learning Capabilities and Personality Development – Manual prepared by SNIST for private
circulation
45

ENGINEERING PHYSICS LAB

Common to I-Year I-Sem (EEE & ECE) and II-Sem (CSE, IT & ECM)
L T P C
Code: 7HC65 - - 3 1.5
Course Objectives:
 To study the concepts (numerical aperture) of a optical fiber,
 To explain about magnetic induction, Biot-Savart principle.
 To discuss the energy gap (Eg) of a semiconductor diode.
 To understand the rigidity modulus, periodicity.
 Understand the concept of photo electric effect using photo voltaic cell.
 To understand about the ionizing radiation by using the Geiger–Muller counter.
 Discuss the dispersive power of prism-minimum deviation method.
 Explain the formation of Newton’s rings-interference
 Study the frequency of AC mains using Sonometer.
 To study the LED characteristics and forward resistance
 Explaining about the electrical resonance by using the LCR circuit
 To know the time constant of RC circuit
List of Experiments
1. Determination of a Numerical Aperture (NA) of an optical fiber – Fiber optics.
2. Determination of magnetic induction flux density along the axis of a current carrying circular coil
using Stewart and Gee’s experiment - Magnetism.
3. Determination of the energy gap (Eg) of a given semiconductor-Temperature/semiconductor
4. Determination of rigidity modulus of a given wire material using the Torsional pendulum - Vibrations
5. Determination the Planck’s constant using the photo voltaic cell - Photo voltaic cell
6. Studying the characteristics of Geiger–Muller counter and verifying the inverse square law - Nuclear
physics
7. Calculation of dispersive power of a given material of prism by using Spectrometer in minimum
deviation method - Light.
8. Determination of wavelength of a monochromatic light source by using Newton’s rings experiment -
Light
9. Calculating the frequency of AC supply by using the Sonometer – Electromagnetic/ Electrical
10. Studying the characteristics and calculating the forward resistance of a LED – Semiconductor/devices.
11. Study of series and parallel resonance of an LCR circuit – Electrical devices
12. Determination of time constant of an RC-circuit – Electrical/ Electronics
NOTE: Any TEN of the above experiments are to be conducted.
Course Outcomes:
After completing the experiment, students will be able to
 Analyze the concepts of fiber optics, fundamentals, numerical aperture its importance, attenuation in fiber
and applications.
 Understand and search to apply the fundamentals of magnetic induction, Ampere’s law, Oersted’s law and
the Biot-Savart law.
 Analyze the concept a semiconductors, types, calculation of energy gap of a semiconductor diode and
importance.
 Summarize the fundamentals of modulus-types, stress, strain, elasticity, plasticity and Hook’s law.
 Understand the concepts of photo electric effect, importance, photo current, colour filters, optical sensors
(photo voltaic cell).
 Understand the concept of radiation, ionizing radiation, radiological protection and inverse square law.
 Know about the light properties-dispersion, prism, spectrometer and minimum deviation arrangement.
 Understand the concepts of interference, conditions, formation of Newton’s rings-reason.
46
 Know the difference between AC and DC fundamentals, magnetostriction, resonance, air column
vibrations.
 Analyze the difference between normal diode, LED, forward bias, reverse bias, I-V characteristics, direct
and indirect band gap semiconductors.
 Analyze the LCR circuit combination, parallel, series electrical resonance, inductance, reactance,
capacitance and electrical and electronic fundamentals.
 Characterize the RC network, time constant, capacitor functioning and its application.
47

ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS AND NETWORKS ANALYSIS LAB
Common to (ECE I Year I Sem) (EEE & ECM I Year II Sem)
Code: 7AC61
L T P/D C
Course Objectives: - - 2 1
To make the student to learn:
i. Verification of network theorems experimentally.
ii. To measure frequency of RLC series and parallel circuits under resonance
iii. To determine self & mutual inductance and co-efficient of coupling for coupled circuits
iv. The construction of current locus diagram for a given parallel circuit.
v. Simulation for analysis of electrical networks
vi. Method for determining the parameters of a coil
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to
i. Perform the test for verification of various network theorems
ii. Measure the frequency for a RLC series/parallel circuits under resonance.
iii. Conduct an experiment for determination of self & mutual inductance and coefficient of coupling
iv. Construct current locus diagram by performing a test on single phase parallel circuits
v. Simulate for analysis of electrical circuits.
vi. Determine the parameters of the coil
List of Experiments (ANY 10 Experiments to be conducted)
1. Verification Thevenin’s Theorem and Norton’s Theorem

2. Verification of Maximum Power Transfer Theorem
3. Verification of Superposition Theorem
4. Verification of Compensation Theorem
5. Verification of Reciprocity Theorem and Millmann’s Theorem
6. Finding resonant frequency in Series and Parallel circuits
7. Determination of Self Inductance, Mutual Inductance and Coefficient of coupling
8. Calculation of Z and Y Parameters
9. Construction of current locus diagram for RL and RC circuit
10. Mesh and Nodal Analysis by simulation
11. Determination of Average value and RMS value of a complex wave
12. Determination of parameters of a coil.
13. Determination of Time constant of RL and RC series circuit.
48
a B c d E f g h i j k l
X X X X

ENGLISH LAB (Oral Communication Skills)
Common to I Year I Semester (ECE, EEE and MECH) & II Semester (ECM, CSE, IT and Civil)
Course code: 7HC62 LTPC

0 02 1
Course Objectives: The course will develop the students’ ability to
- integrate listening and speaking skills
- communicate effectively
- speak effectively on a given topic
- master the art of presentation
- interact with peers in a group discussion
- get exposed to face interviews
Course Outcomes: After completing the course students will be able to
- understand, analyze and respond to the audience by listening effectively
- acquire the articulation of different types of sentences by practicing pause patterns and question
tags.
- translate and demonstrate self, participate effectively in activities like JAM, extempore
- express and deliver a presentation on the given topic through role plays and situational
dialogues
- implement English language to meet the standards of corporate and real world in a group.
- present and communicate effectively by facing mock interviews by experts from industry and
academy.
Unit-I : Practice sessions on
Listen & Speak
Listen, Read, and Speak
Unit-II: Practice sessions on
Articulation of types of Sentences
Question Tags
Introduction and greeting
Asking for and Giving
Directions
Unit-III: Practice sessions on
JAM/Extempore/
Impromptu
Prepared talk on given topics
Unit-IV: Practice sessions on
Formal Presentation
Role Plays & Situational Dialogues
Unit-V : Practice sessions on
Group Discussion
Unit-VI: Practice sessions on
Mock Interviews
Suggested Readings:
(i) Step by step learning language and life skills by Niruparani, Jayasree Mohanraj, Indira, Sailakshmi Pearson Publishers
(ii) Communication skills for technical students by TM Farhathullah, Orient Black swan Publications
(iii) English for technical Communication by K.R. Lakshmi Narayan , Scitech Publications
(iv) Practical English Usage. Michael Swan. OUP. 1995.
(v) Communication Skills. Sanjay Kumar and Pushp Lata. Oxford University Press. 2011.
(vi) Exercises in Spoken English. Parts. I-III. CIEFL, Hyderabad. Oxford University Press
49
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
M H M M
TECHNICAL SEMINAR -I
Code: 7C191
L T P C
Course Objective : - - 2 1
Develop ability to be a public speaker. Learn the importance of delivering seminars for
demonstrating oratory and develop interview facing skills.
Course Outcomes: After completing this course, the student will be able to
1. Identify current general, political and technology related topics.

2. Arrange and present seminar in a effective manner
3. Collect, survey and organize content in presentable manner
4. Demonstrate oratory skills with the aid of Power Point Presentations
5. Exhibit interview facing skills and team leading qualities
Procedure
1. Seminar in-charges shall highlight the significance of technical seminar in the first two sessions
and enlighten the students on the utility of these seminars.
2. The slots, titles shall be decided upfront and seminar in charge shall take signatures.
3. The same sheet shall be affixed in the respective classrooms and seminar register.
4. If any student fails to present his/her seminar on the given slot, to genuine reasons, they may be
asked to present in the subsequent slot/week.
5. Progress of the seminars need to be reviewed by the concerned HOD once in 15 days.
6. The evaluation for technical seminars has to be informed to students and displayed in the
classrooms.
7. Report and presentation must contain topic, introduction, explanation, diagrams, tables,
applications and conclusions.
Distribution of marks
There shall be a Technical Paper writing and seminar evaluated for 100 marks in First Year First
Semester. The evaluation is purely internal and will be conducted as follows:
Literature survey, topic and Content : 10 marks
Presentation including PPT : 15 marks
Seminar Notes : 10 marks
Interaction : 5 marks
Report : 10 marks
Attendance in the seminar class : 10 marks
50
Punctuality in giving seminar as per schedule time and date : 10 marks
Mid semester viva (on the seminar topics completed up to the
end of 9th week : 10 marks
End semester Viva : 20 marks
_________
Total 100 marks
51
Syllabus for B. Tech I Year II semester

CHEMISTRY
(Common to EEE, ME, ECE)
Code: 7HC03
L T P C
3 1 0 4
Course Objectives:
1. To understand microscopic chemistry in terms of atomic and molecular orbitals
2. To learn the preparation and applications of commercial and conducting polymers and lubricant
materials
3. To learn the industrial problems caused by water and municipal water treatment
4. To acquire knowledge about different types of batteries and their working mechanism
5. To develop the concepts and types of corrosion and the factors influence corrosion and to understand the
control methods and protective coatings for metals
6. To learn the chemical reactions of drugs that are used in the synthesis of drug molecules
UNIT – I: ATOMIC AND MOLECULAR STRUCTURE (6L)

Molecular orbitals of diatomic molecules and plots of the multicentre orbitals. Equations for atomic and molecular
orbitals. Energy level diagrams of diatomics. Pi-molecular orbitals of butadiene and benzene and aromaticity.
Crystal field theory and the energy level diagrams for transition metal ions and their magnetic properties. Band
structure of solids and the role of doping on band structures.
UNIT – II: ENGINEERING MATERIALS (8L)

Plastics – Thermosetting and Thermoplastics, preparation, properties and engineering applications of plastics: PVC,
Teflon, Bakelite. Fibers: Nylon 6,6 and Dacron.
Rubbers – natural and artificial rubber, vulcanization of natural rubber, Buna-S, Buna-N and their engineering
applications.
Lubricants
Definition, classification and function of lubricants, Types of lubrication and mechanisms – Thick Film or
Hydrodynamic Lubrication, Thin Film or Boundary Lubrication, Extreme Pressure Lubrication. Classification and
properties of lubricants – Viscosity, flash and fire point, cloud and pour point and acid value. Engineering
applications:
UNIT - III: WATER TECHNOLOGY (8L)

(a) Introduction:- Hardness of water – types of hardness (temporary and permanent), calculation of hardness-
Numerical problems. Estimation of hardness of water by EDTA Method.
(b) Water for Industrial purpose: Food, sugar, textile, paper and pharma industries, water for steam making
characteristics of boiler feed water, boiler troubles- scale and sludge & Carry over (priming &foaming),boiler
corrosion, caustic embrittlement.
(c) Water Treatment: Internal conditioning- phosphate, carbonate & calgon conditioning. External Treatment:
Ion-exchange process. Desalination-reverse osmosis. Municipal water treatment-sedimentation, coagulation,
filtration, disinfection-chlorination, ozonization. Engineering applications: Methodology and working of
mineral water plant for drinking purpose.
UNIT – IV: ELECTROCHEMISTRY (8L)

Conductance – conductors (metallic and electrolytic), types of conductance – specific, equivalent and molar
conductance – effect of dilution on conductance.
Free energy and emf, cell potentials, electrode potential (oxidation and reduction). Types of electrodes - redox
electrode (quinhydrode electrode), metal – metal insoluble salt electrode and Ion selective electrode.
Cell notation and cell reaction –Nernst equation and applications. Engineering Applications: Batteries : Types of
batteries
(a) Primary batteries – Lechalanche cell (dry cell), Lithium cell
(b) Secondary batteries(Accumulators) – Lead acid battery, Lithium-ion battery
(c) Fuel cells- H2 – O2 fuel cell and MeOH-O2 fuel cell-advantages and applications.
Engineering applications – future water powered car, Hydrogen production and storage.
52
UNIT - V: CORROSION AND ITS PREVENTION (7L)

Corrosion – basic concepts –types of corrosion, chemical, electrochemical corrosion (absorption of O 2 and
evolution of H2). Types of electrochemical corrosion – galvanic corrosion, pitting corrosion- factors affecting the
rate of corrosion.
Cathodic protection – sacrificial anodic protection and impressed current cathodic protection method. Methods of
metallic coatings-hot dipping (tinning and galvanizing), metal cladding (Al cladding), electroplating (copper
plating) and electroless plating (nickel plating).
UNIT-VI: ORGANIC REACTIONS AND DRUG MOLECULES (5L)

Introduction : reactions involving substitution(S N1, SN2 ) addition to double bond(C=C), elimination(E 1 and E2),
oxidation (using KMnO4, CrO3), reduction (Hydrogenation by Ni/H2, Pd/C)
Drugs : Definition, classification structure and applications of commonly used drug molecules- paracetamol,
aspirin, ibuprofen and diphenhydramine (Benadryl)
Principles of spectroscopy and selection rules: Electronic spectroscopy. Fluorescence and its applications in
medicine. Vibrational and rotational spectroscopy of diatomic molecules-Applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Engineering Chemistry: by Jain & Jain ,Dhanapathrai Publications (2015)
2. Engineering Chemistry: by Thirumala Chary & Laxminarayana, Scitech Publications (2016)
3. Engineering Chemistry: by & B.Rama Devi, Prsanta Rath & Ch. Venkata Ramana Reddy, Cengage
Publications (2016)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy by C. N. Banwell
2. Drugs by David Krupadanam- Universities Press
3. University chemistry by B. H. Mahan
4. Chemistry: Principles and Applications, by M. J. Sienko and R. A. Plane
5. Organic Chemistry: Structure and Function by K. P. C. Volhardt and N. E. Schore, 5th Edition
http://bcs.whfreeman.com/vollhardtschore5e/default.asp
Course Outcomes
After completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Understand and analyse microscopic chemistry in terms of atomic orbitals, molecular orbitals and
intermolecular forces.
2. Identify and differentiate conductivity of polymers, thermoplastic, thermosetting plastics and various
lubricants.
3. Recognize and select the domestic and industrial problems caused by hard water and also learn about the
municipal water treatment using various methods.
4. Understand and interpret the important fundamental concepts of electrochemistry and solve the problems
related to batteries.
5. Differentiate the types of corrosion and methods used to prevent the corrosion.
6. Learn and implement synthesis of drug molecules and learn fundamentals of analytical techniques like
electronic, vibrational and rotational spectroscopy.
53

PROBLEM SOLVING USING C
(Common to All Branches)
Code: 7FC01 L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Outcomes:
After completion of this course student will learn
1. To formulate simple algorithms for arithmetic, logical problems and to translate the algorithms to
programs(in C language)
2. To test and execute the programs and correct syntax and logical errors, to implement conditional
branching, iteration and recursion
3. To decompose a problem into functions and synthesize a complete program using divide and
conquer approach.
4. To use arrays, pointers and structures to formulate algorithms and programs.
5. To apply programming to solve matrix addition and multiplication problems and searching and
sorting problems.
6. To apply programming to solve simple numerical method problems, namely rot finding of
function, differentiation of function and simple integration.
UNIT I
Introduction to Programming: Introduction to components of a computer system (disks, memory,

processor, where a program is stored and executed, operating system, compilers etc.)
Idea of Algorithm: steps to solve logical and numerical problems. Representation of Algorithm:
Flowchart/Pseudocode with examples.
From algorithms to programs; source code, variables (with data types) variables and memory locations,
Syntax and Logical Errors in compilation, object and executable code
UNIT II
History of C language, Characteristics of C language, Structure of C Language, C Tokens
Arithmetic expressions, Operator Precedence & Associativity
Conditional Branching and Loops
Writing and evaluation of conditionals and consequent branching and Jumping Constructs
Pretest and Post test, Iteration and loops (3 lectures)
UNIT III
Function: Functions (including using built in libraries), Parameter passing in functions, call by value,
passing arrays to functions: idea of call by reference, Storage Classes
Recursion: Recursion, as a different way of solving problems. Example programs, such as Finding
Factorial, Fibonacci series, Ackerman function etc.
54
UNIT IV
Arrays: Arrays (1-D, 2-D), Character arrays Ragged Arrays and Dynamic Arrays
Basic Algorithms Searching, Basic Sorting Algorithms (Bubble, Insertion and Selection), Finding roots
of equations, notion of order of complexity through example programs (no formal definition required)
Quick sort or Merge sort.
UNIT V
Pointers Idea of pointers, Defining pointers, Use of Pointers in self-referential structures, notation of
linked list (no implementation) Dynamic Memory allocation Functions.
Strings: String Handling Functions.
UNIT IV
Structure: Structures, Defining structures and Array of Structures,
Nested Structures enum, typedef
File handling (only if time is available, otherwise should be done as part of the lab)
File Handling Functions, File Modes, File Operations
Suggested Text Books
(i) Byron Gottfried, Schaum's Outline of Programming with C, McGraw-Hill

(ii) E. Balaguruswamy, Programming in ANSI C, Tata McGraw-Hill Suggested
Reference Books
(i) Brian W. Kernighan and Dennis M. Ritchie, The C Programming Language, Prentice Hall of
India
55
H: High M: Medium L: Low a b c d e f g h i j k l

H M M L

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS -II

(Common to EEE, ECE, ME, CE)
L T P/D C
Code: 7HC08 3 1 0 4
Pre Requisites: Engineering Mathematics-I

Course Objectives: To make the students to understand and expected to learn
1. Multiple integration and its applications also acquire knowledge on curvilinear coordinate
system.
2. Various analytical methods to solve first order first degree and also the equations not of first
degree ordinary differential equations.
3. Methods to solve higher order ordinary differential equations.
4. Series solution of second order ordinary differential equations with variable coefficients.
5. Basic concepts of Complex Analysis and conformal mapping and their properties.
6. Series expansion of a function using Taylor’s and Laurent’s series. Evaluation of definite
integrals and improper integrals.
UNIT 1: MULTIVARIABLE CALCULUS (INTEGRATION):

Multiple Integration: Double integrals (Cartesian), change of order of integration in double integrals,
Change of variables (Cartesian to polar), Applications: areas and volumes, Center of mass and Gravity
(constant and variable densities); Triple integrals (Cartesian), Introduction to orthogonal curvilinear
coordinates, Simple applications involving cubes; Scalar line integrals, vector line integrals, scalar
surface integrals, vector surface integrals, Theorems of Green, Gauss and Stokes (without proofs).
UNIT 2: FIRST ORDER ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS:

Exact, linear and Bernoulli’s equations; Equations not of first degree: equations solvable for p, equations
solvable for y, equations solvable for x and Clairaut’s type.
UNIT 3: ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS OF HIGHER ORDERS:

Higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients, method of variation of parameters,
Cauchy-Euler equation;
UNIT 4: SERIES SOLUTIONS TO SECOND ORDER ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL

EQUATIONS:
Power series solutions: Legendre polynomials, Bessel functions of the first kind and their properties.
UNIT 5: COMPLEX VARIABLE – DIFFERENTIATION:

Differentiation, Cauchy-Riemann equations, analytic functions, harmonic functions, finding harmonic
conjugate; elementary analytic functions (exponential, trigonometric, logarithm) and their properties;
Conformal mappings, Mobius transformations and their properties.
UNIT 6: COMPLEX VARIABLE – INTEGRATION:

Contour integrals, Cauchy-Goursat theorem (without proof), Cauchy Integral formula (without proof),
Liouville’s theorem and Maximum-Modulus theorem (without proof); Taylor’s series, zeros of analytic
functions, singularities, Laurent’s series; Residues, Cauchy Residue theorem (without proof), Evaluation
56
of definite integral involving sine and cosine, Evaluation of certain improper integrals using the
Bromwich contour.
TEXT BOOKS:
(i) R K Jain and S R K Iyengar Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Narosa Publications.
(ii) Ramana B.V., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi, 11 th Reprint,
2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
(i) Erwin kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2006.
(ii) N.P. Bali and Manish Goyal, A text book of Engineering Mathematics, Laxmi Publications,
Reprint, 2008.
(iii) B.S. Grewal, Elementary Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers
(iv) Engineering Mathematics, Srimanta Pal, OXFORD university press.
(v) G.B. Thomas and R.L. Finney, Calculus and Analytic geometry, 9th Edition, Pearson, Reprint, 2002.
(vi) Veerarajan T., Engineering Mathematics for first year, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2008.
(vii) Engineering Mathematics, P. Sivaramakrishna Das, Pearson Publications.
Course Outcomes: After the course completion the students will be able to
1. Solve the problems of multiple integration and apply these concepts for finding the parameters
like surface area, volume, center of mass and centre of gravity.
2. Find the solutions of first order first degree and not of first degree differential equations and
their applications such as Newton’s law of cooling, Natural growth and decay.
3. Identify and solve higher order ordinary differential equations with constant coefficients using
some standard methods and also their applications in LCR circuits.
4. Write the solutions of Legendre and Bessel’s equations s series.
5. Understand the concept of analyticity of a function; solve the problems on conformal mapping.
6. Express the functions of a complex variable in series form also able to evaluate definite and
improper integrals using complex integration.
57
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M

WORKSHOP/MANUFACTURING PRACTICES (THEORY)

Common to I year I sem (CSE, IT & CE) II sem (EEE, ECE & ME)
Code: 7BC01
L T P C
1 0 0 1
Course Objectives:
Upon completion of this course, the students will gain knowledge of the different manufacturing processes which
are commonly employed in the industry, to fabricate components using different materials.
Course Outcomes:
1) To understand various basic tools to perform simple joints using metal and wood.
2) To understand the principle of various electrical and electronic appliances and their applications.
3) To understand the manufacturing process of welding, casting and tin smithy and their applications.
4) To understand the operation of basic as well as advanced machines used for fabrication of Metals,
Plastics and Glass.
I: Theory: In theory classes the following syllabus is to be covered in 10hrs using PPTS and Videos
(Elementary treatment only)
1. Fitting & Power Tools
2. Electrical & Electronics Appliances
3. Carpentry
4. Plastic molding & Glass Cutting
5. Metal Casting
6. Metal Joining: Arc & gas welding and brazing
7. Metal forming
8. Machining
9. Advanced manufacturing methods: (Micro machining, USM,ECM,EDM )
10. CNC machining & Additive Manufacturing
Suggested Text/Reference Books:

(1) Hajra Choudhury S.K., Hajra Choudhury A.K. and Nirjhar Roy S.K., “Elements of Workshop
Technology”, Vol. I 2008 and Vol. II 2010, Media promoters and publishers private limited, Mumbai.
(2) Rao P.N., “Manufacturing Technology”, Vol. I and Vol. II, Tata McGrawHill House, 2017.
58
Syllabus for B.Tech. I year II Semester
ENGLISH (READING, LISTENING AND WRITING SKILLS)
Branches: ECM, CSE, IT and Civil (Sem-I) ECE, EEE and Mech (Sem-II)
L T P C
1 0 0 1
Course code: 7HC01
Course Objectives: The students
- acquire knowledge on various types of listening techniques, barriers and

benefits of listening
- recognize the speech sounds and learn the intonation patterns
- learn various vocabulary patterns
- develop the ability to structure and punctuate the sentences
- learn different reading techniques
- learn different writing skills
Unit-I : Listening & Phonology
1.1 Importance of Listening;
1.2 Introduction to Speech Sounds
1.3 Vowels, Diphthongs, Consonant Sounds
Unit-II: Stress & Intonation
2.1 Significance of word accent
2.2 Intonation Patterns
Unit-III: Vocabulary
3.1 Word Roots - Affixes: Prefixes and Suffixes
3.2 Homophones, Homonyms, Homographs
3.3 Synonyms – Antonyms
3.4 One word substitutes
3.5 Idioms and Phrases
Unit-IV: Basic Writing Skills
4.1 Sentence Structure

4.2 Kinds of Sentences
4.3 Punctuation in Writing
Unit-V : Reading Comprehension
5.1 Skimming and Scanning

5.2 Prediction Techniques and Inferring
59
5.3 Note Making

Unit-VI: Writing Skills
6.1 Paragraph Writing
6.2 Letter Writing
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course the students will be able to
- understand and differentiate different types of listening techniques used to
interact with real world problems
- differentiate the speech sounds and improve their accent and modulation while
speaking
- understand and illustrate different word roots, word derivatives – synonyms,
antonyms and word inflections
- discriminate a variety of sentence types, their structure and use punctuations
- get acclimatized to reading strategies and note making.
- develop proficiency in writing and preparing resume
Suggested Readings:
(i) English grammar just for you Rajeevan Karal, Oxford publications
(ii) Practical English Usage. Michael Swan. OUP. 1995.
(iii) Remedial English Grammar. F.T. Wood. Macmillan.2007
(iv) On Writing Well. William Zinsser. Harper Resource Book. 2001
(v) Study Writing. Liz Hamp-Lyons and Ben Heasly. Cambridge University Press. 2006.
(vi) Communication Skills. Sanjay Kumar and Pushp Lata. Oxford University Press. 2011.
(vii) Learn to Write by Dr. G. Varalakshmi, Kindle Edition 2016
(viii) A practical course for developing writing skills in English by J.K. Gangal, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd.
60

CHEMISTRY LAB
Code: 7HC63
L T P C
Course Objectives: 0 0 3 1.5
The student will be able to learn:
1. Preparation of coordination complex NiDMG Complex
2. Determination of surface tension
3. Determination of viscosity
4. Saponification /acid value of an oil
5. Ion exchange column for removal of hardness of water / Estimation of Hardness of water by EDTA
Method
6. Determination of chloride content of water
7. Determination of cell constant and conductance of solutions (HCl Vs NaOH / Mixture of acid Vs Strong
base)
8. Potentiometry - determination of redox potential and emf (FeSO 4 Vs KMNO4 / HCl Vs NaOH)
9. Determination of the rate constant of acid catalyzed hydrolysis of methylacetete
10. Synthesis of a polymer- Thiakol rubber / Urea-Farmaldehyde resin
11. Synthesis of a drug- Aspirin
12. Thin layer chromatography
List of Experiments
1. Preparation of coordination complex NiDMG Complex
2. Determination of surface tension
3. Determination of viscosity
4. Saponification/acid value of an oil
5. Ion exchange column for removal of hardness of water / Estimation of Hardness of water by
EDTA Method
6. Determination of chloride content of water
7. Determination of cell constant and conductance of solutions (HCl Vs NaOH / Mixture of acid Vs
Strong base)
8. Potentiometry - determination of redox potential and emf (FeSO 4 Vs KMNO4 / HCl Vs NaOH)
9. Determination of the rate constant of acid catalyzed hydrolysis of methylacetete
10. Synthesis of a polymer- Thiakol rubber / Urea-Farmaldehyde resin
11. Synthesis of a drug- Aspirin
12. Thin layer chromatography
Course Outcomes
After completion of the course, the student will be able to learn:
1. Methods to prepare inorganic complexes.
2. The process to determine surface tension of different liquids using stagnometer
3. The process to determine viscosity of lubricants by using redwood viscometer.
4. How to find acid value of an oil.
5. The principle and determination of Hardness of a water sample.
6. The methods to estimate amount of chlorine in water.
7. To determine unknown concentration of acid by using conductometric method.
8. To determine unknown concentration of acid by using potentiometric method.
9. Estimate rate constants of reactions from concentration of reactants/products as a function of time.
10. Methods to prepare industrially important polymers.
11. The method of preparation for organic compounds.
12. To separate the organic compounds from their mixture by using Thin layer chromatography.
61
Syllabus for B.Tech. I year II Semester
Problem Solving using C LAB
(Common to All Branches)
Code: 7FC71 L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Course Outcomes:
After completion of this course student will learn
1. To formulate the algorithms for simple problems

2. To translate given algorithms to a working and correct program
3. To be able to correct syntax errors as reported by the compilers
4. To be able to identify and correct logical errors encountered at run time
5. To be able to write iterative as well as recursive programs
6. To be able to represent data in arrays, strings and structures and manipulate them through a
program
7. To be able to declare pointers of different types and use them in defining self referential
structures.
8. To be able to create, read and write to and from simple text files.
[The laboratory should be preceded or followed by a tutorial to explain the approach or algorithm
to be implemented for the problem given.]
2. Unit I (Cycle 1)
1. Write an algorithm for converting a given Celsius temperature to its equivalent Fahrenheit
temperature and draw a flowchart.
2. Write an algorithm to find the largest of three given numbers and draw a flowchart.
3. Write an algorithm and draw a flowchart for finding the roots and nature of roots of a quadratic
equation, given its coefficients.
4. Write an algorithm and flowchart for finding the first n Fibonacci numbers, give n.
3. Unit II (Cycle 2)
1. Write an algorithm, flowchart, and C program for:
2. Finding the area and circumference of a circle of given radius.
3. Finding the volume of a sphere of given radius.
4. Finding the lateral surface area of a right circular cone of given base radius and height.
5. Finding selling price of an item, given its cost price and profit percent.
6. Finding the interest on a given principal for a given period of time at a given rate of per year.
7. Write a C program to display all the sizes of data types in C.
8. Write a C program to display a given decimal integer into an equivalent octal number and
hexadecimal number using %o and %x in printf function.
4. Unit II (Cycle 3)
1. Write a C program to find the roots and nature of the roots of a quadratic equation, given its
coefficients.
2. Write a C program for finding the largest of three given numbers.
3. A salesman gets a commission of 5% on the sales he makes if his sales is below Rs.5000/- and a
commission of 8% on the sales that exceeds Rs.5000/- together with Rs.250/-. Write an
algorithm or a flowchart and develop C program for computing the commission of the salesman,
given his sales.
62
5. Unit III (Cycle 4)

1. Write three C programs to print a multiplication table for a given number using while, do-while,
and for loops.
2. Write a C program to compute the sum of:
3. 1+x+x2+x3+………….+xn, given x and n.
4. 1! + 2! + 3! + . . . + n!, given n.
5. 1 – x2/2! + x4/4! – x6/6! + x8/8! – x10/10! + … to n terms where the nth term becomes less than
0.0001.

1. Write a C program in the menu driven style to perform the operations +, -, *, /, % between two
given integers.
2. Write a C program to find the largest and the least of some numbers given by the user.
3. Write a C program to find the sum of the digits of a positive integer.

1. Write C functions for the following:
a) A function that takes an integer n as argument and returns 1 if it is a prime number and 0
otherwise.
b) A function that takes a real number x and a positive integer n as arguments and returns x n.
c) A function that takes a positive integer n as an argument and returns the n th Fibonacci
number.
2. Using recursion write C functions for the following:
a) Factorial of a non-negative integer n.
b) Number of combinations of n things taken r at a time.
c) Greatest Common Divisor of two integers.
d) Least Common Multiple of two integers.

a) Write a menu driven style program to compute the above functions (cycle 6) on the choice
of the function given by the user.
b) Define macros for the following and use them to find sum of the squares of the minimum
and maximum of two given numbers.
1. Larger of two numbers.
2. Smaller of two numbers.
3. Sum of the squares of two numbers.
c) Write a program to generate Pascal’s triangle.
d) Write a program to count the number of letters, words, and lines in a given text.
9. Unit IV (Cycle 8)
1. Write a program to store the numbers given by the user in an array, and then to find the mean,
deviations of the given values from the mean, and variance.
2. Write a C program to initially store user given numbers in an array, display them and then to
insert a given number at a given location and to delete a number at a given location.
3. Write a program to store user given numbers in an array and find the locations of minimum and
maximum values in the array and swap them and display the resulting array.
10. Unit IV (Cycle 9)
63
1. Write a C program to implement the operations of matrices – addition, subtraction,

multiplication.
2. Write a program to find whether a given matrix is symmetric, lower triangular, upper triangular,
diagonal, scalar, or unit matrix.
11. Unit V (Cycle 10)

1. Write a function to swap two numbers.
2. Write a function to compute area and circumference of a circle, having area and circumference
as pointer arguments and radius as an ordinary argument.
12. Unit VI (Cycle 11)

1. Define a structure for complex number. Write functions on complex numbers (addition,
subtraction, absolute value, multiplication, division, complex conjugate) and implement them in
a menu driven style.
2. Define a structure point. Write a program to find the distance between two points.
3. Define a structure student having members roll no., name, class, section, marks. Create an array
of 10 students give the data and find the average marks, section-wise.
13. Unit VI (Cycle 12)

1. Write a program to:
a) Create a file by the name given by the user or by command line argument and add the text
given by the user to that file.
b) Open the file created above and display the contents of the file.
c) Copy a file into some other file, file names given by the user or by command line arguments.
d) Append a user mentioned file to another file.
e) Reverse the first n characters of a file.
64
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M

WORKSHOP/MANUFACTURING PRACTICES (LAB)

B.Tech I year I sem (CSE, ECM, IT & CE) II sem (EEE, ECE & ME)
Code: 7BC61
L T P C
Course Objectives: 0 0 3 1.5
1) To identify various basic tools to perform simple joints using metal and wood.
2) To recognize various electrical and electronic and their applications.
3) To understand the manufacturing process of welding, casting and tinsmith and apply the processes in
making simple products.
4) To understand and operate basic machines for fabrication of Metals, Plastics and Glass.
5) To understand the functions and parts of commonly used domestic appliances.
Course outcomes:
1. After completion of the course, the student will be able to fabricate components with their own hands.
2. Assemble different components and produce small devices of their interest.
Work shop and Manufacturing Practices

Minimum of 10 experiments out of twelve given here under is to be completed
S.No Trades List of Experiments

1 Fitting Shop 1. Preparation of T-Shape Work piece
2. Preparation of U-Shape Work piece which contains: Filing, Sawing, Drilling,
Grinding.
2 Carpentry 3.Practice of Cross Half lap joint
4. Practice of Half lap Dovetail joint
3 Electrical & 5. One lamp one switch Practice
Electronics 6. Stair case wiring: Practice
4 Welding shop Demonstration of Gas and Resistance welding
( Arc & Gas) 7. Practice of Lap and Butt joint using Arc welding
5 Casting 8.Preparation of mould by using split pattern
9. Mould preparation and pouring of molten metal.
6 Tin Smithy 10. Preparation of Rectangular Tray & Square box
7 Machine Shop 11. Demonstration of turning , Drilling and Reaming operations
8 Plastic molding 12 a) Demonstration of Injection Moulding

& Glass Cutting b) Demonstration of Glass Cutting with hand tools
9 Domestic 13.Demonstration of Electric Iron, fan, Mixer, Hair Drier, Washing Machine etc.
Appliances
10 Lab project 14. Making various components and / or assembling the components which can be
useful in domestic / engineering applications
65
A b c d e f g h i j k l
X X X X
ENGLISH LAB (Reading, Listening and Writing)

Common to I Year I Semester (ECM, CSE, IT and Civil) & II Semester (ECE, EEE and MECH)
Code: 7HC61 LTPC
0 02 1
Course Objectives : The students will
- acquire knowledge on various types of listening techniques, barriers and benefits of
listening
- recognize the speech sounds and learn the intonation patterns
- learn various vocabulary patterns
- develop the ability to structure and punctuate the sentences
- learn different reading techniques
- learn different writing skills
Course Outcomes : At the end of the course the students will be able to
- understand and differentiate different types of listening techniques used to interact with
real world problems
- differentiate the speech sounds and improve their accent and modulation while
speaking
- understand and illustrate different word roots, word derivatives – synonyms, antonyms
and word inflections
- discriminate a variety of sentence types, their structure and use punctuations
- get acclimatized to reading strategies and note making.
- develop proficiency in writing and preparing resume
Unit-I : Practice sessions on
Listening for Basic Vocabulary
Listening for General Information
Listen for specific information
Listening Comprehension
Unit-II: Practice sessions on Pronunciation
Articulation of Vowel and Consonant sounds
Listening for Word accent
Intonation Patterns
Unit-III: Exercises on Word Roots
Affixes: Prefixes and Suffixes
Identifying Homophones,
Homonyms, Homographs
Synonyms - Antonyms
One word substitutes
Idioms and Phrases
Unit-IV: Exercises on
Punctuation and Spelling
Error Identification in Sentences
Conversion of Sentences
Unit-V : Practice sessions on
Using passages for skimming and scanning
Note Making using Texts
Reading Comprehension using different techniques
Unit-VI: Exercises on
Paragraph Writing using hints/Guided Paragraphs
66
Writing Letters
Writing Resume
Suggested Readings:
(i) English grammar just for you Rajeevan Karal, Oxford publications
(ii) Practical English Usage. Michael Swan. OUP. 1995.
(iii) Remedial English Grammar. F.T. Wood. Macmillan.2007
(iv) On Writing Well. William Zinsser. Harper Resource Book. 2001
(v) Study Writing. Liz Hamp-Lyons and Ben Heasly. Cambridge University Press. 2006.
(vi) Communication Skills. Sanjay Kumar and Pushp Lata. Oxford University Press. 2011.
(vii) Learn to Write by Dr. G. Varalakshmi, Kindle Edition 2016
(viii) A practical course for developing writing skills in English by J.K. Gangal, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd.
67
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
M H M M
TECHNICAL SEMINAR -II

Code: 7C292
L T P C

Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Procedure
classrooms.
68
Report : 10 marks
_________
Total 100 marks
69
Syllabus for B.Tech. II year I Semester
ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS
(Common to ECE/EEE/ECM)
Code: 7C301
L T P/D C
Course Objectives: 3 - - 3
The objective of this course is to provide the learners with a comprehensive understanding of electronic
devices, circuits and their applications.
Course Outcomes:
After studying this course, the students will be able to
1. Learning the operation of diode and its application as rectifier and filters
2. Understand the Fundamentals of BJT operation, Characteristics ,different biasing circuits,
analysis of BJT amplifiers.
3. Analyze and Design of BJT Single stage, multistage amplifiers at low and high frequencies.
4. Analysis of small signal model of FET and frequency response
5. Design different types of Feedback Amplifier, Oscillators and their analysis
6. Understand the Basic regulator circuits and voltage multipliers.

CO1 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT-I
PN JUNCTION DIODE:
P-N junction diode characteristics and applications under forward & reverse bias. Transition capacitance and Diffusion
capacitance. Break down of junctions (Avalanche and Zener Break down). Zener Diode Characteristics.
P-N junction diode as a Rectifier :Half wave Rectifier, Full wave Rectifier, Bridge Rectifier, Analysis of Rectifier circuits
without and with filters (L,C and π filters )
UNIT- II BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTOR: Characteristics and Biasing
Fundamentals of BJT& Operation, Minority carrier profiles. I/P and O/P Characteristics CB, CE and CC configurations.
Transistor as a switch. Switching characteristics (Rise time, Fall time, Delay Time and Storage time), Design of transistor as
switch. Problems on transistor switch. BJT Biasing Methods & Stabilization. - Fixed Bias, Collector to Base Bias, Voltage
Divider Bias and Problems, Concept of Thermal runway in BJTs.
UNIT-III
70
Small signal & High frequency analysis of BJT:
Small signal Low frequency Model of BJT, h-parameter representation – Exact analysis of .CE Amplifier-. Approximate
analysis of CE, CB and CC Amplifiers. Concept of Multistage amplifier - N-stage cascaded amplifier, equivalent circuits,
Frequency response of single & two stage RC coupled Amplifier, Analysis at Low and High frequencies.
Small signal High frequency Model of BJT (hybrid π model) – relationship between high frequency parameters and h-
parameters, β cut off Frequency (common Emitter short circuit Current gain), Millers Theorem.
UNIT-IV
FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR:
Construction & Working of JFET, JFET characteristics, FET Parameters, Construction & Working of MOSFET, MOSFET
characteristics, (Enhancement and depletion mode); Comparison of JFET & MOSFET
Biasing of JFET - Self bias and fixed bias. Small signal Analysis of common source, common drain and common gate amplifier
configurations
UNIT- V
FEED BACK AMPLIFIERS
Fundamentals-classification- Characteristics of feedback Amplifier effect of feedback in voltage series, voltage shunt, current
series and current shunt amplifiers. Problems
OSCILLATORS
Classification of Oscillators. Condition for Oscillations. RC Phase shift Oscillator , Wein bridge oscillator- Hartley
oscillator, Colpitts oscillator, Quartz crystal Oscillator,
UNIT-VI
VOLTAGE REGULATORS:
Classification of Voltage Regulators - Basic regulator circuit: Zener, Transistor Based: Shunt and Series Voltage regulators.
Protection Circuits: Current limiting, Short circuit protection. Specifications of Voltage regulator, Voltage multipliers. Switching
Regulators – (boost up, step down (buck) & Flyback)
Text Books
1. Electronic Devices and Crcuits-J.Millman, C.C.Halkias and satyabratha jit Tata McGraw Hill,2 Ed. 2007
2. Electronic Devices AND Circuits-R.L.Boylestad &Louis Nashelsky, Pearson/Prentice Hall, 9th edition, 2006.
3. Electronic devices and Circuit Theory-Robert L. Boylstead, Louis Nashelsky, 9ht ed., 2008, PE
4. Integrated electronics-J.Milliman and C.C.Halkias, MC Graw –Hill-1972
References:
1. Electronic circuit analysis-K.Lal Kisshore,2004,BSP
2. 2.Electronic Devices and Circuits – K.LalKishore, 2 ed., 2005, BSP
3. 3.Electronic Devices: Systems and Applications – Robert Diffenderter, 2nd Indian Reprint., 2010, Cengage Learning
4. Electronic Devices and Crcuits by Sanjeev Guptha,Dhapat Rai Publications.
5. Electronic Devices and Circuits by S.Salivahanan and N.Suresh Kumar, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publications
6. Electronic Circuits and Applications, Muhammad H Rashid, Cengage Learning
71
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M M M M
DIGITAL LOGIC DESIGN
(Common to ECE/ECM/EEE)
Code: 7C302
L T P/D C
3 - - 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES: To learn the different numbering systems, Boolean

functions and design of Combinational and Sequential Circuits.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing this course, the students will have demonstrated
i. an ability to understand number systems and apply the rules of Boolean algebra to simplify
Boolean expressions.
ii. an ability to simplify of Boolean expressions using K-map.
iii. an ability to design MSI combinational circuits such as full adders, multiplexers, decoders,
encoders. Code converters.
iv. an ability to design basic memory units (latches and flip-flops) and sequential circuits such as
counters and registers
v. an ability to design digital design using PLD’s such as ROM’s, PLA’s, PAL s.
vi. an ability to design digital controllers using Algorithmic State Machine Charts .

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT – I
Number System: Binary, decimal, octal, hexa decimal, weighted and un-weighted codes.
Boolean Algebra: Axiomatic definition of Boolean algebra, Binary operators, postulates of and
theorems. Boolean addition, subtraction, 1’s complement, 2’s complement. Switching functions,
Canonical forms and Standard forms, Simplification of switching functions using theorems.
72
UNIT – II
Logic gates: Basic gates and universal gates.
Minimization of Switching Functions: simplification rules, Karnaugh map method, Prime implicants,
don’t care combinations, Minimal SOP and POS forms, Quine-McCluskey Tabular Method, Prime
Implicant chart.
Application: Design of a Basic Calculator Using Logic Gates.
UNIT - III
Combinational Logic Design:
Single output and multiple output combinational logic circuit design, AND-OR, OR-AND, and
NAND/NOR realizations, Exclusive-OR and Equivalence functions, Binary adders/subtractors, Encoder,
Decoder, Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, MUX realization of switching functions, Parity bit generator,
Code-converters, Concepts of threshold logic and threshold gates.
Applications: Application of Decoder in Seven Segment Display, application of Encoders in

Servomotors.
UNIT - IV
Sequential Circuits-1:
Classification of sequential circuits (Synchronous, Asynchronous Pulse mode, and Level mode with
examples). Basic flip-flops-Triggering and excitation tables. Conversion of flip-flops.
Applications: Application of SR Flip Flop in Switch Debounce Circuit.
UNIT - V
Sequential Circuits-2:
The sequential circuit model, Asynchronous counters, Design of simple synchronous sequential circuits
such as counters (Design of modulo-N counter, Ring counter, twisted ring counter) and Shift registers
Applications: Design of 1010 sequence detector, Design of Digital Clock using Counters
UNIT - VI
Programmable Logic Devices:
Basic PLD’s-ROM, PROM, PLA, and PLD Realization of Switching functions using PLDs. Algorithmic
State Machines: State machines and state diagrams.
Applications: Design of a Weighing machine and Binary multiplier.
Text Books:
1. Morris Mano-,Digital design –PHI, 2nd Edition.

2. ZviKohavi and Niraj K Jha -Switching & Finite Automata theory – Cambridge, 3rd Edition.
3. SubrataGhoshal, Digital Electronics,2012, Cengage Learning
References:
1.Fletcher -An Engineering Approach to Digital Design – PHI.
73
2.Fundamentals of Logic Design, Roth, Kenny, Seventh Edition, Cengage Learning

3.R.P.Jain-Switching Theory and Logic Design- TMH Edition,2003.
4.John M. Yarbrough -Digital Logic Applications and Design – Thomson Publications, 2006
5.CVS Rao -Switching Theory and Logic Design –Pearson Education, 2005
74
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H H M M M M M

SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS
(Common to ECE/ECM)
Code: 7C303
L T P C
2 1 - 3
Course Objectives :
To study the concepts of signals and systems their characterization in the Time as well as frequency
domains
COURSE OUTCOMES:
i. Understand the concepts of signals, comparison of signals, orthogonal signal space and the
concepts of impulse, step and signum functions.
ii. Apply the orthogonality properties to understand the Fourier methods of signal analysis- Fouries
series and Fourier Transforms.
iii. Understand the concepts of systems, their characterization in the Time as well as Transformed
domains.
iv. Understand and apply the mathematical tools, such as Convolution, Correlation and the Laplace
transform, to analyze signals and systems.
v. Determine the sampling frequency for any low pass and band pass signals applying the sampling
theorem.
vi. Distinguish between continuous and Discrete time signals and systems. Apply the concepts of Z-
Transforms in the analysis of DT signals and systems.
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT I
Signals: Signals. Classification of Signals. Even, Odd, Periodic. Non-periodic. Energy and Power
Signals. Exponential and Sinusoidal Signals. Concepts of Impulse Function. Unit Step Function. Signum
Function.
Signal Analysis - Analogy between Vectors and Signals. Orthogonal Signal Space. Signal
Approximation using Orthogonal Functions. Mean Square Error. Closed or Complete Set of Orthogonal
Functions. Orthogonality in Complex Functions.
Applications: The concepts of orthogonality find applications in DSP, DIP, DC, Design of
experiments and so on.
75
UNIT-II
Fourier Representation of Continuous Time Signals
Periodic Signals- Fourier Series, Dirichlet’s Conditions. Trigonometric. Exponential Fourier series.
Fourier Spectrum.
Non- Periodic Signals - Fourier Transforms. Fourier Transform of Arbitrary Signal. Standard Signals.
Fourier Transform of Periodic Signals. Properties of Fourier Transforms. Fourier Transforms Involving
Impulse and Signum Function Energy Density Spectrum, Parseval’s Theorem. Introduction to Hilbert
Transform.
Applications: Knowledge of signal bandwidth is necessary in the design of a filter; in the

determination of the carrier frequency and also the sampling frequency and analog communication.
UNIT-III
Signal Transmission through Linear Systems
Systems. Classification of Systems. Linear System. Impulse Response (IR) of a Linear System. Linear
Time Invariant (LTI) System. Linear Time Variant (LTV) System. Transfer Function of a LTI System.
Filter Characteristics of Linear Systems. Distortion Less Transmission Through a System. Signal
Bandwidth. System Bandwidth. Ideal LPF, HPF and BPF Characteristics. Causality and Poly-Wiener
Criterion for Physical Realization. Relationship between Bandwidth and Rise Time.
Applications: The concept of system bandwidth is applied in the design of a practical filter or system.
UNIT-IV
Convolution and Correlation of Signals
Concept of Convolution in Time Domain and Frequency Domain. Graphical Representation of
Convolution. Convolution Properties. Cross Correlation and Auto Correlation of Functions. Properties of
Correlation Function... Relation between Convolution and Correlation. Detection of periodic signals in
the presence of Noise by Auto and Cross Correlations.
Laplace Transforms - Review of Laplace Transforms. Partial Fraction Expansion. Inverse Laplace
Transform. Concept of Region of Convergence (ROC) for Laplace Transforms. Constraints on ROC for
Various Classes of Signals. Properties of LT. Initial and final value theorems, Relation between LT and
FT of a Signal. Laplace Transform of Certain Signals using Waveform Synthesis. Laplace Transform of
Periodic Signals.
Applications: These math tools are required in the design, analysis and implementation of various
filters, LT signals and systems .
UNIT-V
Sampling
Sampling Theorem. Graphical and Analytical Proof for Band Limited Signals. Impulse (Ideal) Sampling.
Natural (Chopped) Sampling and Flat Top(S&H) Sampling. Reconstruction of Signal from its Samples.
Effect of Under Sampling. Aliasing. Introduction to Band Pass Sampling.
Applications: Sampling techniques are applied in the conversion of analog to digital conversion
UNIT-VI
Z–Transforms
Fundamental Difference between Continuous and Discrete Time Signals. Discrete Time Signal
Representation using Complex Exponential and Sinusoidal Components. Periodicity of Discrete Time
using Complex Exponential Signal. Concept of Z- Transform of a Discrete Sequence. Distinction
Between Laplace, Fourier and Z Transforms. Region of Convergence in Z-Transform. Constraints on
ROC for Various Classes of Signals. Inverse Z-Transform. Properties of Z-Transforms. Initial and final
value theorems. Introduction to Discrete Time Systems.
76
Applications: Analysis and Synthesis of DT signals and systems.
Text Books
1. Signals, Systems and Communications- B. P. Lathi, BSP.
2. Signal processing and Linear Syustems - B. P. Lathi, BSP.
3. Signals and Systems – Anand Kumar
References
1. Signals & Systems – Simon Haykin and Van Veen,Wiley, 2nd Edition.
2. A.V. Oppenheim, A.S. Willsky and S.H. Nawab, PHI, 2ndEdn.
3. Linear Systems and Signal Processing - B. P. Lathi, Oxford University Publications.
77
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M H M M
Syllabus for B. Tech (E.C.E.)II Year I semester
PROBABILITY THEORY AND STOCHASTIC PROCESS

Code: 7C304
L T P/D C
2 1 - 3

1. Understand the concepts of Probability, Probability of Random Events,Bayes Theorem, Joint,
Marginal, Conditional, Total Probability.
2. Understand concepts of Discrete Random Variables,Continuous Random Variables and
Transformations of Random Variables.
3. Understand concepts ofmultiple random variables, independent random variable, transformation
of multiple random variables.
4. Understand concepts ofthe.Mean. Auto-correlation, Auto-covariance and Auto-correlation
Coefficient,Cross-correlation Function. Cross-covariance Function. Cross-correlation
Coefficient.
5. Understand the concepts of Power Spectral Density Function of Random Process, Time
Averaging and Ergodicity.
6. Understand the concepts of Random Signal Response of Linear Systems,Thermal Noise and Shot
noise

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT I
PROBABILITY
Set Definitions. Sample Points and Sample Spaces. Probability of Random Events. Laws of Probability.
Joint,Marginal and Conditional Probabilities. Total Probability. Bayes Theorem. Statistical
Independence.
UNIT-II
RANDOM VARIABLES
Probability Distribution Functions. Discrete Random Variables and Probability Mass Function. Expected
values. Continuous Random Variables. Probability Density Functions. Complex Random Variables.
Moments and Characteristic Functions. Distributions and Density Functions and their Properties.
Expected Values. Moments and Characteristic Functions – Binomial. Poisson. Uniform. Gaussian.
Exponential. Rayleigh. Transformations of Random Variables.
UNIT-III
78
RANDOM VECTORS
Joint Probability Distribution Functions. Joint Probability Densities. Conditional Probability
Distributions Functions. Marginal Distributions and Density Functions. Conditional Probability
Densities. Expected Value of a Function of Random Variables. Joint Moments. Joint Characteristic
Functions. Sum of Two RandomVariables. Sum of Several Random Variables. central limit theorem
(proof not expected)Jointly Gaussian Random Variables. Independent Random Variables.
Transformations (Functions) of Multiple Random Variables.
UNIT-IV
RANDOM PROCESSES
Definition: The concept. Probabilistic Structure. Classification. Formal Definition. Description: Joint
Distribution. Analytical Description using Random Variables. Average Values: Mean. Auto-correlation,
Auto-covariance and Auto-correlation Coefficient. Two or More Random Processes: Cross-correlation
Function. Cross-covariance Function. Cross-correlation Coefficient.
Applications: Calculation Coding efficiency of Shanon Fano Coding.
UNIT-V
STATIONARITY AND CORRELATION THEORY
Strict-sense Stationarity. Wide-sense Stationarity (WSS). Auto-correlation Function of Real WSS
Random Process and its Properties. Cross-correlation Function and its Properties. Power Spectral Density
Function of a WSS Random Process and its properties. Wiener-Khinchine Theorem. Power and
Bandwidth Calculations. Cross-power Spectral Density Function and its Properties
Time Averaging and Ergodicity: Time Averages – Interpretation. Mean and Variance. Ergodicity.
General Definition. Mean-ergodic. Correlation -ergodic.
Applications: Removal of noise using correlation.
UNIT-VI
LINEAR SYSTEMS WITH RANDOM INPUTS
Value of System Random Signal Response of Linear Systems: System Response – Convolution. Mean
and Mean-squared Response. Autocorrelation Function of Response. Cross-Correlation Functions of
Input and Output. Spectral Characteristics of System Response. Power Density Spectrum of Response.
Cross-Power Density Spectrums of Input and Output. Band Pass. Band-Limited and Narrowband
Processes. Properties.Thermal Noise. Shot noise
Applications– Modulation. Sampling.
Text Books
1. Peyton Z. Peebles Jr., Probability, Random Variables and Random Signal Principles, 4 th edn.,
Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2002.
2. Athanasios Papoulis, S.Unnikrishna Pillai, Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic Process
, PHI, 4th Edition, 2002
3. Y Mallikarjuna Reddy, Probability Theory and Stochastic Process, 4 th edition, University Press,
2013
References
1. G. R. Grimmett, D. R. Stirzaker, Probability and Random Processes, Second Edition, Oxford
Science Publications, 1995.
2. Hwei HSU, Probability, Random Variables & Random Processes, Schaum’s Outlines, TMH,
2009
3. K Murugesan, P. Gurusamy, Probability, Statistics and Random Processes, Anuradha
Publications, 2006
79
a b c d e f g h i j k l
H M M L
II Year B.Tech, Semester-I

Transform Techniques & Numerical Methods
(Common to ECE & EEE)
L T P/D C
Code: 7HC13 2 0 0 2
Pre Requisites: Engineering Mathematics – II
Objectives:
To learn
 Concept, properties of Laplace transforms

 Solving ordinary differential equations using Laplace transforms techniques.
 Various methods to the find roots of an equation.
 Concept, properties of Z-Transforms, Solving Difference equations using Z-Transforms.
 Form partial differential equations and find the solution to first order linear and nonlinear partial
differential equations.
 Applications of PDE.
 Concept of finite differences and to estimate the value for the given data using interpolation.
 Evaluation of integrals using numerical techniques
 Solving ordinary differential equations using numerical techniques.
UNIT - I: Laplace Transformations: (12 L)

Laplace transform of standard functions, shifting theorems, change of scale property, Laplace
Transform of Derivatives and Integrals, Multiplication by powers of ‘t’, Divison by ‘t’ (without
proofs). Laplace transform of unit step function, Impulse function. Inverse Laplace transforms:
properties, partial fraction method and convolution theorem (without proof). Solving ordinary
differential equations with constant coefficients using Laplace Transforms.
UNIT - II: Z- Transforms: (8L)

Z- Transforms and Inverse Z-transforms, properties, damping rule, Shifting properties, Initial
and final value theorems Convolution theorem (without proofs).
Applications-Solution of difference equation by Z- transforms
UNIT– III: Partial Differential Equations: (10L)

Formation of Partial Differential Equations by Elimination of Arbitrary Constants and Arbitrary
Functions. Solutions to First order Linear and Non-linear Equations-Standard Forms, Equations
Reducible to Standard Forms. Classification of partial differential equations. Method of
Separation of Variables, Solution of One dimensional Heat Equation.
UNIT- IV: Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations and Numerical integration:
(10L)
The Bisection Method – The Method of False Position –Fixed point iteration Method – Newton-
Raphson Method.
80
Newton-Cotes Quadrature Formula, Trapezoidal rule – Simpson’s 1/3 rule – Simpson’s 3/8 rule.
UNIT – V: Interpolation: (10L)
Introduction– Finite differences- Forward Differences, Backward differences, Central
differences. Newton’s formulae for interpolation – Gauss Central Difference Formulae (without
proofs), Lagrange’s Interpolation formula for unevenly spaced points.
UNIT – VI: Numerical solution of Ordinary Differential equations: (12L)
Solution by Taylor’s series – Picard’s Method of successive Approximations – Euler’s Method –
Runge-Kutta Methods of fourth order, Predictor-Corrector Methods-Milne’s Method.
Text Books:
(i) R K Jain and S R K Iyengar Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Narosa
Publications.
(ii) B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 35th Edition,
2000.
(iii) S. S. Sastry, Introductory methods of numerical analysis. PHI, 4th Edition, 2005.
Reference Books:
(i) Ramana B.V., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi, 11th
Reprint, 2010.
(ii) Engineering Mathematics, Srimanta Pal, OXFORD university press.
(iii) G.B. Thomas and R.L. Finney, Calculus and Analytic geometry, 9th Edition, Pearson,
Reprint, 2002.
(iv)Erwin kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th Edition, John Wiley & Sons,
2006.
Course outcomes:
After learning the contents of this paper the student must be able to
 Use the Laplace transforms techniques for solving ODE’s
 Use the Z-Tranforms technique for solving Difference equations
 Form partial differential equations and find the solution to first order linear and nonlinear
partial differential equations.
 Find the root of a given equation.
 Estimate the value for the given data using interpolation
 Find the numerical solutions for a given ODE’s
81
a B c d e f g h i j k l m
x X x
Syllabus for B. Tech (E.C.E.) II Year I semester
Code: 7AC43 ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY
(Common to ECE & ECM)
L T P C
2 - - 2
After studying this course, the student will be able to
1. Understand the principle and operation of DC generator along with its applications.
2. Understand the principle and operation of DC motor along with its applications.
3. Understand the principle and operation of Transformer along with its applications.
4. Understand the principle and operation of three phase induction motor along with its applications.
5. Understand the principle and operation of synchronous machine along with its applications.
6. Understand the principle and operation of single phase motors along with its applications.
UNIT – I: D.C. GENERATORS:
Principle of operation, Constructional features, E.M.F equation, Types of D.C generators, build up of e.m.f, O.C.
characteristics, Load characteristics of shunt, series and compound generators, simple problems.
UNIT –II: D.C. MOTORS:
D.C. Motors - Principle of operation, Back E.M.F, Torque equation, Characteristics and application of shunt, series
and compound motors, Speed control of D.C. motors, Armature voltage and field flux control methods, Principle of
3 point starter, Losses, efficiency, Swinburne’s test, Simple Problems.
UNIT-III: TRANSFORMERS:
Single Phase Transformers, types, constructional details, E.M.F equation, Operation on no load and on load, Phasor
diagrams, Equivalent circuit, S.C. & O.C. tests - Losses and efficiency, Regulation. Introduction to three phase
supply, phase sequence, star and delta connected loads, three phase transformer (star – delta, delta – star
transformers).
UNIT-IV: THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS:
Construction details of cage and wound rotor machines, Production of a rotating magnetic field, Principle of
operation, rotor E.M.F, rotor frequency, rotor reactance, rotor current and pf at standstill and running operation,
Torque derivation for standstill and running conditions, Slip – torque characteristics.
82
UNIT-V: SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES:
Constructional Features of round rotor and salient pole machines. E.M.F Equation, Synchronous reactance and
impedance, S.C. & O.C. tests and regulation by synchronous impedance method - Principle of operation of
Synchronous motor.
UNIT – VI: SINGLE PHASE MOTORS:
Single phase induction motor, Constructional features, Double revolving field theory, Split phase motor, Shaded
pole motor, Principle of operation of A.C. series motor, Universal motor, Stepper motor and Tacho.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Electrical Machines – S.K.Battacharya, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishers, 2nd edition.

2. Electric Machines – I.J. Nagrath & D.P. Kothari, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishers, 3rd edition, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Principles of Electrical Engineering – V.K.Mehta, S.Chand publications, 2nd edition.

2. Electrical Technology – Edward Huges, Pearson publishers, 8th edition.
83
Syllabus for B. Tech. II Year I semester

ELEMENTS OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
(Common to All Branches Except Mechanical Engineering)
Code: 7BC04
L T P/D C
2 - - 2
Course Objectives:
The main objective of the course is to offer the students fundamental knowledge of First Law of
Thermodynamics. Working of SI and CI engines, working principle of different types of Turbines&
pumps, properties of material and engineering application. Working principles of various types of power
transmission systems
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of basic mechanical engineering a student should be able to
1. To acquire the knowledge of basic concepts of thermodynamics and analyze the p-v & t-s
diagrams of the different cycles.
2. To acquire the knowledge two and four stroke engines, the function of components used in the
steam power plant
3. To identify & understand the function of components used in VCR & VAR system, & about the
working of hydraulic pumps & hydraulic turbines.
4. To identify & understand properties of material and engineering application
5. To acquire the knowledge of various types of power transmission systems
6. To acquire the knowledge the different NC and CNC machine.
UNIT - I
Energy Resources and Conversion, Basic concepts of Thermodynamics – general classification

of heat engines, Property and state, System, Boundary and surroundings , Zeroth Law, First Law
of Thermodynamics and its applications- Joule’s experiment, reversible non-flow processes-
Constant volume, constant pressure, constant temperature process, polytropic process, Second
Law of Thermodynamics – Statements, Heat engines, Carnot cycle, Air standard cycles – Otto,
Diesel Cycles.
UNIT-II
Internal combustion engines: Internal combustion engines, definition, classification,
components, working of four stroke cycle engines, SI and CI Engines, Performance parameters,
Need for cooling, and lubrication of IC engines.
Steam Power plant, Boiler, Steam Turbines: Layout of steam power plant, Water tube and
Fire tube Boilers :- Simple cross-tube boiler, Cochran, Babcock and Wilcox Boiler and High
Pressure Boilers. (Benson & La-mount only).
UNIT- III
a) Hydraulic pumps & turbines:- Centrifugal Pumps, Pelton wheel, Francis turbine and
Kaplan Turbine -- Layout of Hydro electric power plant
84
b) Refrigeration & Air conditioning systems:- Description of Vapour Compression and

Vapour Absorption systems
UNIT-IV
Engineering Materials – Classification, mechanical properties, Ferrous Materials – Constituents

of Cast Iron & types of Cast Iron, Steels – manufacture by Bessemer converter, Arc
furnace, types of steel, effect of alloying elements on steel, Stainless steel, Non- Ferrous
Materials: Properties and applications of Aluminum & alloys, Copper and alloys,
composite materials – types, fabrication methods, Ceramics – Properties and applications
UNIT-V
Transmission of Motion and Power – Shafting, Belt drive, types of belt drive, types of belts,
chain drives, types of chain drive, Pulleys, parts, types of pulleys, gear drive- classification,
Terminology of spur gear, Gear trains – simple and compound, Clutches – purpose and
basic principle of contact clutch, brakes - purpose and basic principle of block brake
UNIT-VI
Robot and sensors – Introduction, definition, Robot component, CNC Machine tools –
Introduction, Machine control, Vertical and Horizontal spindles, CNC drill, mill, boring and
tapping, Adaptive control, NC and CNC turning centers
TEXT BOOKS :
Mathur, M.L., Mehta, F.S. and Tiwari, R.P., Elements of Mechanical Engineering, Jain Brothers, New
Delhi, 2005.
R.K. Rajput, “Elements of Mechanical Engineering”, Laxmi Publications, 1994.
85
Syllabus for B. Tech. II Year I semester

7HC21: ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ECOLOGY
II B. Tech I Sem (for EEE, ME and ECE)
II B. Tech II Sem (for CSE, IT, ECM and CE)
(Mandatory course) L T P C
3 0 0 0
There are no credits but grading will be given based on marks scored as Outstanding/ Excellent/ Very
good/ Good/ Above average/ Average/ Satisfactory/Not satisfactory
Course Objectives:
• Understanding the importance of ecological balance for sustainable development.

• Understanding the impacts of developmental activities and mitigation measures.
• Understanding the environmental policies and regulations Course Outcomes:
• Based on this course, the Engineering graduate will understand /evaluate / develop technologies on
the basis of ecological principles and environmental regulations which in turn helps in sustainable
development
UNIT-I Ecosystems: Definition, Scope, and Importance of ecosystem. Classification, structure, and
function of an ecosystem, Food chains, food webs, and ecological pyramids. Flow of energy,
Biogeochemical cycles, Bioaccumulation, Biomagnification, ecosystem value, services and carrying
capacity.
UNIT-II Natural Resources: Classification of Resources: Living and Non-Living resources, water
resources: use and over utilization of surface and ground water, floods and droughts, Dams: benefits and
problems. Mineral resources: use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and using mineral
resources, Land Energy resources: growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy sources,
use of alternate energy source.
UNIT-III Biodiversity And Biotic Resources: Introduction, Definition, genetic, species and ecosystem
diversity. Value of biodiversity; consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and optional
values. India as a mega diversity nation, Hot spots of biodiversity. Field visit. Threats to biodiversity:
habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts; conservation of biodiversity: In-Situ and Ex-
situ conservation.
UNIT-IV Environmental Pollution and Control Technologies: Environmental Pollution:

Classification of pollution, Air Pollution: Primary and secondary pollutants. Acid rain, Global warming,
Ozone layer depletion, Water pollution: Sources and types of pollution. Soil Pollution: Sources and
86
types, Impacts of modern agriculture, degradation of soil. Noise Pollution: Sources and Health hazards,
standards, Solid waste: Municipal Solid Waste management, composition and characteristics of e-Waste
and its management. Pollution control technologies: Sewage water Treatment, Kyoto protocol, and
Montréal Protocol.
UNIT-V Sustainable development and Green Technology: Concept of sustainable development,

threats to sustainability population and its explosion, Crazy consumerism, over- exploitation of resources,
strategies for achieving sustainable development environmental education, conservation of resources,
urban sprawl sustainable cities and sustainable communities, human health , role of IT in Environment,
Environmental Ethics, Environmental Economic – Concept of Green Building, Clean Development
Mechanism ( CDM ).
UNIT-VI Environmental Policy, Legislation & Environment Impact Assessment: Environmental

Protection act, Legal aspects Air Act- 1981, Water Act, Forest Act, Wild life Act, Municipal solid waste
management and handling rules, biomedical waste management and handling rules, hazardous waste
management and handling rules. EIA: EIA structure, methods of baseline data acquisition. Overview on
Impacts of air, water, biological and Socio-economical aspects. Strategies for risk assessment, Concepts
of Environmental Management Plan (EMP).
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Introduction to Environmental Science Dr. Y. Anjaneyulu, 2004, BS Publications.

2. Environmental Studies by Erach Bharucha, 2005 University Press.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Environmental Science: towards a sustainable future by Richard T. Wright. 2008 PHL Learning
Private Ltd. New Delhi.
2. Environmental Engineering and science by Gilbert M. Masters and Wendell P. Ela. 2008 PHI
Learning Pvt. Ltd.
3. Environmental Science by Daniel B. Botkin & Edward A. Keller, Wiley INDIA edition.
4. Environmental Studies by Anubha Kaushik, 4th Edition, New age international publishers.
5. Text book of Environmental Science and Technology - Dr. M. Anji Reddy 2007, BS
Publications.
87
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H H H M M L
Syllabus for B. Tech (E.C.E.)II Year I semester

ELECTRONIC DEVICES & CIRCUITS LAB
(Common to ECE/ECM/EEE)
Code: 7C371
L T P/D C
- - 2 1

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
PART A: Electronic Workshop Practice (in 3 lab sessions):
1. Identification, Specifications, Testing of R, L, C Components (Colour Codes), Potentiometers,

Bread Boards.
2. Identification and Specifications of Active Devices like Diodes, BJTs, JFETs.
3. Study and operation of
• Digital Multimeters
• Function Generator
• Regulated Power Supplies
• Soldering
• SMD components
PART B: (For Laboratory examination – Minimum of 10 experiments)
1. Study and Operation of CRO:

Oscilloscope, CRT features, vertical amplifiers, horizontal deflection system, sweep,
triggerPulse, delay line, probes for CRO, Measurement of amplitude and frequency. Time Period
measurement, Lissajous patterns.
2. PN Junction diode characteristics A. Forward bias B. Reverse bias.
3. Zener diode characteristics
4. Transistor CB characteristics (Input and Output)
5. Transistor CE characteristics (Input and Output)
6. Half wave Rectifier with and without filters.
7. Full wave Rectifier (Centre tapped and Bridge)with and without filters
8. FET characteristics
9. CE Amplifier
10. CC Amplifier (Emitter Follower).
11. FET amplifier (Common Source)
12. RC Phase Shift Oscillator
88
Code: 7AC94 ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY LAB
(only for ECE)
L T P C
- - 2/2 0.5
The following experiments to be conducted:
1. OC & SC tests on Single – Phase transformer (Predetermination of efficiency and regulation

at given power factors).
2. Brake test on 3-phase induction motor (performance characteristics).
3. Speed control of DC shunt motor by
a) Armature Voltage Control
b) Field flux control method
4. Brake test on DC shunt motor (performance characteristics).
5. Predetermination of efficiency of DC shunt machine by Swinburne’s test.
6. Regulation of alternator by Synchronous impedance method.
89
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M M M M
Digital Logic Design Lab
Code: 7C372
L T P/D C
- - 2/2 0.5
Course Objectives:
The objectives of this course are
 To Design and analyze the various circuits and systems using Digital ICs.

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Syllabus Content
Verify the operations of the Digital ICs (Hardware) in the Laboratory

1. DeMorgon’s Theorem and the Universal gates
2. 3x8 Decoder using IC 74x138
3. Priority encoder using 74x148
4. 4-bit Binary Adder using IC 74x283
5. D Flip-Flop IC 74x74
6. Decade counter using IC74x90
90
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
M H M M
Technical seminar- III
Code: 7C393
L T P/D C


CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Procedure
classrooms.
91

Report : 10 marks
_________
Total 100 marks
92
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H H H M M L
Syllabus for B. Tech (E.C.E.) II Year II semester
ANALOG CIRCUITS
(Common to ECE, EEE AND ECM)
Code: 7C405
L T P/D C
3 - - 3
Course Objectives :
To understand the basic functioning and applications of the basic building blocks of analog electronic
circuits - amplifiers and oscillators.
COURSE OUTCOMES :
1. Distinguish between small and large signal amplifiers.
2. Analyze and Design tuned and RF amplifiers .
3. Understand linear and non-linear wave shapingmethods.
4. Understand analyze and design various types of multivibrators, their analysis, designing and
applications
5. Explain different sweep generators and their applications.
6. Analyze various types of Logic gates and Sampling gates.

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT I
POWER AMPLIFIERS
Classification of Power Amplifiers - Class A, B, AB & C power amplifiers –push pull configuration,
complementary symmetry circuits , Distortion in Amplifiers. Harmonic distortion and Crossover
Distortion in Power Amplifiers– Conversion efficiency and relative performance.
UNIT II
TUNED AMPLIFIERS
Introduction to Tuned Amplifiers, Q-Factor. single tuned capacitive coupled amplifier, tapped single
tuned capacitance coupled amplifier, single tuned inductively coupled amplifier, stagger tuning,
synchronous tuned Amplifier.
UNIT III
WAVE SHAPING – Linear and Non-linear:
93
RC high pass, low pass circuit response for sinusoidal, step, pulse, square, ramp & exponential inputs-
Differentiator –Integrator. RL, Diode clippers- Transistor clipper- clipping at two independent levels –
Emitter coupled clipper- comparator-– Applications of voltage comparators.
Clamping operation – clamping with source, diode resistances- clamping circuits theorem- practical
clamping circuits.
UNIT IV
MULTIVIBRATORS:
Stable states of Bistable Multivibrator A fixed bias transistor Bistable Multivibrator -A self biased
transistor Bistable Multivibrator - commutating capacitor – Unsymmetric triggering of Bistable
Multivibrator - triggering through a unilateral device- symmetrical triggering – Schmitt trigger circuit.
General operation of monostable multivibrator, collector coupled monostablemultivibrator - wave forms
of collector coupled monostable multivibrator - Emitter coupled monostablemultivibrator - triggering of
monostable multivibrator. Astablemultivibrator, collector coupled Astable multivibrator -Emitter coupled
Astable multivibrator. Designing of Bistable, Monostable and Astable Multivibrators.
UNIT V
TIME BASE GENERATORS:
General features of time base signals-sweep circuit using a transistor switch-UJT,UJT characteristics,
UJT as a sweep circuit, - General considerations & principles of Miller & Boot strap time base
generators- the transistor miller time base- the transistor, Boot strap time base generator- A simple
current sweep transistor current time base generator.
UNIT VI
SAMPLING and LOGIC GATES:
Basic operating principle unidirectional, Bidirectional sampling gates using diodes, transistors- reduction
of pedessel effect and sampling oscilloscope.
LOGIC GATES: Digital operation of a system- OR, AND, NOT, NAND & NOR gates- DTL Logic–
RTL Logic, TTL logic – comparison.
Text Books:
1. Integrated electronics-J.Milliman and C.C.Halkias, MC Graw –Hill-1972
2. Pulse digital and switching wave forms-J. Millman and H. Taub, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,2001.
3. Solid State Pulse circuits - David A. Bell, PHI, 4th Edn., 2002 .
References:
1. Pulse and Digital Circuits – A. Anand Kumar, PHI, 2005.
2. Wave Generation and Shaping - L. Strauss
3. Electronic Circuit Analysis-K.Lal Kishore, 2004, BSP
94
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M M M M M L

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES AND TRANSMISSION LINES
Code: 7CC06
L T P/D C
2 1 - 3

1. Apply the Maxwell’s equations in propagation of EM waves
2. Demonstrate the behavior of EM waves in different media.
3. Understand the property of EM energy at different boundary conditions.
4. Understand the impossibility of TEM waves in rectangular wave guides.
5. Design different transmission lines.
6. Understand the concepts of high frequency dissipation less and open& short circuited lines

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT I
REVIEW OF VECTOR ANALYSIS AND ORTHOGONAL COORDINATE SYSTEMS
Line, surface, and volume integrals. Curl, divergence and gradient of fields.
ELECTROSTATICS
Static electric fields, Coulomb’s Law, Gauss Law and Applications, Dielectric Constant, Isotropic and
Homogeneous Dielectrics, Continuity Equation, Relaxation time, Parallel plate, Coaxial and Spherical
capacitors.
Applications: Electric current in vacuum and gases, photocopier.
UNIT II
MAGNETOSTATICS: Static magnetic fields, Ampere’s Circuital Law, Magnetic Flux Density,
Magnetic Scalar and Vector Potentials. Forces due to Magnetic fields, Ampere’s Force Law, Inductance
and magnetic energy.
Applications: Electromagnetic suspension (EMS) maglev train, speakers and micro phones.
UNIT III
MAXWELL’S EQUATIONS
Differential and Integral forms-word statement-proofs and conversion. Faraday’s Law and their
Application in free space, polarization, Power flow and energy storage; Boundary conditions and
boundary value problems
.Applications: Electromagnetic wave propagation
95
UNIT I V
REFLECTION AND REFRACTION OF EM WAVES
Reflection by a perfect conductor-Normal and Oblique Incidence-Reflection by a perfect Insulator-
Normal and Oblique Incidence. Brewster angle.EM Wave characteristics, Guided waves between parallel
Planes, Power losses in plane conductor. Pointing Theorem.
Applications: Calculation of power loss in plane conductor.
UNIT V
TRANSMISSION LINE THEORY
Transmission line – general solution –The infinite line – Wavelength, velocity of propagation –
Waveform distortion – the distortion less line - Loading and different methods of loading – Line not
terminated in Z0 – Reflection coefficient – calculation of current , voltage, power delivered and efficiency
of transmission – Input and transfer impedance – Open and short circuited lines – reflection factor and
reflection loss.
Applications: Calculation of voltage and current distribution in a 10-Km transmission line.
UNIT VI
HIGH FREQUENCY TRANSMISSION LINES
Transmission line equations at radio frequencies – Line of Zero dissipation – Voltage and current on the
dissipation less line, Standing Waves, Nodes , Standing Wave Ratio – Input impedance of the dissipation
less line - Open and short circuited lines – Power and impedance measurement on lines – Reflection
losses. Smith Chart-Construction and applications.
Applications: determination of load standing wave ratio and reflection coefficient with smith chart
Text Books:
1. W.H.Hayt Jr., Engineering Electromagnetics, Tata Mc-Graw-Hill, 2001.
2. EC Jordan, EM waves and radiating systems, PHI, 1995.
3. Elements of Electromagnetics-Mathew N.OSadiku, 4ed., 2008, Oxford Univ.Press
4. Transmission Lines and Networks by Umesh Sinha
References:
1. N. Narayana Rao, Elements of Engineering Electro magnetics, Pearson Education,
2006.
2. J.D.Ryder, Networks lines and fields, PHI, 1990
96
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
M H M M M M
ANALOG COMMUNICATIONS
Code: 7CC07
L T P/D C
3 - - 3
Prerequisites: PTSP, SS.
Course Objectives:
 To provide both the theory and practice of modulation techniques used in various analog
transmitter and receiver systems.
Course Outcomes
1. Understand need for modulation, Types of analog modulation such as AM, DSBSC, SSBSC,
VSB , their generation and detection.
2. Understand types of multiplexing ,and commercial applications of all types of analog
modulations
3. Understand the types of angle modulation such as FM, PM, their generation and detection
methods, comparison and applications
4. Understand types of Noise, analysis and calculation of noise in AM,DSBSC and SSB
5. Understand the circuits and characteristics of transmitters and receivers for AM and FM.
6. Understand types of Pulse Modulations such as PAM, PPM, PWM, their generation,
detection, and applications.

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT I
AMPLITUDE MODULATION
Introduction to Analog Communications, Need for Modulation, Frequency Translation, Amplitude
Modulation-Time Domain and Frequency Domain Representation of AM signals, Power and Current
Relations in AM waves. Generation of AM Waves: Square Law Modulator, Switching Modulator.
Detection of AM Waves: Square Law Detector, Envelope Detector.
UNIT-II
DSBSC & SSBSC MODULATION
Double sideband suppressed carrier and single sideband modulation- Time domain and frequency domain
representation of DSBSC and SSB signals. Generation and Detection of DSBSC,SSB signals. Vestigial
sideband modulation. Generation and Detection of VSB signal, Frequency Division Multiplexing, ISB
Modulation. Comparison of AM techniques, Commercial Applications of AM.
97
UNIT-III
ANGLE MODULATION
Frequency modulation-Narrowband FM and wideband FM- spectrum of FM signals-Transmission
bandwidth of FM.Phase modulation-relationship between FM and PM signals Generation of FM signals-
direct(parametric variation method) and indirect(Armstrong method) methods, Detection of FM signals :
Frequency discriminators,phase difference discriminators,Phase locked loop, Zero crossing
Detector.Comparison of FM & AM, Commercial Applications of FM,PM.
Applications: Design of a 88-108 MHz FM system
UNIT-IV
NOISE AND DISTORTIONS IN COMMUNICATION
Noise in base-band systems-SNR at the output of a base-band system-SNR improvement. Noise in linear
CW modulation systems-noise in DSB/SC and SSB systems-noise in AM systems. Noise in angle
modulated systems-Output SNR in angle modulated systems- threshold effects in angle modulated
systems. Pre-emphasis & De-emphasis.
UNIT-V
TRANSMITTERS AND RECEIVERS
Radio Transmitters, Classification of Transmitters, AM Transmitter, Effect of feedback on performance
of AM Transmitter ,FM Transmitter, Frequency stability in FM Transmitter
Radio Receiver-types-Tuned Radio Frequency receivers and super-heterodyne receivers, RF section and
characteristics, Intermediate frequency, Image frequency and its rejection ratio, receiver characteristics-
Automatic gain control,Tracking & alignment, AM receiver, FM receiver, Amplitude limiting.
Applications: Design of an AM transmitter system.
UNIT-VI
PULSE MODULATION
Analog Pulse Modulation: Sampling theorem for base-band and band pass signals, Pulse Amplitude
modulation: generation and demodulation, Time Division Multiplexing system, PPM generation and
demodulation, PWM, Spectra of Pulse modulated signals.
Text Books
1. Simon Haykin, Communication Systems, John Wiley & Sons , 2nd Edition ,1998.
2. K. Sam Shanmugam, Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, John Wiley & Sons
3. H.Taub & D.Schilling,Gautam sahe, Principles of Communication systems –TMH,2007,3 rd
edition
References
1. George Kennedy and Bernard Davis ,Electronics & Communication System, TMH,2nd Edition,
2004.
2. Analog and Digital Communications, Theory and Lab work, Abhay Gandhi, Cengage Learning.
3. Dennis Roddy, John Coolen, “Electronic Communications”, PHI 1997 B.P. Lathi, “Modern
Digital and Analog Commmunication Systems” 3rd Ed. Oxford University Press.
4. P.Ramakrishna Rao,”Analog Communications”1st edition,TMH
5. K N HariBhat& Ganesh Rao, ”Analog Communications”2nd edition, pearson publications.
6. A.Bruce Calrson, “ Communication systems”, Third edition, MGH Publication.
98
COMPUTER ORGANIZATION AND ARCHITECTURE
Code:7DC11
L T P/D C
3 - - 3
abc defghi j k l m
x x xx
Course Objectives: Students will learn about

1. Various basic computer architectures, data representations and instruction sets.
2. Arithmetic unit, control unit and efficient computation using pipelining
3. Memory organization and optimization
4. I/O Communications and interfaces
Course Outcomes: After completing this course, student should be able to

1. Use data types with instruction set of specific architecture.
2. Analyze performance aspects with control unit along with pipelining
3. Evaluate memory access in terms of latency.
4. Utilize communication protocols for interfacing
Unit – I
Introduction: Organization and Architecture, Structure and Function – Computer Evolution - Brief history of
computers – Designing for performance.
Computer System: Components, Function – Interconnection Structures – Bus interconnection – PCI.
Unit – II
Instruction Set: Characteristics – Operand Types – Operation Types – Addressing Modes – Instruction formats
CPU: Computer Arithmetic operations: ALU – Integer Representation and Arithmetic – Floating Point
Representation and Arithmetic.
Unit – III
Computer Memory System Overview - Cache Memory Principles - Elements of Cache Design
Internal Memory - Semiconductor Main Memory - Error Correction - Advanced Dram Organization
External Memory - Magnetic Disk – Raid
Unit – IV
Characteristics of CISC and RISC
Control unit: Micro–Operations – Control of Processors – Hardwired Implementation.
Micro Programmed Control: Basic concepts – Control Memory - Microinstruction Sequencing – Conditional
branching – Mapping of instruction – Microinstruction Execution – Microprogram Example
Unit – V
Processor Structure and Function - Processor Organization - Register Organization - Instruction Cycle -
Instruction Pipelining - Instruction Execution Characteristics - The Use of a Large Register File - Compiler-Based
Register Optimization - Reduced Instruction Set Architecture - RISC Pipelining
Unit – VI
Input/Output - External Devices - I/O Modules - Programmed I/O - Interrupt - Driven I/O - Direct Memory
Access - I/O Channels and Processors.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for Performance”,
Prentice Hall, 9th Edition, 2013
2. John P.Hayes, “Computer Architecture and Organization”, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2002.
99
REFERENCES:
1. Patterson, D. A., and Hennessy, J. L., “Computer Organization and Design: The Hardware/Software
Interface”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 4th Edition, 2008.
2. D.A.Godse A.P.Godse, Computer Architecture & Organization, Technical Publications, 2007.
3. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic and Safwat Zaky, “Computer Organization”, Tata McGraw Hill, 5 th
Edition, 2002.
4. Morris Mano, “ Computer Systems Architecture “, 3rd Edition, Pearson PHI Publication, 1993
100
DATA STRUCTURES
(Common to all Branches)
Code:7EC01
L T P/D C
2 - - 2
Course Objective:
1. Understand the concepts of Abstract data Type, linear data structures such as stacks, queues
and lists and their applications.
2. Comprehend different non linear data structures such as trees and graphs and analyze their
time complexities.
3. Understand object oriented programming and advanced C++ concepts and be able to write
programs with C++ features such as composition of objects, operator overloads, dynamic
memory allocation, inheritance and polymorphism, Templates etc.
Course Outcomes:
1 Explain Abstract data type, stack and Queues with their applications
2 Write programs on Singly linked lists, Doubly linked lists, Circular list and explain their
operations.
3 Explain concepts of Trees, AVL Trees and Graphs with examples and applications.
4 Describe and solve problems of searching and sorting and evaluate the time complexity of each
algorithm.
5 Explain concepts of OOPs and implement programs using objects, classes, constructors and
destructors.
6 Explain and apply concepts of oops , write programs implementing functions , operator
overloading and inheritance.
UNIT I
Introduction to data structures: Abstract data type (ADT), Stacks, Queues and Circular queues and their
implementation with arrays.
Applications of Stack: infix to post fix conversion, postfix expression evaluation.
Applications of Queues .
UNIT II
Singly linked lists, Advantages of Linked lists over Arrays, Doubly linked lists, Circular list and their
operations, representing stacks and queues with Linked lists.
UNIT III
Trees- Binary trees, terminology, representation, traversals.
AVL trees, AVL tree operations: Insertion, deletion and searching.
101
Graphs- terminology, representation, graph traversals (DFS and BFS).
UNIT IV
Searching - Linear and binary search methods.
Sorting - Bubble sort, Selection sort, Insertion sort, Quick sort, Merge sort.
Heaps - Introduction, Min Heap, Max Heap,Operations on Heaps, Heap Sort.
Performance analysis of Searching and Sorting Algorithms.
UNIT V: Introduction to C++ programming-object oriented programming concepts, Structured Vs OOP.
Classes and objects-class definition, Objects, class scope and accessing members, Constructors-default
constructor, parameterized constructor, copy constructor. Destructor.
UNIT VI: Static class members, this pointer, friend functions, Dynamic memory management with
operators new and delete. Overloading-function overloading, Operator overloading, restrictions on
operator overloading, overloading unary and binary operators, templates, inheritance: single, multiple
and multi level inheritance.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Data Structures and C++ by Reema Thareja

2. Data Structure through C by Yashavant Kanetkar.
3. The complete reference C++ By Herb Schildt.
REFERENCES:
1. Alfred V. Aho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, John E. Hopcroft. Data Structures and Algorithms. Addison
Wesley, 1983.
2. Data Structures using c Aaron M.Tenenbaum , Yedidyah Langsam,Moshe J Augenstein.
3. Introduction to Data Structures In C By Kamtane
4. Data Structures, A pseudocode Approach with C by Richard F. Gilberg and Behrouz A. Forouzan.
102
MANAGEMENT SCIENCE AND FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING (MSFA)

Code: 7ZC01
L T P/D C
2 - - 2
Course Objective: To make students understand the basics of management and Financial Accounting, its
principles, practices and latest concepts for increasing the performance of engineering graduates in their
respective fields, which facilitate them in making better planning and decisions
Course Outcomes:
1. Outlines the significance of management, defines the basic concepts and applicability of
management principles in changing paradigms.
2. Helps in understanding organization behavior, personality determinants and other key aspects
3. Infers the need to understand the importance of Strategic management and Business environment
in particular
4. Enrich students with basic concepts of Financial Accounting.
5. Understand basic concepts of Depreciation and need for preparing trial balance.
6. Helps in preparation of Financial Statements (final accounts).
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT: Management- Definitions, Levels of Management,
Functions of management- Planning: types of planning, planning process; Organizing: Organizational
Design and Structure, Staffing; Directing; Controlling: Basic control process- Fayol’s principles of
Management - Taylor’s principles of scientific management- Maslow’s Motivational theory.
UNIT II
INTRODUCTION TO ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR: Definition, Nature and Scope of OB,
Personality-determinants of Personality – Perception- Attitudes- Attribution theory- Johari Window and
Transactional Analysis, Stress Management- factors and remedies
UNIT III
STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT: Introduction to Strategic Management, Vision, Mission, Goals,
Objectives, Environmental Scanning- PESTEL, SWOT Analysis, Competitive Advantage, Concept of
Core Competence, PORTER’s five force model, types of strategies, Strategic formulation and
Implementation.
UNIT IV
FUNDAMENTALS OF FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING: Definition of Accounting, Accounting
Concepts and conventions, principles of Double-Entry system, Book Keeping, Overview of books of
original records Journal, Ledger and Subsidiary books
UNIT V
TRIAL BALANCE AND DEPRECIATION OF FIXED ASSETS: Significance of Trial balance,
Preparation of trial balance Definition of Depreciation, Depreciation of fixed assets, Methods of
Depreciation – Straight line method and Diminishing Balance method
103
UNIT VI
CLASSIFICATION OF REVENUE AND CAPITAL EXPENSES, AND PREPARATION OF
FINAL ACCOUNTS: Revenue expenditure, Capital expenditure, Preparation of Final Accounts -
Trading Account, Profit and Loss Account and Balance Sheet with simple adjustments
References:
 A R Aryasri: Management Science, Tata Mc Graw Hill

 Ambrish Gupta, Financial Accounting for Management, Pearson Education, New Delhi
 A R Aryasri: Managerial Economics and Financial Analysis, Tata Mc Graw Hill
104
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M M M H L
Syllabus for B. Tech (E.C.E.)II Year II semester

BASIC SIMULATION LAB
(Common to ECE/ECM)
Code: 7CC73
L T P/D C
- - 2 1

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
SYLLABUS CONTENT
1. Basic Operations on Matrices
2. Generation of Various signals and sequences (Periodic and Aperiodic) such as Unit Impulse,
Unit Step, Square, Saw tooth, Triangular, Sinusoidal, Ramp, Sinc
3. Operations on Signals and Sequences such as Addition, Multiplication, Scaling, Shifting,

Folding, Computation of Energy and Average Power.
4. Finding Even and Odd parts of a Signal/Sequence and Real and Imaginary Parts of a Signal.
5. Convolution of Signals and Sequences.
6. Auto Correlation and Cross Correlation of Signals and Sequences
7. Computation of unit sample, unit step and sinusoidal response of the given LTI system and
verifying its physical realiazability and stability properties.
8. Gibbs Phenomenon.
9. Sampling Theorem Verification.
10. Locating the Zeros and Poles and Plotting the Pole-Zero maps in the S-Plane and Z-Plane for the
given transfer function.
11. Verification of Linearity and Time Invariance Properties of a given Continuous / Discrete
105
System
12. Generation of Gaussian noise (Real and Complex), Computation of its Mean, Mean Square
Value and its Skew, Kurtosis, and PSD , Probability Distribution Function.
13. Finding the Fourier transform of the signal using Fast Fourier Transform
106
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M M M M L

Analog Circuits Lab
Code: 7C474
L T P/D C
- - 3 1.5
x x x x x x
Course Objectives: To prepare students to practice the design and analysis of any Analog electronics
circuit.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the laboratory course, the students will be able to
1. To understand the design and working of various linear and non-linear wave shaping circuits.
2. To demonstrate the working principle of various multivibrators.
3. To verify the functionalities of various logic gates.
4. To perform and verify the BJT/ FET and feedback amplifiers.
5. To perform and verify the working of oscillators and voltage regulators.
6. To perform laboratory experiment to verify the conversion efficiency of various power
amplifiers.
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Syllabus Content:
Part-A: Hardware based experiments
1. Linear wave shaping.
2. Non Linear wave shaping – Clippers. clampers.
3. UJT Relaxation Oscillator
4. Astable and monostable Multivibrator.
5. Bistable Multivibrator.
6. Study of Logic Gates with discrete components.
Part-B: Software Simulation based experiments (Multisim OR Pspice OR Tina Pro Or Equivalent
Simulation Software)
1. Common Emitter and Common Source amplifier
2. Voltage shunt and Feedback Amplifier
3. Cascade Amplifier (CE+CE, CE+CC)
4. RC Phase Shift Oscillator using Transistors
5. Class- A and Class-B Complementary Symmetry Power Amplifier
107
6. Series and Shunt Voltage Regulator.
108
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
M H M M M L
Year/Sem Sub. Code Subject Name L T P/D C

II-II 7C475 ANALOG COMMUNICATIONS LAB - - 2 1
Prerequisites: SS, PTSP, BS Lab
Course Objectives:
 To perform laboratory experiments on various analog and digital modulation techniques and
measure the performance parameters.
Course Outcomes: After studying this course, the students will be able to
CO Demonstrate the modulation and demodulation of various forms of amplitude modulation
1 techniques.
CO Demonstrate the modulation and demodulation of frequency modulated waveform.
2
CO Verifying the spectral components of AM and FM.
3
CO Verifying the concepts of frequency multiplexing techniques.
4
CO Analyze the characteristics of heterodyne receiver.
5
CO Verifying sampling theorem.
6
CO Demonstrate the modulation and demodulation of pulse modulation techniques.
6

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Syllabus content:
1. AM Generation and Detection
2. DSB-SC Generation and Detection
3. SSB-SC generation and detection
4. FM Generation and Detection
5. Receiver Characteristics
6. Simple and delayed AGC characteristics
7. PLL characteristics and FM demodulation using PLL
109
8. Spectrum Analysis of AM and FM signals

9. Frequency Division Multiplexing – Verification
10. Sampling Theorem Verification
11. PAM Generation and Detection
12. Pulse Position Modulation & Demodulation
110
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
M H M M

II-II 7C494 TECHNICAL SEMINAR IV - - 2 1
Course Objective :


CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Procedure
classrooms.
111
Report : 10 marks
_________
Total 100 marks
112
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
M M M M

II-II 7C496 COMPREHENSIVE VIVA-VOCE-I - - - 1
Course Objectives:
Evaluate, comprehend and assess of the concepts and the knowledge gained in the core courses of the
first and the second year.
Course Outcomes :
At the end of this course, the student will be able to
1. Comprehend the concepts in the core and elective courses.

2. Exhibit technical knowledge to face interviews.
3. Exhibit lifelong Learning skills for higher education and to pursue Professional practice.
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
There will be 100 marks in total with 30 marks of internal evaluation and 70 marks of external
evaluation.
Internal:
Comprehensive Viva Voce is Conducted twice in a semester and evaluated for 15 marks each.
End examination : 70 Marks.
The end examination will be carried out by a committee consisting of an external examiner, head of the
department, a senior faculty member and the supervisor.
113
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
M M M M H M H M L
Syllabus for B.Tech. II year II Semester
7C461 SUMMER INDUSTRY INTERNSHIP-I
Course Objective:
The students undergo industrial training so that he/she become industry-ready.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the training, the student is able to
1. Select the real-time problem in the industry.

2. Analyze the requirements with respect to the problem statement
3. Design the optimal solution for the problem.
4. Implement the solution using the apropriate modern tools.
5. Present and submit the report
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Student shall carryout the project in industry during summer vacation for 3-6 weeks. There is internal and
external Evaluation. Internal Evaluation carries 25 marks and external Evaluation carries 75 marks, Total
100 marks. Evaluation is carried out in B.Tech III year I semester.
114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M M M L L
Syllabus for B. Tech (E.C.E.) III Year I semester
III - I 7CC08 IC Applications 3 - - 3
Course Objectives
 To maintain the right blend of theory and practice in analyzing and designing a wide variety of
applications using IC 741 op-amps
 To acquaint the learners with a wide variety of Digital ICs families, and their applications in various
digital circuits and systems.
Course Outcomes
 Demonstrate the concepts of Differential Amplifier and Operational Amplifier and their characteristics.
 Design the basic circuits using Operational Amplifiers.
 Explore, design and analyze Filters, Timers, Voltage Controlled Oscillator and Phase Locked Loop.
 Demonstrate the design and analyze Oscillators, D/A Converters and A/D Converters, and IC regulators.
 Classify and characterize the TTL/ECL Logic Families.
 Explore the design of various logic gates using CMOS logic.

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT – I
OPAMP & ITS CHARACTERISTICS
Differential Amplifiers and its Characteristics. Op-Amp Block Diagram, Ideal OP-AMP Characteristics,
DC and AC Characteristics. 741 Op-Amp and its Features and Characteristics. Parameters Measurement:
Offset Voltage and Current, Slew Rate and CMRR. Frequency Compensation.
UNIT – II
BASIC APPLICATIONS OF OP-AMPs
Adder/Subtractor, Difference Amplifier, Instrumentation Amplifier, Differentiator, Integrator, V/I & I/V
Converters, Comparators, Multivibrators, Square and Triangular Waveform Generators, Clippers,
Clampers, Peak Detector, S/H circuit.
UNIT – III
FILTERs, TIMERs & PLLs
Filters:Introduction, Butterworth Filters- First and Second Order Active Filters- LPF, HPF, BPF, BRF.
Introduction to 555 Timer, Functional Block, 555 timers as Monostable and Astable Multivibrators and
Applications, Schmitt Trigger. Voltage Controlled Oscillator (IC 566), Phase Locked Loop.
Applications: Design of visitors counter using 555 timer.
UNIT – IV
OSCILLATORS, D/A AND A/D CONVERTERS, IC REGULATORS
115
Oscillators: Introduction, Design and Analysis of Wein Bridge, RC Phase shift Oscillators using op-amp.
D/A Converters: Introduction, Characteristic Parameters, R-2R Ladder, Weighted Resistor, Inverter R-2R
type D/A Converter, A/D Converters: Introduction, Characteristic Parameters, Counter Type, Dual Slope,
Successive Approximation and Flash types A/D Converters, IC REGULATORS: Three terminal voltage
regulators 7805, 7809, 7912, IC 723.
UNIT – V
LOGIC FAMILIES
Classification of IC Logic Families, Multi emitter transistor logic. Standard TTL NAND & NOR Gate-
Analysis & TTL Open Collector Outputs ,Tristate TTL. Unsaturated logic- ECL logic family ,ECL
Inverter/Buffer, ECL NOR/OR logic. Electrical characteristics of logic gates.
UNIT – VI
MOS& CMOS LOGIC FAMILY
NMOS & PMOS logic- Logic gates implementation, Passive pull up & active pull up .CMOS logic
family- Design of logic gates and Boolean functions. CMOS Open Drain and Tristate Outputs.
Comparison of Various Logic Families. IC interfacing, TTL driving CMOS & CMOS driving TTL.
Applications: Design of 4x1 MUX using CMOS

Text Books
1. D. Roy Chowdhary, Linear Integrated Circuits , New Age Publications (P) Ltd, 2nd Edition,
2003.
2. Ramakanth A. Gayakwad, Op-Amps & Linear ICs, PHI,1987.
3. John F. Wakerly, Digital Design Principles & Practices, PHI/ Pearson Education Asia, 3rd Ed.,
2005.
References
1. Sergio Franco, Design with Operational Amplifiers & Analog Integrated Circuits, McGraw Hill,
1988.
2. R.F. Coughlin & Fredrick Driscoll, Operational Amplifiers & Linear Integrated Circuits, PHI,
6th Edition.
3. K. Lal Kishore, Linear Integrated Circuit Application, Pearson Educations,2005.
4. Millman, Micro Electronics, McGraw Hill,1988.
5. C.G. Clayton, Operational Amplifiers, Butterworth & Company Publ. Ltd. Elsevier,1971.
116
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
M M H M H M

III - I 7CC09 Digital Communications 3 - - 3
Prerequisites: PTSP, SS, AC

Course Objectives:
 To provide both the theory and practice of digital communication including signal design,
modulation methods, demodulation methods and their performance evaluation.
 To make the learners understand concept and applications of various source coding to maximize
the channel capacity and error control coding techniques for providing reliable
communications.
CO Demonstrate the principle of converting analog signal to digital by using PCM, DM,ADM
1 systems.
CO Explore baseband transmission and optimal reception of digital signals using different filters
2 and M-ary Error Probabilities.
CO Design and compare ASK,PSK,FSK,DPSK,QPSK modulators and demodulators .
3
CO Demonstrate the concepts of information theory , source coding techniques ,channel capacity
4 and can find channel capacity and coding efficiency.
CO Demonstrate encoding and decoding techniques of different channel coding techniques like
5 ,block codes, cyclic codes, convolutional codes.
CO Explore the knowledge on different types of spread sprectrum modulation
6 techniques,DSSS,FHSS,CDMA and PN sequence.and OFDM

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Syllabus Content
Unit-I:
ELEMENTS OF DIGITAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
Model of Digital Communication Systems, Advantages of Digital Communication Systems, Digital
Representation of Analog signal.
117
PULSE CODE MODULATION: PCM Generation and Reconstruction, Quantization Noise, Non-
uniform Quantization and Companding, DPCM, DM, Noise in DM, ADM.
Applications: Design of E-1 and T-1 carrier systems
Unit-II:
BASE BAND DIGITAL TRANSMISSION
Digital Signals and Systems, Digital PAM Signals, Transmission limitations, Eye Diagram, Power
Spectra of Digital PAM signals, Spectral Shaping by Precoding, Noise and Errors, Binary Error
Probabilities, Regenerative Repeaters, Optimum receiver, Matched Filtering.
Unit-III:
DIGITAL MODULATION TECHNIQUES
Introduction, Gram Schmidt Orthogonalization, BASK, ASK Modulator, Non-coherent and Coherent
ASK Detector, BFSK, Bandwidth and Frequency spectrum of FSK, FSK Modulator, Non-coherent and
Coherent FSK Detector, FSK Detection using PLL, BPSK, Coherent PSK Detection, QPSK, DPSK,
Definition of BER, Calculation of error probability of BASK, BPSK, BFSK, QPSK, Comparison of
Digital modulation systems, MSK.
Applications: Design of MODEM for voice transmission
Unit-IV:
INFORMATION THEORY
Information and entropy, Mutual information, Information rate.
SOURCE CODING: Introduction, Advantages, Shannon’s theorem for Channel capacity, Huffman
code, Shannon-Fano coding, bandwidth –S/N trade off.
Unit-V:
CHANNEL CODING
Linear Block Codes, Error detection and correction capabilities of Linear Block Codes, Hamming Code,
Cyclic Codes: Encoding, syndrome calculation, Decoding, Convolution Codes: Encoding using State,
tree and trellis diagrams, Decoding using Viterbi algorithm.
UNIT VI:
SPREAD SPECTRUM MODULATION
Use of Spread Spectrum, Spread spectrum techniques: DSSS and FHSS, PN-sequences: Generation and
Characteristics, CDMA.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. B. P. Lathi, Modern Analog and Digital Communication, 3rd Ed., Oxford University Press
2. K. Sam Shanmugham, Digital and Analog Communication Systems, John Wiley & Sons
3. Simon Haykin, Digital communications -, John Wiley, 2005
4. H. Taub and D. Schilling, Principles of Communication Systems –, TMH, 2003
5. A. Bruce Carlson, & Paul B. Crilly, “Communication Systems – An Introduction to Signals & Noise
in Electrical Communication”, McGraw-Hill International Edition, 5th Edition, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. John Proakis, Digital Communications –, TMH, 1983.
2. Singh & Sapre, Communication Systems Analog & Digital –, TMH, 2004.
3. Sklar: Digital Communication, 2nd Ed., Pearson Education
4. “Digital Communications”, J.S Chitode, Technical publication, Pune.
118

III - I 7DC05 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 3 - - 3
a b c d e f G h i j k l M
x x x x x X x X
Course objectives: To develop skills for programming and interfacing using 8086 Microprocessor and
8051 Microcontroller..
Course outcomes:
1. Understand Architecture of 8086 and analyzing in single mode and in multi processor mode.
2. Understand instructions of 8086 and to write Assembly Language Programs
3. Interface I/0 devices with 8086
4. Understand Architecture of 8051 microcontroller.
5. Understand instructions of 8051 and to Interface I/0 devices with 8051
6. Understand the need advanced processors.
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
CO1 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO2 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO3 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO4 2 2 2 3 2 3
CO5 2 3 2 3 2 2 3
CO6 2 3 2 2 2 2 3
UNIT - I
Architecture of 8086 Microprocessor: Memory segmentation, BIU and E.U General purpose registers.
8086 flag register and function of 8086 Flags. Pin diagram of 8086-Minimum mode and maximum mode
of operation. Timing Diagram.
UNIT – II
Instruction set of 8086: Addressing modes of 8086. Assembly directives. Simple programs, procedures,
and macros. Assembly language programs involving logical, Branch & Call instructions, sorting,
evaluation of arithmetic expressions, string manipulation. Introduction to DOS and BIOS interrupts.
Applications: Design of an 8-bit Calculator
119
UNIT - III
Interfacing with 8086: Interfacing with RAMs, ROMs along with the explanation of timing diagrams.
8255 PPI – various modes of operation. Interfacing with key boards, ADCs, and DACs Stepper Motor
.Interrupt structure of 8086. Vector interrupt table. Interrupt service routines. 8259 PIC Architecture and
interfacing cascading of interrupt controller and its importance.
Applications: Interfacing of a Temperature sensor with 8086
UNIT - IV
The 8051 Architecture: Architecture of 8051 Micro controller, Memory Organization. Special Function
Registers. Input/Output Ports and Circuits, External Memory, Counter and Timers, Serial data
Input/Output, Interrupts.
UNIT – V
Instruction set of 8051: Programming the 8051, Data Transfer and Logical Instructions. Arithmetic
Operations, Decimal Arithmetic. Jump and Call Instructions, Simple programs. Programs based on SFRs
on Timers ,Interrupts.
Applications of 8051: Interfacing 7 segment LEDs, LCDs, Interfacing with ADCs. Interfacing with
DACs.
UNIT – VI
Introduction to ARM Processors: Harvard and Von Neumann architectures, CISC & RISC
Architecture CPU Registers, CPU Operating Modes, The ARM 7 TDMI architecture-ARM organization
and implementation-The ARM instruction set-The Thumb instruction set-Basic ARM assembly language
programs
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Advanced microprocessor & Peripherals - A.K.Ray & K.M.Bhurchandi, TMH, 2000.
2. Microprocessors and interfacing – Douglas V. Hall, TMH, 2 nd Edition, 1999.
3. 8051 Microcontroller–Kenneth J. Ayala, Penram International/ Thomson, 3 rd Edition, 2005.
4. The 8051 Microcontroller And Embedded Systems Using Assembly And C – Mazidi, Pearson
Education India, 2nd edition, 2008. Jane W. S Liu, “ Real Time Systems” Pearson Higher
Education ,3rd Edition, 2000.
5. Steve Furber, ARM System on-chip Architecture, Addison Wesley
REFERENCES :
6. Micro computer systems, The 8086/8088 Family Architecture, Programming and Design – Y.Liu and
G.A. Gibson, PHI, 2nd Edition.
7. 8051 Micro Controllers and Embedded Systems – Dr. Rajiv Kapadia, Jaico Publishers.
120

III - I 7AC07 Control Systems 3 - - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M L
H: High M: Medium L: Low
Course Objective: Students learn about fundamental concepts of time and frequency domain analysis of
a given system.
Course Outcomes: Students
1. Learn basic concepts of control systems.
2. Study about time response analysis.
3. Learn basic concepts of stability and root locus method.
4. Study about frequency response analysis.
5. Learn basic concepts stability analysis in frequency domain.
6. Learn fundamentals of state space analysis.
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION:
Concepts of Control Systems- Open Loop and closed loop control systems and their differences-
Classification of control systems, Feed-Back Characteristics, Effects of feedback. Mathematical models –
Differential equations, Impulse Response and transfer functions – Translational and Rotational
mechanical systems
Transfer function representation:
Transfer Function of Synchro transmitter and Receiver, Block diagram representation of systems
considering electrical systems as examples -Block diagram algebra – Representation by Signal flow
graph - Reduction using Mason’s gain formula.
UNIT-II TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS:
Standard test signals - Time response of first order systems – Characteristic Equation of Feedback control
systems, Transient response of second order systems - Time domain specifications – Steady state
response - Steady state errors and error constants – Effects of proportional derivative, proportional
integral systems, PID controllers.
UNIT – III STABILITY ANALYSIS IN S-DOMAIN:
The concept of stability – Routh’s stability criterion – qualitative stability and conditional stability –
limitations of Routh’s stability.
Root Locus Technique: The root locus concept - construction of root loci-effects of adding poles and
zeros to G(s)H(s) on the root loci.
UNIT – IV FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS:
Introduction, Frequency domain specifications-Bode diagrams-Determination of Frequency domain
specifications and transfer function from the Bode Diagram-Phase margin and Gain margin-Stability
Analysis from Bode Plots.
UNIT – V STABILITY ANALYSIS IN FREQUENCY DOMAIN:
Polar Plots-Nyquist Plots-Stability Analysis.
CLASSICAL CONTROL DESIGN TECHNIQUES: Compensation techniques – Lag, Lead, Lead-
Lag Controllers design in frequency Domain.
UNIT – VI STATE SPACE ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS:
Concepts of state, state variables and state model, derivation of state models from block diagrams,
Diagonalization- Solving the Time invariant state Equations- State Transition Matrix and its Properties.
121
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Automatic Control Systems 8th edition –B. C. Kuo 2003– John wiley and sons.
2. Control Systems Engineering – I. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, New Age International (P) Limited,
Publishers, 2nd edition.
REFERENCES:
1. Modern Control Engineering – Katsuhiko Ogata – Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 3 rd edition,
1998.
2. Control Systems – N.K. Sinha, New Age International (P) Limited Publishers, 3 rd Edition, 1998.
3. Control Systems Engg. – NISE 3rd Edition – John wiley.
4. “Modeling & Control of Dynamic Systems” – Narciso F. Macia George J. Thaler, Thomson
Publishers.
122
x x
L T P/D C
3 0 0 3
7ZC05 BANKING OPERATIONS, INSURANCE AND RISK MANAGEMENT
Course Objectives: To make the students understand the concepts and principles of Indian Banking
Business, Insurance Business and Capital market business products and services, which facilitate them to
understand the nature of market
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO BANKING BUSINESS: Introduction to financial system - History of banking
business in India, Structure of Indian banking system: Types of accounts, advances and deposits in a
bank. KYC norms, New Dimensions and products- E-Banking: Mobile-Banking, Net Banking, Digital
Banking, Negotiable Instruments: Cheque system.
UNIT II
BANKING SYSTEMS AND ITS REGULATION: Banking Systems: Branch Banking, Unit Banking,
Correspondent Banking, Group Banking, Deposit Banking, Mixed Banking and Investment Banking -
Banking Sector Reforms with special reference to Prudential Norms, Capital Adequacy Norms,
Classification of Assets and NPA’s, Functions of RBI, Role of RBI in regulating Indian Banking.
UNIT III
INTRODUCTION TO INSURANCE: Introduction to insurance, Need and importance of Insurance,
principles of Insurance, characteristics of insurance contract, branches of insurance and types of
insurance: Life insurance and its products, General Insurance and its variants.
UNIT IV
INSURANCE BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT: Procedure for issuing an insurance policy –Nomination -
Surrender Value - Policy Loans – Assignment - Revivals and Claim Settlement; Insurance as a tax
mitigation tool, Role of IRDA in Insurance Regulation.
UNIT V
RISK MANAGEMENT: Introduction to Risk Management – meaning, classification of risks –
Systematic Risk and Unsystematic Risk, Risk management process – Stages, Risk Management
Approaches and Techniques.
UNIT VI
DERIVATIVES AS A RISK MANAGEMENT TOOL: Introduction to Financial Derivatives,
Advantages of Derivatives - types of Derivative Contracts - Forwards, Futures, Options and Swaps -
Differences among Forwards, Futures and Option Contracts.
ESSENTIAL READINGS:
 Varshney, P.N., Banking Law and Practice, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi.
 General Principles of Insurance Harding and Evantly
123
 Mark S. Dorfman: Risk Management and Insurance, Pearson, 2009.
SUGGESTED READINGS:
 Scott E. Harringam Gregory R. Nichanus: Risk Management & Insurance, TMH, 2009.
 Geroge E. Rejda: Principles of risk Management & Insurance, 9/e, pearson Education. 2009.
 G. Koteshwar: Risk Management Insurance and Derivatives, Himalaya, 2008.
 Gulati: Principles of Insurance Management, Excel, 2009.
 James S Trieschmann, Robert E. Hoyt & David N. Sommer: Risk Mgt. & Insurance, Cengage,
2009.
 Dorfman: Introduction to Risk Management and Insurance, 8/e, Pearson, 2009.
 P.K. Gupta: Insurance and Risk Management, Himalaya, 2009.
 Vivek & P.N. Asthana: Financial Risk Management, Himalaya, 2009.
 Jyotsna Sethi & Nishwan Bhatia : Elements of Banking and Insurance, 2/e,PHI, 2012.
124
JAVA PROGRAMMING (7EC65)
Course Objective:
Understand the concepts of Object oriented programming of Java. Write the programs and execute using
OOP principles such as garbage collection, overloading methods, constructors, recursion, string
handling, StringTokenizer, inheritance and its types, packages, multithreading and threads.
Course Outcomes:
1. Understand the concept of OOP as well as the purpose and usage of principles of inheritance,
Identify classes, objects, members of a class and the relationships among them needed for a speciﬁc
problem.
2. Understand and implement concepts of polymorphism, encapsulation and method overloading.
3. Create Java application programs using sound OOP practices (e.g., interfaces and APIs) and proper
program structuring (e.g., by using access control identiﬁers, automatic documentation through
comments)
4. Students understand and implement error exception handling and multi-threading.
5. Understand the advantages of GUI over CUI and write GUI programs
6. Students learn to create GUI and write programs for event-handling using various user interface
components on applets.
UNIT-I
History of Java, Java buzzwords, datatypes, variables, simple java program,scope and life time of
variables,operators, expressions, control statements, type conversion and costing, arrays,, classes and
objects – concepts of classes, objects, constructors, methods, access control, this keyword, overloading
methods and constructors, string handling, StringTokenizer.
UNIT-II
Inheritance –Definition ,single inheritance , benefits of inheritance, Member access rules, super class,
polymorphism- method overriding, Dynamic method dispatch, using final with inheritance, abstract
class, Base class object.
UNIT-III
Interfaces : definition, variables and methods in interfaces , differences between classes and interfaces,
usage of implements and extends keyword, uses of interfaces.
Packages: Definition, types of packages, Creating and importing a user defined package.
Applications using interface
Applications using packages
UNIT-IV
Exception handling -exception definition, benefits of exception handling, exception hierarchy, usage of
try, catch, throw, throws and finally, built in exceptions, creating user defined exceptions.
Multi-Threading:-Thread definition, types of multitasking, uses of multitasking, thread life cycle,
creating threads using Thread class and Runnable interface, synchronizing threads, daemon thread.
Applications of multithreading.
UNIT-V
125
Advantages of GUI over CUI ,The AWT class hierarchy, Component, Frame, user interface components-
labels, button, scrollbars, text components, check box, check box groups, choices, lists panels –
scrollpane, menubar, graphics, layout, managers –boarder, grid, flow and card layouts.
Applications: developing calculator, developing feedback form, developing biodata.
UNIT-VI
Event handling: Delegation event model, closing a Frame, mouse and keyboard events, Adapter classes.
Applets – Concepts of Applets, differences between applets and applications, life cycle of an applet,
types of applets, creating applets, passing parameters to applets.
Applications: Developing of simple advertisements.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Java; the complete reference, 6th editon, Herbert schildt, TMH.
2. Introduction to Java programming 6th edition, Y. Daniel Liang, pearson education.
REFERENCES
1. Core Java 2, Vol 1, Fundamentals, Cay.S.Horstmann and Gary Cornell, seventh Edition, Pearson
Education.
2. Core Java 2, Vol 2, Advanced Features, Cay.S.Horstmann and Gary Cornell,Seventh Edition, Pearson
Education
126
x x x
L T P/D C
3 0 0 3
7ZC22 BASICS OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP

Course Objective: The objective of the course is to make students understand the nature of
Entrepreneurship, and its importance to business to the engineering students, which will allow them to
get the required intuition and interest in starting their own start-up’s
Course Outcomes:
1. The students’ will acquire basic knowledge on Skills of Entrepreneurship.
2. The students’ will understand the techniques of selecting the customers through the process of
customer segmentation and Targeting
3. Business Models and their validity are understood by the students’.
4. The basic cost structure, Revenue Streams and the pricing strategies are understood by the
students’.
5. The students’ will acquire knowledge about the project management and its techniques.
6. The students’ get exposure on marketing strategies and business regulations for the Start up.
Unit – I: Introduction to Entrepreneurship & Self Discovery: - Define Entrepreneurship,
Entrepreneurship as a Career option, Find your Flow, Stock of Your Means, Characteristics, Qualities
and Skills of Entrepreneurship, Effectuation, Principles of Effectuation, Life as an Entrepreneur, Stories
of Successful Entrepreneurs.
Unit – II: Opportunity & Customer Analysis: - Identify your Entrepreneurial Style, Methods of
finding and understanding Customer Problems, Run Problem Interview, Process of Design Thinking,
Identify Potential Problems worth Solving, Customer Segmentation, Niche Marketing and Targeting,
Craft your Values Proportions, Customer-driven Innovation.
Unit – III: Business Model & Validation: - Introduction to Business Models, Lean approach to
Business Model Canvas, Blue and Red Ocean Strategies, the Problem-Solution Fit, Build your Solution
Demo, Solution Interview Method, Identify Minimum Viable Product (MVP), Product-Market fit test.
Unit – IV: Economics & Financial Analysis: - Revenue Analysis, Identify different Revenue Streams
and Costs Analysis – Startup Cost, Fixed Cost and Variable Cost, Break Even Analysis, Profit Analysis,
Introduction to Pricing, different Pricing Strategies, Sources of Finance, Bootstrapping and Initial
Financing, Practice pitching to Investors and Corporate.
Unit – V: Team Building & Project Management: - Leadership Styles, Shared Leadership Model,
Team Building in Venture, Roles and Responsibilities of team in venture, Explore collaboration tools and
techniques, Brainstorming, Introduction to Project Management, Project Life Cycle, Create a Project
Plan.
Unit – VI: Marketing & Business Regulations: - Positioning, Positioning Strategies, Branding,
Branding Strategies, Selecting and Measuring Channels , Customer Acquisition, Selling Process, Selling
Skills, Sales Plans. Business regulations – List of Required Registrations, Compliance Check List,
Business Structures and Legal Entities.
ESSENTIAL READINGS:
 Robert D Hisrich, Michael P Peters, Dean A Shepherd, Entrepreneurship, Sixth Edition, New
Delhi, 2006.
127
Thomas W. Zimmerer, Norman M. Scarborough, Essentials of Entrepreneurship And Small

Business Management, Fourth Edition, Pearson, New Delhi, 2006
 Alfred E. Osborne, Entrepreneur’s Toolkit, Harvard Business Essentials, HBS Press, USA,
2005.
SUGGESTED READINGS:
 Madhurima Lall, Shikha Sahai, Entrepreneurship, Excel Books, First Edition, New Delhi, 2006.
 S.S. Khanka, Entrepreneurial Development, S. Chand and Company Limited, New Delhi, 2007.
 H. Nandan, Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall of India, First Edition, New Delhi,
2007.
· S.R. Bhowmik, M. Bhowmik, Entrepreneurship-A tool for Economic Growth And A
key to Business Success, New Age International Publishers, First Edition, (formerly
Wiley Eastern Limited), New Delhi, 2007.
 https://www.wfglobal.org/
 https://www.learnwise.org/#/IN/en/home/login,
128
L T P/D C
3 0 0 3
7ZC25 INDIAN POLITY & ECONOMY
Course Objectives:
To provide basic knowledge relating to the Indian Polity and Economy, thus making the students
appreciate the current aspects related to both polity and economy.
Course outcomes:
CO1: Gain knowledge relating to the Indian Constitution and the Preamble to the Constitution.
CO2: Gain knowledge relating to the fundamental rights and duties of the Indian citizens and the
directive principles of state policy.
CO3: Students will learn about the federal structure and judiciary of India.
CO4: Gain knowledge relating to Economics, various sectorial growth and National Income.
CO5: Students will learn about Indian Industrial policy and benefits of LPG to India
CO6: Comprehend knowledge relating to Fiscal policy & Taxation system in India
Unit I INTRODUCTION TO SALIENT FEATURES OF CONSTITUTION: Significance of the

Constitution, Distinction between Written and Unwritten Constitution, Composition of the Constituent
Assembly and the role and objectives of the Drafting Committee, Main features and the nature of the
Constitution of India. Preamble to the Constitution and its relevance; Basic principles of Preamble and
their reflection in the constitutional provisions.
Unit II FUNDAMENTAL RIGHTS, DUTIES AND DIRECTIVE PRINCIPLES OF STATE

POLICY: Fundamental Rights and Duties of Citizens- Importance of Rights and Duties, Dignity of an
individual, Safeguards against deprivation of life and personal liberty; Writs for the protection of
Fundamental Rights; Meaning of Directive Principles of State Policy, Classification of the Directive
Principles, Role of Directive Principles, Role of Directive Principles in the establishment of economic
and social democracy.
Unit III GOVERNMENT AND JUDICIARY: Legislative, financial and judicial powers of the
President; Appointment of Prime Minister and constitution of Council of Ministers; Powers and functions
of Prime Minister; Individual and collective responsibility; Powers and discretionary powers of the
Governor; Appointment of the Chief Minister, Formation of the Council of Ministers; Powers and
jurisdiction of the Supreme Court and High Courts of India.
Unit IV INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS & NATIONAL INCOME: Definition, Economics and

economy, back ground of economy, sectors of the economy, types of economy, growth of economy,
primary moving force of Economic growth in India, mixed economy, Introduction to National Income &
related aggregates : GNP, NNP,GDP&NDP.
Unit V INDUSTRIAL POLICY & LIBERALIZATION OF ECONOMY: Industrial policy in India,
its objectives, Review of Industrial policies up to 1986, Industrial policy 1991 - causes of its
implementation, benefits of Liberalization, privatization & Globalization to the Indian economy.
Unit VI FISCAL POLICY & TAXATION SYSTEM: Fiscal policy- Definition, objectives,
importance, setbacks, recent fiscal policy of India, Reforms to strengthen the fiscal policy in India.
Taxation system in India, methods of taxation, a good tax system, VAT, GST, Reforms in taxation.
129
ESSENTIAL READINGS:
 Indian Polity - M. Laxmikanth, 5th Edition, McGraw Hill Education, Chennai
 Environment And Ecology A Complete Guide for Civil Services Preliminary and Main
Examinations – R. Rajgopalan, 2017, Oakbridge Publishing Pvt. Limited.
 Indian Economy, Datt & Mahajan, 70th Edition, Sultan Chand publishers.
 Latest Budget document by Ministry of Finance
SUGGESTED READINGS:
 Introduction to Constitution of India – Dr. Durga Das Basu, 22nd Edition, 2015, LexisNexis
 Our Constitution – Subhash C Kashyap, 5th Edition, 2015, National Book Trust, India
 Indian Economy, Misra & Puri, 33rd Edition, Himalaya publishing house
130
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H H M M M M M

Year/Sem Sub. Code Subject Name (Open Elective-I) L T P/D C
III - I 7CC36 Fundamentals Of Signal Processing 3 - - 3
Course Objectives :
To study the concepts of signals and systems their characterization in the Time as well as frequency
domains
COURSE OUTCOMES:
i. Understand the concepts of signals, comparison of signals, orthogonal signal space and the
concepts of impulse, step.
ii. Apply the orthogonality properties to understand the Fourier methods of signal analysis- Fourier
series and Fourier Transforms.
iii. Understand the concepts of systems, their characterization in the Time as well as Transformed
domains.
iv. Understand and apply the mathematical tools, such as Convolution, Correlation and the Laplace
transform, to analyze signals and systems.
v. Determine the sampling frequency for any low pass signals applying the sampling theorem.
vi. Distinguish between continuous and Discrete time signals and systems. Apply the concepts of Z-
Transforms in the analysis of DT signals and systems.
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT I
Signals: Signals. Classification of Signals. Even, Odd, Periodic. Non-periodic. Energy and Power
Signals. Exponential and Sinusoidal Signals. Concepts of Impulse Function. Unit Step Function.
Signal Analysis - Analogy between Vectors and Signals. Orthogonal Signal Space. Signal
Approximation using Orthogonal Functions. Mean Square Error. Closed or Complete Set of Orthogonal
Functions. Orthogonality in Complex Functions.
UNIT-II
Fourier Representation of Continuous Time Signals
Periodic Signals- Fourier Series, Dirichlet’s Conditions, Trigonometric and Exponential Fourier series.
Non- Periodic Signals - Fourier Transforms. Fourier Transform of Arbitrary Signal. Standard Signals.
Fourier Transform of Periodic Signals. Properties of Fourier Transforms. Fourier Transforms Involving
131
Impulse and Signum Function Energy Density Spectrum, Parseval’s Theorem. Introduction to Hilbert
Transform.
UNIT-III
Signal Transmission through Linear Systems
Systems, Classification of Systems, Impulse Response (IR) of a Linear System, Linear Time Invariant
(LTI) System, Linear Time Variant (LTV) System, Transfer Function of a LTI System, Distortion Less
Transmission Through a System, Signal Bandwidth, System Bandwidth. Ideal LPF, HPF BPF and BSF
Characteristics.
UNIT-IV
Convolution and Correlation of Signals
Concept of Convolution in Time Domain and Frequency Domain, Graphical Representation of
Convolution, Convolution Properties, Cross Correlation and Auto Correlation of Functions, Properties of
Correlation Function, Relation between Convolution and Correlation.
Laplace Transforms - Review of Laplace Transforms. Partial Fraction Expansion. Inverse Laplace
Transform,Concept of Region of Convergence (ROC) for Laplace Transforms. Constraints on ROC for
Various Classes of Signals. Properties of LT
UNIT-V
Sampling
Sampling Theorem, Graphical and Analytical Proof for Band Limited Signals. Impulse (Ideal) Sampling,
Natural (Chopped) Sampling and Flat Top(S&H) Sampling, Reconstruction of Signal from its Samples,
Effect of Under Sampling- Aliasing.
UNIT-VI
Z–Transforms
Fundamental Difference between Continuous and Discrete Time Signals, Discrete Time Signal
Representation, Periodicity of Discrete Time Signal. Concept of Z- Transform of a Sequence. Distinction
Between Laplace, Fourier and Z Transforms, Concept of Region of Convergence (ROC) for Z-
Transform. Constraints on ROC for Various Classes of Signals. Inverse Z-Transform. Properties of Z-
Transforms.
Text Books
1. Signals, Systems and Communications- B. P. Lathi, BSP.
2. Signal processing and Linear Syustems - B. P. Lathi, BSP.
3. Signals and Systems – A. Anand Kumar
References
1. Signals & Systems – Simon Haykin and Van Veen,Wiley, 2nd Edition.
2. A.V. Oppenheim, A.S. Willsky and S.H. Nawab, PHI, 2ndEdn.
3. Linear Systems and Signal Processing - B. P. Lathi, Oxford University Publications.
132
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M M M M M
Syllabus for B.Tech(ME)

Fundamentals of digital circuits & Microprocessors
(Elective for Mechanical Engineering)
Code: 7CC37
L T P/D C
3 - - 3
Course objectives: To develop the skills for understanding the design of digital circuits, learn
programming skills for 8086 Microprocessor and interfacing peripherals to it.
Course outcomes:
7. To understand number systems and apply the rules of Boolean algebra to simplify Boolean
expressions using theorems and K-maps.
8. To design combinational circuits such as full adders, multiplexers, decoders, encoders. Code
converters etc.
9. To design basic memory units (latches and flip-flops) and sequential circuits such as counters
and registers
10. To understand Architecture of 8086 and analyzing in single mode and in multi processor mode.
11. To understand instructions of 8086 and to write Assembly Language Programs
12. To interface I/0 devices with 8086.

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT – I
Number System and Boolean Algebra: Binary, decimal, octal, hexa decimal, weighted and un-weighted
codes. Axiomatic definition of Boolean algebra, Binary operators, postulates of and theorems. Boolean
addition, subtraction, 1’s complement, 2’s complement. Switching functions, Canonical forms and
Standard forms, Simplification of switching functions using theorems. K-map representation,
simplification of logic functions using K-map.
UNIT - II
Combinational Logic Design: Single output and multiple output combinational logic circuit design,
Binary adders/subtractors, Encoder, Decoder, Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, MUX realization of switching
functions, Parity bit generator, Code-converters.
133
UNIT - III
Sequential circuits: Classification of sequential circuits, the clocked SR flip flop, J- K, T and D-types flip
flops, triggering mechanism of flip-flops, flip-flop conversion. Applications of flip-flops: Ripple
(Asynchronous) counters, synchronous counters, shift registers, ring counter.
UNIT - IV
Architecture of 8086 Microprocessor: Memory segmentation, BIU and E.U General Purpose registers,
8086 flag register and function of 8086 Flags, Pin diagram of 8086-Minimum mode and maximum mode
of operation, Timing diagram.
UNIT – V
Instruction set of 8086: Addressing modes of 8086, Assembly directives, Simple programs, procedures,
and macros. Assembly language programs: involving logical, Branch & Call instructions, sorting,
evaluation of arithmetic expressions, string manipulations.
UNIT - VI
Interfacing with 8086: Interfacing with RAMs, ROMs, 8255 PPI – various modes of operation, Interfacing
with key boards, ADCs and DACs Stepper Motor; Interrupt structure of 8086.
Text Books:
2. Morris Mano-,Digital design –PHI, 2nd Edition.
3. ZviKohavi and Niraj K Jha -Switching & Finite Automata theory – Cambridge, 3rd Edition.
4. Microprocessors and interfacing – Douglas V. Hall, TMH, 2 nd Edition, 1999.
5. Advanced microprocessor & Peripherals - A.K.Ray & K.M.Bhurchandi, TMH, 2000.
References:
6.Fletcher -An Engineering Approach to Digital Design – PHI.
7.Fundamentals of Logic Design, Roth, Kenny, Seventh Edition, Cengage Learning
8.R.P.Jain-Switching Theory and Logic Design- TMH Edition,2003.
9.CVS Rao -Switching Theory and Logic Design –Pearson Education, 2005
10. Micro computer systems, The 8086/8088 Family Architecture, Programming and Design – Y.Liu
and G.A. Gibson, PHI, 2nd Edition.
134
III Year B.Tech – I Sem.

Code: 7AC47 POWER ELECTRONICS AND CONVERTORS
(Open Elective – I)
L T P C
3 0 - 3
UNIT – I - MODERN POWER SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES:
Modern power semiconductor devices- MOS turn off Thyristor (MTO)-Emitter Turn off Thyristor (ETO)
– Integrated Gate- Commutated Thyristor (IGCT) – MOS – controlled Thyristors (MCTs) – Static
Induction Circuit – comparison of their features.
UNIT – II - PHASE CONTROLLED RECTIFIERS:

Principle of phase controlled converter operation, single phase full converters, dual converters, three
phase full and semi converters, reactive power, power factor improvements – extinction angle control,
symmetrical angle control and PWM control.
UNIT – III - DC-DC CONVERTERS:

Study of class – A, B, C, and D choppers, non – isolated DC-DC converters, buck boost, buck-boost
converters under continuous and discontinuous conduction operation.
UNIT – IV – ISOLATED DC-DC CONVERTERS:

Isolated DC-DC converters forward, fly-back, push-pull, half-bridge and full –bridge converters
Relationship between I / P and O/P voltages. Expression for filter inductor and capacitors.
UNIT – V - INVERTERS:
Single phase and three – phase inverters, 1200 and 1800 modes of operation, PWM techniques: single,
multiple and sinusoidal PWM techniques, selective harmonic elimination, space vector modulation,
current source inverter, multi- Current source inverter, techniques for reduction of harmonics.
UNIT –VI – MULTILEVEL INVERTERS:

Diode clamped multi level inverters, capacitors clamped multilevel inverters, cascaded H bridge inverter,
SPWM, SVPWM and other modulation techniques, applications of multilevel inverters, techniques for
reduction for harmonics.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Power Electronics – Circuits, Devices & Applications: M.H.Rashid, PHI
2. Power Electronics: Converters, Applications: Ned Mohan, T.M. Undeland, William P.Robbins, John
Wiley & Sons.
REFERENCES:
1. Switch Mode Power Supply Handbook: Keith H.Billing, MC Graw Hill International Edition 1996.
2. Switching Power supply Design: Abrahan L.Pressman, Mc.Graw Hill International Second Edition,
1996.
135
SMART MATERIALS
CODE: 7BC51
Course Objectives:
To provide the knowledge on principles of smart materials, their functions and applications.
Course Outcomes:
After studying this course the student will be able to:
1 Apply the knowledge for developing/producing sensors, devices based on the assimilated know-
how of composites, ceramics, electro-magnetic materials, shape memory alloys, and their
properties.
2 Develop/process new sensing and actuating smart devices based on the assimilated knowledge on
the principles of phase transformations.
3 Evaluate shape memory materials, electro rheological fluids and develop newer applications.
4 Comprehend the principles of operation of optical fibers, actuators, and methods of analyses
employed in smart materials.
5 To apply the principles for developing smart skins for aerospace and transportation vehicles.
6 To develop or process sensors and actuators for MEMS using shape memory alloys, PZT
actuators.
UNIT - I
Introduction: Characteristics of composites and ceramics materials, Dynamics and controls, concepts,
Electro-magnetic materials and shape memory alloys-processing and characteristics
UNIT - II
Sensing And Actuation: Principles of electromagnetic, acoustics, chemical and mechanical sensing and
actuation, Types of sensors and their applications, their compatibility conventional and advanced
materials, signal processing, principles and characterization.
UNIT - III
Control Design: Design of shape memory alloys, Types of MR fluids, Characteristics and application,
principles of MR fluid value designs, Magnetic circuit design, MR Dampers, Design issues.
UNIT - IV
Optics And Electromagnetic: Principles of optical fiber technology, characteristics of active and
adaptive optical system and components, design and manufacturing principles.
UNIT - V
Structures: Principles of drag and turbulence control through smart skins, applications in environment
such as aerospace and transportation vehicles, manufacturing, repair and maintainability aspects.
Controls: Principles of structural acoustic control, distributed, analog and digital feed back controls,
Dimensional implications for structural control.
UNIT - VI
Principles Of Vibration And Modal Analysis: PZT Actuators, MEMS, Magnetic shape Memory
Alloys, Characteristics and Applications.
136
Information Processing: Neural Network, Data Processing, Data Visualisation and Reliability –
Principles and Application domains.
06 Hours
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Analysis and Design’, A. V. Srinivasan, ‘Smart Structures –Cambridge Universities Press, New York,
2001, (ISBN :
0521650267)
2. ‘Smart Materials and Structures’, M V Gandhi and B S Thompson Chapmen & Hall, London, 1992
(ISBN : 0412370107)
133
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. ‘Smart Materials and Structures’, Banks HT, RC Smith, Y Wang,Massow S A, Paris 1996
2. G P Gibss’Adaptive Structres’, Clark R L, W R Saunolers, JhonWiles and Sons, New York, 1998
3. An introduction for scientists and Engineers’, Esic Udd, OpticSensors : Jhon Wiley & Sons, New
York, 1991 (ISBN :0471830070)
137
III-I 7H518 QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS 1 1 - 2

Course Outcomes: Students will able to answer

1. The questions given on testing divisibility, prime number and questions of HCF and LCM .
2. The questions given on averages, percentage and profit and loss.
3. The questions given on ratio and proportion.
4. The questions given on simple and compound interest.
5. The questions given on time and work, time and distance.
6. The questions given on mensuration and data sufficiency.
Syllabus
Unit I
Number System: Test for Divisibility, Test of prime number, Division and Remainder – HCF and LCM
of Numbers - Fractions.
Unit II
Average: Average of different groups, Replacement of some of the items - Percentage - Profit and Loss.
Unit III
Ratio and Proportion: Properties of Ratio, Comparison of Ratios, Useful Simple Results on Proportion –
Partnership and Share.
Unit IV
Simple Interest: Effect of change of P, R and T on Simple Interest - Compound Interest: Conversion
Period, Difference between Compound Interest and Simple Interest.
Unit V
Time and Work- Pipes and Cisterns, Time and Distance- Problems on Trains- Boats and Streams,
Allegation or Mixtures.
Unit VI
Mensuration: Area of Plane Figures, Volume and Surface Area of Solid Figures.
Data Interpretation: Tabulation, Bar Graphs, Pie Charts, Line Graphs.
Text Books:
1. Quantitative Aptitude by R.S.Agarwal
2. Quantitative Aptitude by Abhijit Guha
3. Quantitative Aptitude for Competative Examinations, U.Mohan Rao, Scitech Publication.
138

III - I 7DC71 Microprocessors and Micro Controllers Lab - - 4 2
Course Objectives:
The objective of this course is to develop the Assembly language programming skills and real-time
applications of Microprocessor as well as microcontroller.
CO Explore to write the Assembly Language Programs using Arithmetic instructions of 8086
1
CO Explore to write the Assembly Language Programs using String instructions of 8086
2
CO Explore to write the Assembly Language Programs for I/O interface with 8086
3
CO Explore to write the Assembly Language Programs using Arithmetic instructions of 8051
4
CO Explore to write the Assembly Language Programs using Timers and interrupts of 8051
5

a b c d e f g h I j k l m
(PO (PO (PO (PO (PO (PO (PO (PO (PO (PO1 (PO1 (PO1 (PO1
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 0) 0) 2) 3)
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 2 2 3 2 2
CO3 2 3 2
CO4 2 3
CO5 2 3
Over x X x
X x x x
all
Prerequisites: STLD,LDICA
Syllabus Content
Introduction to MASM/TASM, KIEL Assemblers
Familiarization with 8086, 8051 Kits
Cycle - I
8086 ALP using kit and MASM
1. Basic arithmetic and logical operations
2. Code conversion decimal arithmetic programs
3. String manipulation programs
4. Display a message on the screen of a computer using DOS / BIOS interrupts.
Cycle – II
Following peripherals and interfacing experiments to be implemented on 8086 and 8051 kits
1. A/D and D/A interfacing
139
2. Serial interfacing with PC

3. Keyboard and display interfacing
4. Stepper motor controller
Following simple programs may be given as lab assignment for students to executive at home by
using 8086 emulator like EMU86 or MASM.
Write ALP and execute the program to

1. Find square of a number
2. Exchange two numbers
3. Find average of a given series of numbers
4. Add a constant to a series of values in memory & store the result back in memory
5. Find sum of cubes of a given series of numbers
6. Display squares of a given series of numbers in memory
7. Find factorial of a given number
8. Find largest number from a given series of numbers
9. Sort a series of given numbers in ascending order
10. Find whether the given number is even or odd number
11. Find sum of all even no.s from a given series of even and odd numbers
12. Find GCD of two given numbers
13. Find LCM of two given numbers
14. Display Fibonacci series
15. Reverse a String
16. Programs based on DOS/BIOS interrupts
Programs on 8051
1. Arithmatic Operations
2. Timers
3. Interrupts
4. Serial communication
140
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M M M L L
III-I 7CC76 IC APPLICATIONS LAB - - 4 2
Prerequisites: EDC, ECA, STLD.

Course Objectives:

 To Design and analyze the various circuits and systems using IC 741 op-amp.
 To Design and analyze the various circuits and systems using Digital ICs.
 An ability to explore the applications of IC 741 OP-AMP.
 An ability to design Active filters and its applications
 An ability to understand and implement generate square and Triangular waveforms using 555
Timers
 An ability to design D to A converters and its applications

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Syllabus Content
(IC Application Lab)
Design and testing of
1. OP AMP Modes(-ve feed back) – Inverting ,Non inverting, Differential amp, Unity gain.
2. OP AMP Applications – Adders, Subtractor.
3. OP AMP Applications – Comparator Circuits.
4. OP AMP Applications – clipper Circuits.
5. Square wave generator using OP AMP
6. Triangular wave generator using OP AMP
7. Active Filter Applications – LPF, HPF (first order)
8. Oscillators-RC phase shift , wein bridge.
9. IC 555 Timer – Monostable
10. IC 555 Timer -Astable .
11. 4 bit DAC using OP AMP.
12. IC 723 voltage regulator
141
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
M M H M H M
Year/Sem Sub. Subject Name L T P/D C

Code
III-I 7C577 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS LAB - - 4 2
Prerequisites: SS, PTSP, AC, BS Lab
Course Objectives:
 To perform laboratory experiments on various digital modulation techniques and measure the
performance parameters using both Hardware and MatLab.
CO Understand the Practical concepts of converting analog signal to digital signal by using
1 PCM, DM, ADM circuits of Modulator and demodulator.
CO Design and analyze ASK, FSK, PSK, DPSK, QPSK modulators and demodulators. .
2
CO Design and Evaluate the performances of Linear Block code.
3
CO Understand the Practical concepts of Digital modulation techniques DPSK and QPSK.
4
CO Design of modulator and demodulator using MAT Lab Simulation Tool.
5
CO Design and implementation of Compander and Data Scrambler/Descrambler using Matlab.
6

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Part A: LIST OF HARDWARE EXPERIMENTS (Any EIGHT)
1. Sampling Theorem, Time Division Multiplexing – Verification

2. PCM/DPCM
3. Delta Modulation/ Adaptive Delta Modulation.
4. Line Coding Techniques
5. Amplitude Shift Keying
142
6. Frequency Shift Keying

7. Phase Shift Keying
8. Differential Phase Shift Keying
9. Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
Part B: List of experiments to be simulated using MATLAB (Any FOUR)

1. µ-LAW Companding
2. DPCM Encoding and Decoding
3. Scrambling/Descramblng
4. Design of ASK, PSK, FSK. and QPSK MATLAB
5. Error Control Coding using Linear Block Codes
143

Code
III-I 7C461 Summer Industry Internship – I - - - 1
Course Objective:
Course Outcomes:
9. Implement the solution using the appropriate modern tools.

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
100 marks. Evaluation is carried out in B.Tech III year I semester.
144
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
M H M M
III-I 7C595 Technical Seminar - V - - 2 1
Learn basics of technical paper writing and enhance verbal and writing skills, which is useful for
employabilty
Pre-Requisites: All Courses till this semester
Course Outcomes:
1. Identify a topic from the current technologies of their choice in the computer science domain and
the allied fields, after surveying in the internet resources, journals and technical magazines in the
library.
2. Arrange the contents of the presentation and also write the report of the research paper.
3. Present the technical topic in front of the panel and the fellow students, using the oratory skills
and also submit the report of the research paper.
4. Interact through answering the questions and also can add some points to the seminar

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
There shall be a Technical Paper writing and seminar evaluated for 100 marks in Third Year First
Content : 20 marks
Report : 25 marks
Attendance : 10 marks
145
Punctuality : 5 marks
Total 100 marks
146
III-II SUBJECTS
147
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M M M H M

Code
Digital Signal Processing
III-II 7CC10 3 -
- 3
Course objectives: To develop skills for analyzing and synthesizing algorithms and systems that process
discrete time signals, with emphasis on realization and implementation.
Course outcomes:
1. Distinguish between CT and DT signals and systems and understand the growing need of DSP
and study the concepts of discrete time signals and systems.
2. Represent periodic DT signals as a Fourier series; non-periodic DT signals as a Fourier
Transform and use a powerful mathematical tool called DFT.
3. Compute the Fourier Transform of DT signals using the FFT algorithms.
4. Realize a digital filter in several forms and structures for a given transfer function H(z).
5. Design of digital filters by several methods once the desired specifications are given &
Distinguish b/w IIR and FIR filters;
6. Understand the need and implement the multirate sampling techniques.

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT I : INTRODUCTION:
Introduction to Digital Signal Processing: Discrete time signals & sequences, Periodicity, linear shift
invariant systems, stability, and causality, Linear constant coefficient difference equations, Frequency
domain representation of discrete time signals and systems.
Applications: Contents form the foundation for DSP.
UNIT II : DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM:

Discrete Fourier series representation of periodic sequences, Discrete-Time Fourier Transform(DTFT),
Discrete Fourier transform (DFT): Properties of DFT, Relation between Z-transform and DFT,
Convolution: Linear and circular convolutions, Overlap add and Overlap save methods, Computation of
DFT.
Applications: Analysis of DT signals-Periodic and Aperiodic.
148
UNIT III : FAST FOURIER TRANSFORMS:

Fast Fourier transforms (FFT) - Radix-2 decimation in time and decimation in frequency FFT
Algorithms, Inverse FFT.
Applications: Design of spectrally efficient system such as OFDM system.
UNIT IV : REALIZATION OF DIGITAL FILTERS:

Review of Z-transforms, Applications of Z–transforms, Block diagram representation of linear constant-
coefficient difference equations, Basic structures of IIR systems, Transposed forms, Basic structures of
FIR systems, System function.
Applications: Design of digital system function to meet the given specifications.
UNIT V: DIGITAL FILTERS:

ANALOG FILTER APPROXIMATIONS – Butterworth and Chebyshev Approximations.
IIR DIGITAL FILTERS: Design of IIR Digital filters from analog filters-Impulse Invariance, Step
invariance and Bilinear Transformation methods, Design Examples, Analog-Digital transformations.
FIR DIGITAL FILTERS: Characteristics of FIR Digital Filters, frequency response, Design of FIR
Digital Filters using Fourier series method, Windowing Techniques-Rectangular, Triangular, Hamming,
Hanning and Bartlett’s Windows, Steps in Kaiser windowing method, Frequency Sampling technique,
Comparison of IIR and FIR filters.
Applications: Design of IIR/FIR digital filter conforming to given specifications.
UNIT VI: MULTIRATE DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING:

Decimation, interpolation, sampling rate conversion. Introduction to DSP Processors.
Applications of Multirate Digital Signal processing: Design of digital filter banks and quadrature
mirror filters etc.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Digital Signal Processing – Alan V. Oppenheim, Ronald W. Schafer, PHI Ed., 2006
2. Digital Signal Processing, Principles, Algorithms, and Applications: John G. Proakis, Dimitris G.
Manolakis, Pearson Education / PHI, 2007.
3. Digital Signal Processing: A Modern Introduction, Ashok Ambardar, 9 th Indian Reprint, 2012,
Cengage Learning.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Digital Signal Processing: Andreas Antoniou, TATA McGraw Hill , 2006
2. Digital Signal Processing: MH Hayes, Schaum’s Outlines, TATA Mc-Graw Hill, 2007.
3. DSP Primer - C. Britton Rorabaugh, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005.
4. Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing using MatLab – Robert J. Schilling, Sandra L. Harris,
Thomson, 2007
5. Discrete Time Signal Processing – A.V.Oppenheim
149
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M M M M M

III-II 7C611 VLSI Technology and Design 3 - - 3
Prerequisites: EDC,STLD, LDICA
Course Objectives:
The objectives of this course is to provide the students an in-depth knowledge on various aspects of VLSI
circuits and their design including testing.
CO Understand the existing device technologies and IC fabrication process
1
CO Explore and analyze the electrical properties of the devices of CMMOS device.
2
CO Design basic logic gates, combinational and sequential circuits using CMOS logic.
3
CO Analyze the effects of parasitic on IC power and performance.
4
CO Design memory cells and basic data path units.
5
CO Explore the need for testing and design verification of VLSI circuits.
5

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Syllabus Content
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO MOS TECHNOLOGIES: MOS, PMOS, NMOS, CMOS & BiCMOS
INTRODUCTION TO IC TECHNOLOGY AND FABRICATION PROCESS: VLSI Design Flow,
Oxidation, Lithography, Diffusion, Ion Implantation, Metallisation, Encapsulation, Probe testing,
Integrated Resistors and Capacitors [T1-CH1, 2 & 3].
Application – CMOS IC Manufacturing
150
UNIT II
BASIC ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES: Basic Electrical Properties of MOS and BiCMOS Circuits:
Ids-Vds relationships, MOS transistor threshold Voltage, gm, gds, Figure of Merit (ω o), Zpu/Zpd, Latch-
Up in CMOS, Pass Transistors [T1-CH2]
INVERTERS: NMOS Inverter, Various Pull-Ups, CMOS Inverter Analysis and Design, Bi-CMOS
Inverters [T1-CH2]
UNIT III
CIRCUIT DESIGN PROCESSES: MOS Layers, Stick Diagrams, Lamda-based CMOS Design rules
for Wires, Contacts and Transistors, Layout Diagrams for NMOS and CMOS Inverters and Gates,
Scaling of MOS circuits, Limitations of Scaling. [T1-CH3]
GATES: CMOS Logic Gates and Structures, Switch logic, Layout Diagrams Gates [T1-CH5]
Application – IC Physical Design – NAND and NOR
UNIT IV
DELAYS: Sheet Resistance Rs and its concept to MOS, Area Capacitance Units, Calculations - Cg,
τ-Delays, Driving large Capacitive Loads, Wiring Capacitances, Fan-in and fan-out [T1- CH 4 & 5, T2-
CH4]
Semiconductor Integrated circuit Design: PLD’s, Introduction to CPLD’s and FPGA’s.
UNIT V
MEMORY AND SUBSYSTEM DESIGN: Latches and Registers [T2-CH7], Clocking strategies
(Single Phase) [T1-CH5.5], Memory cells (SRAM & DRAM), Adders, Shifter, Multipliers and ALUs
[T1- CH8]
Applications – SRAM Based FPGAs and Multiply and Accumulate (MAC) Units
UNIT VI
INTRODUCTION TO CMOS TESTING: CMOS Testing, Need for testing, Test Principles, Design
Strategies for Test, Chip level Test Techniques, System-level Test Techniques [T1-CH7]
Applications – Implementation of basic ATPG
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Basic VLSI Design –Douglas A. Pucknell, Kamran Eshraghian, PHI, 3 rd Edition,2005.
2. Principles of CMOS VLSI Design - Weste and Eshraghian, Pearson Education, Second Edition,
2009.
.
REFERENCES:
1. Chip Design for Submicron VLSI: CMOS Layout & Simulation, - John P. Uyemura, Thomson
Learning.
2. Introduction to VLSI Circuits and Systems - John .P. Uyemura, JohnWiley, 2003.
3. Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design Perspective - John M. Rabaey, 2/E, 2002
4. Modern VLSI Design - Wayne Wolf, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 1997.
5. VLSI Technology – S.M. SZE, 2nd Edition, TMH, 2003.
151
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
M M M M

III-II 7C612 Internet of Things and Applications 3 - - 3
Course Objectives: The student will learn about

1. Terminology, technology and applications of IoT
2. Sensors and Actuators required to build an IoT system
3. Necessary Wireless Networks and protocols
4. Raspberry PI3 as a hardware platform for IoT sensor interfacing and
5. Various IoT application as case studies
Course Outcomes: After completing this course, student shall be able to

1. Build a simple IoT System for a given application
2. Describe and utilize necessary protocols for communication and management of an IoT system
3. Design, Develop and Illustrate IoT applications using Raspberry PI platform and Python
Scripting
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Unit – 1- Introduction to IoT

Part A - Introduction
IoT terms and basic definitions, IoT vs M2M, Characteristics of IoT, IoT Eco-System, IoT applications
and marketplace and IoT Reference Model
Part B – Sensor and Actuators

Introduction to transducers, sensors and actuators, Sensor – classification and types, Actuators –
Classification and types.
Unit 2–Embedded Platform for IoT – Rpi 3

Embedded Platform brief introduction - Ardiuno, Raspberry Pi 3 and Intel Galileo
RPI-Interfaces (serial, SPI, I2C) Programming – Python program with Raspberry PI with focus of
interfacing external gadgets, controlling output, reading input from pins.
Unit 3 – IoT Wireless Networks

Introduction to WSN and its architecture – Network topologies, Issues, Challenges and Security, WSN
Technologies and its application - WiFi, Bluetooth, Zigbee, LoRa.
152
Unit 4 – IoT Protocol

Characteristics and Architecture of MQTT, XMP, DDS, AMQP, COAP and REST and their comparison
Unit 5 - IoT Design Methodology

Process and requirement, Level Specification, Domain model and service specification, IoT application
Development
Unit 6: Case Studies Illustrating IoT Application

Home Automation – Smart Lighting, Home intrusion detection, Cities – Smart parking, Environment –
Weather monitoring system, Weather reporting bot, Air pollution monitoring, Forest fire detection,
Agriculture – Smart irrigation,
Text Books
1. Internet of Things, Author(s): Srinivasa K.G. | Siddesh G.M. | HanumanthaRaju R, ISBN:
9789386858955, Cengage Publications, 2018
2. Internet of Things A Hands on Approach by ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti Publisher Universities
Press. ISBN – 978 81 7371 954 7
Reference books
1. Jan Holler, VlasiosTsiatsis, Catherine Mulligan, Stefan Avesand, StamatisKarnouskos, David
Boyle, “From Machine-to-Machine to the Internet of Things: Introduction to a New Age of
Intelligence”, 1 st Edition, Academic Press, 2014.
2. Peter Waher, “Learning Internet of Things”, PACKT publishing, BIRMINGHAM – MUMBAI
3. Bernd Scholz-Reiter, Florian Michahelles, “Architecting the Internet of Things”, ISBN 978-3-642-
19156-5 e-ISBN 978-3-642-19157-2, Springer
4. Daniel Minoli, “Building the Internet of Things with IPv6 and MIPv6: The Evolving World of
M2M Communications”, ISBN: 978-1-118- 47347-4, Willy Publications
153
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M

III-II 7CC13 ANTENNAS AND WAVE PROPAGATIONS 3 - - 3
Prerequisites: EMTL
Course Objectives:
 To study and learn various antennas, their working principle, arrays and radiation patterns of
antennas.
 To understand various techniques involved in various antenna parameter measurements.
 To understand the radio wave propagation in the atmosphere
Course Objectives: After studying this course, the students will be able to
CO Explain electromagnetics and antenna characteristics.
1
CO Explain wire antennas and antenna arrays
2
CO Evaluate knowledge on Horn, Parabolic and Lens antennas.
3
CO Recall knowledge on Horizontal Polarized antennas, Helical antennas , Patch antennas etc.
4
CO Discuss ground wave and space wave propagation and space wave concepts.
5
CO Analyse concepts of sky wave propagation .
6

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Syllabus Content
Unit-I:
FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS OF ANTENNAS
Review of Electromagnetic Theory: Vector Potential, Solution of Wave Equation, Retarded Case,
Hertizian Dipole. Antenna Characteristics: Radiation Pattern, Beam Solid Angle, Directivity, Gain, Input
Impedance, Polarization, Bandwidth, Reciprocity, Equivalence of Radiation Patterns, Equivalence of
Impedances, Effective Aperture, Vector Effective Length, Antenna efficiency.
154
Unit-II:
LINEAR WIRE ANTENNAS AND ARRAYS
Wire Antennas: Short Dipole, Radiation Resistance and Directivity, Half Wave Dipole, Monopole, Small
Loop Antennas. Antenna Arrays: Linear Array and Pattern Multiplication, Two-Element Array, Uniform
Array, BSA and EFA, EFA With increased Directivity. BSA with Non- uniform Amplitude Distributions
and Binomial Arrays.
Unit-III:
APERTUREAND REFLECTOR ANTENNAS
Magnetic Current and its Fields, Uniqueness Theorem, Field Equivalence Principle, Duality Principle,
Method Of Images, Pattern Properties, Slot Antenna, Horn Antenna, Pyramidal Horn Antenna, Reflector
Antenna-Flat Reflector, Corner Reflector, Common Curved Reflector Shapes, Lens Antenna.
Applications: Design of parabolic reflector for DTH.
Unit-IV:
Long Wire, V and Rhombic Antenna, Yagi-Uda Antenna, Turnstile Antenna, Helical Antenna- Axial
Mode Helix, Normal Mode Helix, Biconical Antenna, Log Periodic Dipole Array, Spiral Antenna,
Microstrip Patch Antennas. Antenna Measurements: Radiation Pattern Measurement, Gain and
Directivity.
Applications: Design of a 3-element Yagi guda Antenna for given specifications
Unit-V:
Surface Wave Propagation-Modes of Wave Propagation-Surface Wave Propagation and Surface Wave
Tilt-Plane Earth Reflection, Reflection and Refraction of Waves-Field Strength due to Ground Wave-
Multi-Hop Transmission. Tropospheric and Space Wave Propagation
UNIT VI:
Ionospheric Propagation: Structure of Ionosphere-Measures of Ionosphere Propagation-Critical
Frequency-Angle of Incidence-MUF And LUF ,Optimum Working Frequency-Skip Distance, Virtual
Height , Refractive Index of The Ionosphere, Effect of the Earth Magnetic Field and Fading
TEXT BOOKS -
1. John D. Kraus and Ronald J. Marhefka, Antennas for All Applications –TMH, 3rd Edn., 2003.
2. E.C. Jordan and K.G. Balmain ,Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems –, PHI, 2nd ed.,
2000. .
REFERENCES –
1. C.A. Balanis, Antenna Theory - John Wiley & Sons, 2nd ed., 2001.
2. K.D. Prasad, Antennas and Wave Propagation –, Satya Prakashan, Tech India Publications, New
Delhi, 2001.
3. E.V.D. Glazier and H.R.L. Lamont ,Transmission and Propagation –, The Services Text Book of
Radio, vol. 5, Standard Publishers Distributors, Delhi.
4. F.E. Terman Electronic and Radio Engineering –, McGraw-Hill, 4th edition, 1955.
5. John D. Kraus, Antennas – McGraw-Hill, 2nd ed, 1988.
155
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M
Year/Se Sub. Code Subject Name (Professional Elective-I) L T P/ C

m D
III-II 7C615 Digital Design Through Verilog 3 - - 3
Prerequisites: STLD, Programmaing concepts of any language
Course Objectives:
 To introduce syntax, lexical conventions, data types and memory related to Verilog HDL.
 To design, test and implementation of thedigital hardware using various modeling styles.
 To design digital systems using FSM modeling.
CO1 Understand levels of design description, concurrency, simulation and synthesis.
CO2 Apply language constructs, data types, operators available in verilog HDL.
CO3 Design combinational logic and sequential logic in gate level modeling.
CO4 Explain Gate and Switch level modeling.
CO5 Use system tasks, functions and UDPs.
CO6 Demonstrate SM charts and realize digital design using SM charts.

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Syllabus Content
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO VERILOG HDL:Verilog HDL, Levels of Design Description, Concurrency,
System Tasks, Simulation and Synthesis, Functional Verification.
LANGUAGE CONSTRUCTS AND CONVENTIONS: Introduction, Keywords, Identifiers, White
Space, Characters, Comments, Numbers, Strings, Logic Values, Strengths, Data Types, Scalars and
Vectors, Parameters, Operators. Verilog Module structure, Test bench module- Net types, Strengths and
Contention Resolution, Delays.
UNIT-II
MODELING AT DATA FLOW LEVEL:Introduction, Continuous Assignment Structures, Delays and
Continuous Assignments, Assignment to Vectors, Operators.
BEHAVIORAL MODELING:Introduction, Initial Construct, Always Construct, Assignments with
delays, Blocking and Non blocking Assignments - Examples, Wait construct, Multiple Always Blocks,
156
Design at Behavioral Level constructs- Case statements, iƒ and iƒ-else, repeat, for loop, while loop,
forever loop. Other constructs- assign-deassign, disable, force-release.
UNIT-III
GATE LEVEL MODELING:Introduction, Gate Primitives- Illustrative Examples, Tri-State Gates,
Design of Basic Circuits using Instantiation of Gate Primitives- Half, Full and Parallel Adders, Decoders,
Multiplexers. Design of Flip-flops with Gate Primitives.
SWITCH LEVEL MODELING:Introduction, Basic Transistor Switches, CMOS Switch, Bi-directional
Gates, Time Delays with Switch Primitives, Instantiations with Strengths and Delays, Strength
Contention with Trireg Nets-Examples.
UNIT-IV
SYSTEM TASKS, FUNCTIONS, AND COMPILER DIRECTIVES:Introduction, Parameters, Path
Delays, Module Parameters, System Tasks and Functions, File-Based Tasks and Functions, Compiler
Directives, Hierarchical Access, User- Defined Primitives (UDP).
UNIT-V
COMPONENT TEST AND VERIFICATION:Test bench – combinational circuit testing, sequential
circuit testing, test bench techniques, design verification, assertion verification.
UNIT-VI
DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN AND VERIFICATION:FSM Design (Moore and Mealy Machines) –
Vending Machine design and verification , Derivation and Realization of Algorithmic State Machine
Chart Design and Verification examples - Binary Multiplier, Dice game. Other design examples - RAM
(Single &DualPort), UART Design.
Text Books
1. T.R. Padmanabhan and B. Bala Tripura Sundari, Design through Verilog HDL – WSE, 2004
IEEE Press.
2. Charles H Roth, Digital Systems Design using VHDL , Jr. Thomson Publications, 2004.
3. Samir Palnitkar, Verilog HDL , 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2009
References
1. Sunggu Lee, Advanced Digital Logic Design using Verilog, State machines and Synthesis for
FPGAs, - Cengage Learning
2. Stephen. Brown and ZvonkoVranesic, Fundamentals of Logic Design with Verilog, TMH, 2005.
3. J. Bhaskar, A Verilog Primier, BSP, 2003.
4. Michael D. Ciletti, Advanced Digital Design with Verilog HDL, PHI, 2005.
5. Sunggu Lee, Digital Logic Design using Verilog, State machine and synthesis for FPGA,
Cengage Learning, 2009.
157
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M
Year/Sem Sub. Code Subject Name (Professional Elective-I) L T P/D C

III - II 7C616 Embedded C Programming 3 - - 3
a b c d e f g h i j k l M
X X X X X X
Course Objectives:
 To provide basic knowledge in embedded system design using Embedded C.
 To make the learners understand concept and applications of Embedded C Programming in
various fields including industrial automation..
CO Demonstrate the use of development software for a particular application and choosing
1 appropriate OS.
CO Understanding and building basic embedded system using 8051.Understanding its design
2
CO Design of embedded systems and implementation of switch reading.
3
CO Demonstrate the concepts of OOP’s theory inheritance and functions in embedded C to
4 support modular programming.
CO Learning the need for realtime implementation in Embedded C..
5
CO Case study of ‘Intruder Alarm” toachihve real time hands on.
6

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Syllabus Content
UNIT – I:
Programming Embedded Systems in C
Introduction ,What is an embedded system, Which processor should you use, Which programming
language should you use, Which operating system should you use, How do you develop embedded
software, Conclusions
158
UNIT – II:
Introducing the 8051 Microcontroller Family
Introduction, What’s in a name, The external interface of the Standard 8051, Reset requirements ,Clock
frequency and performance, Memory issues, I/O pins, Timers, Interrupts, Serial interface, Power
consumption ,Conclusions
UNIT – III:
Reading Switches
Introduction, Basic techniques for reading from port pins, Example: Reading and writing bytes, Example:
Reading and writing bits (simple version), Example: Reading and writing bits (generic version), The need
for pull-up resistors, Dealing with switch bounce, Example: Reading switch inputs (basic code),
Example: Counting goats, Conclusions
UNIT – IV:
Adding Structure to the Code
Introduction, Object-oriented programming with C, The Project Header (MAIN.H), The Port Header
(PORT.H), Example: Restructuring the ‘Hello Embedded World’ example, Example: Restructuring the
goat-counting example, Further examples, Conclusions
UNIT – V:
Meeting Real-Time Constraints
Introduction, Creating ‘hardware delays’ using Timer 0 and Timer 1, Example: Generating a precise 50
ms delay, Example: Creating a portable hardware delay, Why not use Timer 2?, The need for ‘timeout’
mechanisms, Creating loop timeouts, Example: Testing loop timeouts, Example: A more reliable switch
interface, Creating hardware timeouts, Example: Testing a hardware timeout, Conclusions
UNIT – VI:
Case Study: Intruder Alarm System
Introduction, The software architecture, Key software components used in this example, running the
program, the software, Conclusions
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Embedded C - Michael J. Pont, 2nd Ed., Pearson Education, 2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. PICmicro MCU C-An introduction to programming, The Microchip PIC in CCS C - Nigel
Gardner
159
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M
Year/Se Sub. Code Subject Name (Professional Elective-I) L T P/ C

m D
DIGITAL IMAGE & VIDEO PROCESSING
III-II 7C617 3 - - 3
a B C d E f g h i j k M
x X X x X x
Prerequisites: SS, DSP

1.Get the knowledge of the basic step in image processing system, Discrete cosine transforms and
discrete wave let transforms.
2.Differentiate image enhancement methods ,different types of spatial domain and frequency domain
methods.
3.Get the knowledge of point, line and edge detection, thresholding , Region based segmentation.
4.Differentiate different types of redundancies, lossy and lossy less image compression, different types of
coding techniques.
5.Know the difference between analog video and digital video, different types of image formation and
sampling of video signals
6.Study the different types of motion estimation techniques and application of motion estimation in video
coding.
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT I:
Introduction to Image Processing
Fundamentals of Image Processing and Image Transforms, Basic steps of Image Processing System
Sampling and Quantization of an image – Basic relationship between pixels
Image Transforms: 2 D- Discrete Fourier Transform, Discrete Cosine Transform (DCT), Wavelet
Transforms: Continuous Wavelet Transform, Discrete Wavelet Transforms.
UNIT II:
Image Enhancement
Spatial domain methods: Histogram processing, Fundamentals of Spatial filtering, Smoothing spatial
filters, Sharpening spatial filters. Frequency domain methods: Basics of filtering in frequency domain,
image smoothing, image sharpening, Selective filtering.
UNIT III:
160
Image Segmentation & Compression

Image Segmentation concepts, Point, Line and Edge Detection, Thresholding and Region Based
segmentation. Image compression fundamentals - Coding Redundancy, Spatial and Temporal
redundancy, Compression models: Lossy & Lossless, Huffman coding, Arithmetic coding, LZW coding,
Run length coding, Bit plane coding, Transform coding, Predictive coding.
UNIT IV:
Basic steps of Video Processing
Analog Video, Digital Video. Time-Varying Image Formation models: Three-Dimensional Motion
Models, Geometric Image Formation, Photometric Image Formation, Sampling of Video signals and
filtering operations.
UNIT V:
2-D Motion Estimation
Optical flow, General Methodologies, Pixel Based Motion Estimation, Block- Matching Algorithm,
Mesh based Motion Estimation, Global Motion Estimation, Application of motion estimation in Video
coding.
UNIT VI:
Three dimensional Motion Estimation & Waveform based coding
Feature based motion estimation, Direct Motion Estimation. Block based transform coding: over view,
one dimensional unitary transform, two dimensional unitary transform, The discrete cosine transform, Bit
allocation and transform coding gain , Predictive Coding: over view, optimal predictor design and
predictive coding gain, Block based hybrid video coding.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Digital Image Processing – Gonzaleze and Woods, 3rd ed., Pearson.
2. Video processing and communication – Yao Wang, Joem Ostermann and Ya–quin Zhang.1st Ed.,
PHI.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Digital Video Processing – M. Tekalp, Prentice Hall International
161
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M
Year/Sem Sub. Code Subject Name (Professional Elective-I) L T P/D C

III-II 7CC18 CELLULAR AND MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS 3 - - 3
Prerequisites: DC
Course Objectives:
 Be acquainted with the role of cellular and mobile communications in frequency management
issues.
 Be acquainted with different interference factors influencing cellular and mobile
communications.
 Be able to efficiently use the background behind developing different path loss and/or radio
coverage in cellular environment
CO Understand the working principle and limitations/advancements of conventional mobile
1 telephone systems, cellular mobile systems and Advanced generations of cellular wireless
systems
CO Analyze Frequency reuse concept and avoidance of Co-channel interference.
2
CO Explore the concepts of adjacent channel interference, its effects and avoidance mechanism.
3
CO Analyze signal reflections, path loss, propagation delay/loss, near and long distance
4 propagation loss under different conditions, Merits of Lee model
CO Analyze frequency allocation of cellular systems
5
CO Demostrate the concept of handoff mechanism and dropped calls.
6

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Syllabus Content
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO CELLULAR MOBILE RADIO SYSTEMS:
Limitations of conventional mobile telephone systems, Significance of 800MHz,Basic cellular wireless
systems; 1G,2G,2.5G,3G,4G,5G cellular wireless systems; Uniqueness of mobile radio environment –
162
Long term fading, factors influencing short term fading , parameters of mobile multi path fading- time
dispersion parameters, coherence bandwidth, Doppler spread and coherence time, Types of small scale
fading.
UNIT-II
FUNDAMENTALS OF CELLULAR RADIO SYSTEM DESIGN:
Concept of Frequency reuse, Co-channel Interference, Co-channel Interference Reduction Factor, desired
C/I from a normal case in a omni directional Antenna system, System capacity, Trunking and grade of
service; Improving coverage and capacity in cellular system – cell splitting, sectoring, micro cell zone
concept.
UNIT-III
CHANNEL INTERFERENCE:
Measurement of real time Co-Channel Interference, Design of antenna system, Antenna parameters and
their effects; Diversity techniques- Space diversity, polarization diversity, Frequency diversity and Time
Diversity. Non-co-channel interference-Adjacent channel Interference, near end and far end interference,
cross talk, effect on coverage and Interference by power decrease, antenna height decrease, effect of cell
site components, UHF TV interference
Applications: Design of a cellular systems using frequency reuse factor (k=19) for directional and
Omni-directional antenna systems
UNIT-IV
CELL COVERAGE FOR SIGNAL AND TRAFFIC :
Signal reflections in flat and hilly terrain, effect of human made structures, phase difference between
direct and reflected paths, constant standard deviation, straight line path loss slope, general formula for
mobile propagation over water and flat open area, near and long distance propagation, path loss from a
point to point prediction model in different conditions, merits-of-LEE-model.
UNIT-V
FREQUENCY MANAGEMENT AND CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT:
Numbering and grouping, setup access and paging channels channel assignments to cell sites and mobile
units, channel sharing and borrowing, sectorization, overlaid cells, non fixed channel assignment.
HANDOFF, DROPPED CALLS:
Handoff initiation, types of Handoff, delayed handoff, Advantages of handoffs, Power difference
handoff, forced handoff, mobile assigned handoff and soft handoff, Intersystem handoff. Introduction to
dropped call rates and their evaluation.
UNIT-VI
DIGITAL CELLULAR NETWORKS: GSM architecture, GSM channels, multiplex access scheme ,
TDMA, FDMA CDMA,WCDMA,SDMA,OFDM
TEXTBOOKS :
1. Mobile Cellular Telecommunications – W.C.Y. Lee, Tata McGraw Hill, 2rd Edn., 2006.
2. Principles of Mobile Communications – Gordon L. Stuber, Springer International 2nd Edition, 2007.
REFERENCES:
1. Wireless Communications - Theodore. S. Rapport, Pearson education, 2nd Edn., 2002.
2. Wireless and Mobile Communications – Lee McGraw Hills, 3rd Edition, 2006.
3. Wireless Communication and Networking – Jon W. Mark and Weihua Zhqung, PHI, 2005.
4. Wireless Communication Technology – R. Blake, Thompson Asia Pvt. Ltd., 2004.
163
Year/Se Sub. Code SUBJECT L T P/ C

m D
III-II 7H619 LOGICAL REASONING 1 1 - 2
a b c d e f G h i j k l m
x
Course Outcomes: Students will able to answer

1. The questions given on series completion and analogy.
2. The questions given on odd one out in classification and coding and decoding.
3. The questions given on blood relations.
4. The questions given on directions and Arithmetical reasoning.
5. The questions given on Venn diagrams, cubes and dice. .
6. The questions given on clocks and calendar.
Syllabus
Unit–I: Series Completion: Number Series, Alphabet Series, Alpha – Numeric Series.
Analogy: Completing the Analogous Pair, Simple Analogy, Choosing the Analogous pair, Double
Analogy, Word Analogy, and Number Analogy.
Unit–II: Classification / Odd One Out: Word Classification, Number Classification and Letter
Classification. Coding – Decoding: Letter Coding, Number Coding, Matrix Coding, Substitution,
Deciphering Message Word Codes, Jumbled Coding.
Unit–III: Blood Relations, Deciphering Jumbled up Descriptions, Relation Puzzle – Direction sense
test. Number, Ranking & Time Sequence Test –Mathematical Operations.
Unit –IV: Directions, Arithmetical Reasoning. Puzzle Test: Classification Type Questions, Seating
Arrangements Comparison Type Questions, Sequential Order of Things, Selection Based on given
conditions, Family – Based Puzzles, Jumbled Problems.
Unit –V: Assertions and Reason– Logical Venn Diagrams – Alpha Numeric Sequence Puzzle. Cubes and
Dice – Analytical Reasoning .Logical Deduction: Logic, Statement – Arguments,
Unit – VI: Clocks & Calendar .Data Sufficiency and Syllogism.
Text Books:
1. Verbal and Non Verbal Reasoning by R.S.Agarwal.
2. Quantitative Aptitude and Reasoning, R.V.Praveen, Second Edition, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.
164
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M

III-II 7CC78 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LAB - - 4 2
Prerequisites: SS,PTSP, Basic Simulation Lab

Course Objectives: After completing this course, the students will have demonstrated
CO To Understand the frequency response of a given systems
1
CO Design of FIR & Butterworth and chebyshev approximations and converting them to IIR
2 filters
CO Transforming an analog filter to its digital equivalent
3
CO Sampling rate conversion Interpolation and decimation
4
CO An ability to use TMS320c6713 for different algorithms
5

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Syllabus Content
Tools to be used: MATLAB, CC Studio, TMS320C6713
1. Impulse response of first order and second order systems.

2. Program to find frequency response of LP/HP filters (difference equation/ transfer function).
3. To find Circular convolution of given sequence with and without built in function.
4. To find the DFT/IDFT, FFT of given DT signals with and without built in functions.
5. To find Power Spectral Density of a sequence.
6. To implement IIR filter (LP/HP/BP)
a) Butterworth filter
b) Chebyshev Type-I and Type-II filters
7. To design FIR filter (LP/HP) using windowing technique
a) Using rectangular window
b) Using triangular window
c) Using Kaiser Window
8. Down sampling and up sampling of given sequence by specified factor.
9. Conversion of Analog filter to Digital Filter.
165
a) impulse invariant transformation

b) bilinear transformation
10. Generation of DTMF signals
11. Noise removal: Add noise above 3 KHz and then remove, interference suppression using 400 Hz
tone.
The following experiments are to be implemented using CCS
1. Study the architecture of DSP chips-TMS 320C 5X/6X Instructions
2. To find Linear convolution of given sequence.
3. To find Circular convolution of given sequence
4. To find the DFT & FFT of given sequence
5. Generation of DTMF Signals
6. Implementation of Decimation Process & Interpolation Process.
166
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M
Year/Se Sub. Code Subject Name L T P/ C

m D
III-II 7C679 VLSI Design Lab - - 4/2 1
a b c d e f g h i j k l M
x x x x x x x
Prerequisites: EDC, STLD, LDICA

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, the students must have demonstrated
CO1 An ability to use VLSI CAD Tools (NGSPICE, Xilinx, and Cadence).
CO2 An ability to understand and implement digital logic gates and circuits using SPICE and
Verilog HDL.
CO3 An ability to perform physical design- layouts using Cadence EDA Tool.
CO4 An ability to implement combinatorial and sequential designs on FPGA boards (SPARTAN 3)
using Xilinx tools.
CO5 An ability to use VLSI CAD Tools (NGSPICE, Xilinx, and Cadence).

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Syllabus Content
PART A
The following Experiments are to simulate the design in Xilinx Vivado2017.1 using Verilog HDL
and implement it on Artix 7 FPGA.
1. Design of all Logic Gates.
2. Design of Adders(Half Adder,Full Adder,Parallel Adder).
3. Design of 3-8 Decoder.
4. Design of 8-3 Encoder.
5. Design of 8*1Multiplexer.
6. Design of 4*1 Demultiplexer.
7. Design of Flip-flops:D,SR,JK,T.
8. Design of 4-bit Comparator.
PART B
The following Experiments are to Design and Verify the Operation using Cadence Tool.
1. Design and Simulatethe CMOS Inverter.
2. Design and Simulate the CMOS AND Gate.
167
3. Design and Simulate the CMOS OR Gate.

4. Design and Simulate the CMOS NAND Gate.
5. Design and Simulate the CMOS NOR Gate.
6. Design and Simulate the CMOS Ex-OR Gate.
7. Design and Simulate the CMOS Ex-NORGate.
8. Design and Simulate the Layout diagram for CMOS Inverter using 180nm Technology.
Note:Any Six Experiments From Each Part.
Part-D Lab Project –

1. Hierarchical design and layout of MSI circuits (multiplexer, decoders, etc.)
2. FPGA based traffic light controller using Verilog HDL
3. FPGA based Beverage Vending Machine
4. FPGA based UART serial communication interface
5. Implement 8-bit 3-stage pipeline processor
6. Using SPICE Implement 6T SRAM memory with read and write logic
168
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M

III-II 7C680 Internet of Things and Applications Lab - - 4/2 1

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Sl. No. Lab Experiment

1 Study and Configure Raspberry Pi 3
a) Installing Debian OS for Raspberry pi3
b) Flashing and Booting for the Rpi3 for the first time
2 Introduction to Linux Environment – Practice Linux commands and simple python
programs on Rpi3
a) Write a Program for arithmetic operation in Python.
b) Write a Program for looping statement in Python.
b) Programming and Interfacing GPIOS – Blink LEDStart/Stop with Switch
3 Weather monitoring with DHT11 and data storage on cloud (ThingSpeak)
4 Write a program to store senor data in Rpi3 by creating database system.
5 Write a program to send sensor data to Cloud using Node Red service to
perform Data Analytics using Rpi3
6 a) Interface and recording pictures and videos using Rpi3
b) Simple program for Colour object detector and tracker
7 Smart Home Application – Security System - Write a program to detect intruder with
proximity sensor,record pictures and send alerts
8 Smart City Application – Street lighting System - Write a program to control street lights
based on the ambience lighting
9 a) Writing python Code to implement of MQTT protocol on Rpi3 – Publisher
b) Writing python Code to implement of MQTT protocol on Rpi3 – Subscriber
10 Writing python Code to implement of MQTT protocol on Rpi3 with multiple Publisher and
Subscriber
Internet of Things Students Lab Projects
IoT Lab Kit Content

 Raspberry Pi 3 model B (Wireless, Bluetooth )
 Micro SD memory card 8 GB
 SD memory card adapter
169
 DHT 11 Sensor  Resistor,

 LED
 Switch
 Breadboard
 Connecting wires
 HDMI to VGA Cable
 Power Adapter and Micro USB cable
170

Code
SOFT SKILLS AND TECHNICAL
III-II 7HC74 - 2 1
COMMUNICATION
x x x x
Course Objectives
Enable students –
 to analyze themselves and to practice the ways to overpower their weaknesses

 to enhance their soft skills and behavioral patterns
 to equip themselves with the skill of solving problems and taking effective decisions
 to build up conflicts and stress management skills
 to face interviews confidently and effectively
 to cultivate appropriate etiquette and manners to deal with personal and
professional life
UNIT-1: Know Yourself – SWOT / SWOC Analysis

1. Importance of Knowing Yourself
2. Benefits of SWOT/ SWOC analysis
3. How to go about SWOT analysis
4. SWOT/ SWOC analysis grid
UNIT-2: Soft Skills
1. Definition and importance of soft skills
2. Positive attitude
3. Goal setting
4. Team building and Leadership qualities
UNIT-3: 1. Problem Solving
2. Decision Making
3. Time Management
UNIT-4: Conflict Management
1. Stress Management – IQ
2. Emotional Intelligence – EI
UNIT-5: Interview Skills

1. Resume writing
a. Types of Résumé
b. Differences among Bio-data, Curriculum Vitaé and Résumé
c. Purpose of Curriculum Vitaé and Resume
e. Tips to write Curriculum Vitaé and Résumé
f. The DOs and the DON’Ts of Résumé preparation
g. Cover letter
2. Types of interviews (Face to Face / Panel Interviews, etc.)
171
3. Pre-interview preparation
4. Types of questions asked - FAQs
5. Mock Interviews
UNIT-6: Etiquette and Manners

Etiquette: Introduction
1. Classification of etiquette
2. Modern etiquette and social etiquette
3. Work etiquette and benefits of following work etiquette
Manners: Introduction:
1. Practicing good manners
Course Outcomes:
Students become skilled at-
 identifying their strengths and weaknesses and realize the ways to overcome their
weaknesses
 enhancing their soft skills and behavioral patterns
 solving problems and taking effective decisions
 managing the stress and conflicts
 facing interviews confidently and effectively
 cultivating appropriate etiquette and manners to deal with personal and
professional life
Suggested Reading:
1. Technical communication- Meenakshi Raman and Sangeetha Sharma (Oxford Publications)

2. Technical Writing Process and Product by SharonJ Gerson:Fifth edition.Pearson Publishers.
3. Developing Communication Skills – Krishna Mohan and Meera Benarjee
4. SOFT SKILLS – Dr. K. Alex, S.Chand publications
5. Advanced Technical communication - Kavita Tyagi and Padma Mistri
6. Developing Speaking-Listening Skills in English (With CD)
7. Basic Communication Skills For Technology- Andrea J Rutherfoord- Pearson
8. Developing Communication Skills- Krishna Mohan- Macmillan
9. Written Communication Skills- Michael Hatton-iste
10. Soft Skills Know Yourself And Know The World- K Alex- S Chand
172
Year/Se Sub. Code Subject Name L T P/ C

m D
III-II 7C697 Comprehensive Viva-Voce-II - - - 1
a b C d e f g h i j k l m
X X X
On completion:
i. Students are assessed on the courses they have undergone till the completion of that academic
year.
ii. Students are required to comprehend the concepts in the core subjects and the elective subjects,
to make them ready to face technical interviews which improve their employability skills.

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
There shall be a Comprehensive Viva-Voce in every II Semester. The Comprehensive Viva-Voce will be
conducted by a Committee consisting of an External Examiner, Head of the Department and two Senior
Faculty members of the Department.
The Comprehensive Viva-Voce is aimed to assess the students’ understanding in various subjects he/she
studied during the B.Tech course of study till II-semester. The Comprehensive Viva-Voce is valued for
30 marks for internal and 70 marks for external by the Committee.
There are no internal marks for the Comprehensive Viva-Voce.
173

III-II 7C663 GROUP PROJECT - - 4 2
a b C d e f g h i j k l m
X X X X X X X X x

After studying this course, the students will be able to:
i. use the concepts, in conceptualizing, designing and executing the modules of the projects.
ii. exhibit the interest in learning the modern tools and technologies.
iii. inculcate an enthusiasm to use the creative ideas to build the innovative projects
iv. improve communicative skills and team working skills

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
A group project shall be carried out by a group of students consisting of 2 to 3 in number in third year
first semester. This work shall be carried out under the guidance of the teacher and shall involve design,
fabrication, software development or any other significant activity. This can be of interdisciplinary nature
also.
There will be 75 marks in total with 25 marks of internal evaluation.
The internal evaluation shall consist of:
Day to day work : 10 marks

Report : 05 marks
Demonstration / presentation : 10 marks
End examination : 50 Marks.
The end examination will be carried out by a committee consisting of an external examiner, head of the
department, a senior faculty member and the supervisor.
174
IV-I SUBJECTS
175
Syllabus for B. Tech. IV Year I semester

Computer Science and Engineering
COMPUTER NETWORKS
Code: 7EC05
Course Objective:
1. The objective of the course is to equip the students with a general overview of the concepts and
fundamentals of computer networks.
2. Familiarize the students with the standard models for the layered approach to communication between
machines in a network and the protocols and functions of the various layers.
Course Outcomes:
1 Classify network topologies and apply the same to different networks with the knowledge acquired
from the network reference models and fundamentals of computer networks
2 Illustrate the design issues of data link layer and detect the transmission errors and flow control
problems
3 Categorize the Channel allocation issues, MAC protocols such as ALOHA, CSMA and CSMA/CD
and MAC addresses with IEEE 802.X and wireless LAN.
4 Distinguish the knowledge of the several routing algorithms and Internetworking concepts.
5 Obtain and use the skills of subnetting and routing mechanisms
6 Distinguish the knowledge of the functions of transport and application layer
UNIT I
Introduction: Uses of Computer Networks, Types of networks: WAN, LAN, MAN, Network
Topologies, Reference models: OSI, TCP/IP.
Physical Layer: Transmission media: magnetic media, twisted pair, coaxial cable, fiber optics, wireless
transmission.
UNIT II
Data link layer: Design issues in data link layer: framing, flow control, error control, Error Detection
and Correction: Parity, CRC checksum, Hamming code, Flow Control: Sliding Window Protocols,
Applications: Data link layer protocols HDLC, PPP.
UNIT III
Medium Access sub layer: Channel allocation problem, MAC Protocols: ALOHA, CSMA, CSMA/CD,
MAC addresses, IEEE 802.X, Standard Ethernet, Wireless LANS. Bridges, Types of Bridges.
UNIT IV
Network Layer: Design issues in Network Layer, Virtual circuit and Datagram subnets-Routing
algorithm: Shortest path routing, Flooding, distance vector routing, Link state routing, Hierarchical
routing, Broad casting, Multi casting, Routing for mobile hosts.
Internetworking: Concatenated Virtual Circuits, Connectionless internetworking, Tunneling,
Internetwork routing, Fragmentation
UNIT V
Network layer in internet: IPv4, IP addresses, Sub netting, Super netting, NAT.Internet control protocols:
ICMP, ARP, RARP, DHCP.
Congestion Control: Principles of Congestion, Congestion Prevention Policies.
Congestion Control in datagram Subnet: Choke packet, load shedding, jitter control.
Quality of Service: Leaky Bucket algorithm and token bucket algorithm.
176
UNIT VI
Transport Layer: Transport Services, Connection establishment, Connection release and TCP and UDP
protocols.
Application Layer: Domain name system, FTP, HTTP, SMTP, WWW.
Textbook & Course Materials
Required Textbooks
1. Computer Networks — Andrew S Tanenbaum, 4th Edition. Pearson Education/PHI
2. Data Communications and Networking – Behrouz A. Forouzan.Third Edition TMH.
3.Data Communication and Networks-Bhushan Trivedi-OXFORD Publications.
Recommended Textbooks & Other Readings

1. An Engineering Approach to Computer Networks-S.Keshav, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education
2. Understanding communications and Networks, 3rd Edition, W.A. Shay, Thomson
177
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M

IV-I 7C714 Microwave and Optical Communications 2 - - 2
Prerequisites: EMWTL, AWP
Course Objectives:
 To have fundamental understanding of microwave components and circuits in terms of scattering
parameters, electrical characteristics of waveguides and transmission lines through
electromagnetic field analysis
 To expose the students to the basics of signal propagation through optical fibers, optical sources
and detectors.
CO1 Distinguish microwave frequencies and analyze Rectangular and circular wave guides.
CO2 Formulate various passive components with the help of scattering matrix
CO3 Explore different linear beam tubes
CO4 Analyze Cross field tubes and slow wave structures.
CO5 Analyze the propagation of light in optical fibers and to characterize various optical sources.
CO6 Understand the principle of various Losses, Dispersion and to characterize various Optical
Detectors.

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT-I
Introduction, Microwave Spectrum and Bands, Applications of Microwaves. Rectangular Waveguides –
TE/TM mode analysis, Cut-off Frequencies, Dominant Modes, Mode Characteristics – Phase and Group
Velocities, Wavelength and Impedance Relations; Dominant and evanescent modes; Power Transmission
and Power Losses in Rectangular Wave Guide, Related Problems.
UNIT-II
Introduction to micro strip lines, losses, Coupling Mechanisms – Probe, Loop, Aperture types.
Waveguide Discontinuities – Waveguide irises, Tuning Screws and Posts. Matched Load, Waveguide
Attenuators, Phase Shifters. Waveguide Multiport Junctions – E and H plane Tees, Magic Tee, Hybrid
Ring; Directional Couplers. Scattering Matrix– Significance, Formulation and Properties, Directional
Coupler, Magic Tee, Circulator and Isolator. Related Problems.
178
Ferrite Components: Ferrite Characteristics, Faraday rotation, Gyrator, Isolator, and Circulator
UNIT-III
Limitations and Losses of conventional tubes at microwave frequencies. Microwave tubes – O type and
M type classifications. O-type tubes: 2 Cavity Klystrons – Structure, Reentrant Cavities, Velocity
Modulation Process and Applegate Diagram, Bunching Process. O/P Power and Efficiency, Reflex
Klystrons – Structure, Applegate Diagram and Principle of working, Bunching process, Power Output,
Efficiency Electronic Admittance; Oscillating Modes and o/p Characteristics, Related Problems.
UNIT-IV
Significance, Types and Characteristics of Slow Wave Structures; Structure of TWT and Amplification
Process (qualitative treatment), Suppression of Oscillations, Gain Considerations. four propagation
constants.
M-TYPE TUBES: Introduction, Cross-field effects, Magnetrons – Different Types, 8-Cavity Cylindrical
Travelling Wave Magnetron operations and o/p characteristics. PI mode and its significance. – Hull Cut-
off Condition.
UNIT-V
Introduction, Ray Theory Transmission, Total Internal Reflection, Acceptance Angle, Numerical
Aperture, Skew Rays. Fibers- Modes, V Number, Mode Coupling, Step Index Fibers, Graded Index
Fibers. Single Mode Fibers- Cut off Wavelength, Mode Field Diameter, Effective Refractive Index.
Optical Sources: Construction and working principles of LED and LASER diaodes.
UNIT-VI
Transmission Characteristics Of Optical Fiber -Attenuation - Material Losses absorption in silica glass
fiber - Linear and Non Linear Scattering Losses - Intra and Inter-Modal Dispersion - All Over Fiber
Dispersion - Optical fiber connectors, fiber alignment and Joint Losses - Fiber Splicer - Fiber Connectors
- Expanded Beam Connectors - Fiber Couplers.
Optical Detectors: Physical principles of PIN and APD, Comparison of Photo detectors.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Microwave Devices and Circuits – Samuel Y. Liao, PHI, 3rd Edition, 1994.
2. Microwave Principles – Herbert J. Reich, J.G. Skalnik, P.F. Ordung and H.L. Krauss, CBS
Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Optical Fiber Communications – Gerd Keiser, Mc Graw-Hill International edition, 3rd Edition, 2000.
4. Micro Wave and Radar Engineering – M. Kulkarni, Umesh Publications, 1998
REFERENCES
1. Foundations for Microwave Engineering – R.E. Collin, IEEE Press, John Wiley, 2nd Edition,
2002.
2. Microwave Circuits and Passive Devices – M.L. Sisodia and G.S.Raghuvanshi, Wiley Eastern
Ltd., New Age International Publishers Ltd., 1995.
3. Microwave Engineering, Raghuvanshi G.S. , 1st edition, Cengage Learning
4. Microwave Engineering Passive Circuits – Peter A. Rizzi, PHI, 1999.
5. Electronic and Radio Engineering – F.E. Terman, McGraw-Hill, 4th ed., 1955.
179
6. Elements of Microwave Engineering – R. Chatterjee, Affiliated East-West Press Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 1988.
7. Optical Fiber Communications – John M. Senior, PHI, 2nd Edition, 2002
180
a b c d e f g h i j k L m
x x X
L T P/D C
3 - - 3
7ZC19 ENTREPRENEURSHIP, PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND STRUCTURED FINANCE
Course Objective: The objective of the course is to make students understand the nature of
Entrepreneurship, its importance and to create an awareness regarding the systematic planning and
implementation of projects; highlight the components of structured finance and establish a framework of
CMBS with respect to Servicing Agreements
Course Outcomes:
1. Students will understand the nature of Entrepreneurship and its importance

2. Will gain knowledge regarding project, its life cycle and organization
3. Will gain knowledge relating to project formulation and implementation
4. Comprehend the components of structured finance
5. Establish a framework of CMBS
6. Students will gain knowledge relating to the CRE Servicing
UNIT I
CONCEPTS OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP: Definition of Entrepreneurship, Evolution of
Entrepreneurship, Classification of Entrepreneurs, Characteristics of Entrepreneur, Selection of Product
and the means required for starting an enterprise, Financing and Financial incentives available, Success
rate of entrepreneurs – a case study.
UNIT-II
BASICS OF PROJECT MANAGEMENT: Concept and characteristics of a project - types of projects
- Objectives of project management - Project Organizational structure - Project life cycle - Challenges
and problems of project management - Qualities & functions of a project manager.
UNIT III
PROJECT FORMULATION AND IMPLEMENTATION: Generation of Project Ideas; Monitoring
the environment; Preliminary Screening of Projects; Feasibility study; Project Selection. Detailed Project
Report: Market, Technical, Financial and Economic aspects. Pre-requisites for Successful Project
Implementation; Control of in-progress Projects (Gantt chart, PERT, CPM); Project Risk Management
Process, Post-audit; Abandonment Analysis
UNIT-IV
INTRODUCTION TO STRUCTURED FINANCE: Term Loans, Bonds/Debentures, Types of
debentures, Issue of debt instruments. Structured Finance: Evolution, Securitization process,
characteristics, and structured finance products (ABS, CDO, MBS, CDS)
181
UNIT-V
COMMERCIAL MORTAGAGE LOAN BASICS: Definition and characteristics of CMBS, CMBS
Vs other Mortgage Backed Securities, CMBS three level perspective: property level, loan level, bond
level; Life cycle of commercial real estate loans – Loan cycle, Key players in loan cycle; Property types
and characteristics, property performance.
UNIT-V1
BASICS OF CRE SERVICING: Introduction to servicing, Role of the Servicer, Servicing approaches,
Influence of technology, Ethics in commercial servicing, Servicing – sources of income, Overview of
servicing agreements, Pooling & Servicing agreement, Sub servicing agreement.
References:
 H. Nandan, Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall of India, First Edition, New Delhi,
2007.
 Jeffrey K. Pinto “Project Management”, 2nd edition, Pearson
 Dhandapani Alagiri “Structured Finance – Concepts & Perspectives”, ICFAI University press.
 Projects by Prasanna Chandra, McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd
 Project Management: Systems approach to Planning Scheduling and Controlling, H. Kerzner.
 The Complete Real Estate Documents by Mazyar M. Hedayat, John J. Oleary
 The Fundamentals of Listing and Selling Commercial Real Estate - By Keim K. Loren (Author)
182
DATABASE SYSTEMS
Code: 7FC23 L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Outcomes:
 Students will learn basics of databases and understand the architecture of database management
systems.
 Students will learn about good database design techniques and database theories behind.
 Understand conceptual database designs, and functional dependencies and normalization.
 Students will understand the Mathematical foundation for relational databases.
 Student will be able to understand concept of Constraints, Views and will be able to create
dynamic databases.
 Learn transaction management, concurrency controls.
Unit – I Introduction to Databases and Transactions What is database system, purpose of database
system, view of data, relational databases, database architecture, transaction management
Unit- II Data Models The importance of data models, Basic building blocks, Business rules, The
evolution of data models, Degrees of data abstraction.
Unit-III Database Design ,ER-Diagram and Unified Modeling Language Database design and ER
Model: Overview, ER-Model, Constraints, ER-Diagrams, ERD Issues, weak entity sets, Codd’s rules,
Relational Schemas, Introduction to UML Relational database model: Logical view of data, keys,
integrity rules. Relational Database design: features of good relational database design, atomic domain
and Normalization (1NF, 2NF, 3NF, BCNF).
Unit- IV Relational Algebra and Calculus Relational algebra: introduction, Selection and
projection, set operations, renaming, Joins, Division, syntax, semantics. Operators, grouping and
ungrouping, relational comparison. Calculus: Tuple relational calculus, Domain relational Calculus,
calculus vs algebra, computational capabilities.
Unit- V Constraints, Views and SQL What is constraints, types of constrains, Integrity constraints,
Views: Introduction to views, data independence, security, updates on views, comparison between tables
and views SQL: data definition, aggregate function, Null Values, nested sub queries, Joined relations.
Triggers.
Unit-VI Transaction management and Concurrency control Transaction management: ACID properties,
serializability and concurrency control, Lock based concurrency control (2PL, Deadlocks), Time
stamping methods, optimistic methods, database recovery management.
TEXT BOOKS:
A Silberschatz, H Korth, S Sudarshan, “Database System and Concepts”, fifth Edition McGraw-Hill ,
Rob, Coronel, “Database Systems”, Seventh Edition, Cengage Le
183
x x x
L T P/D C
2 1 0 2
7ZC30 ADVANCED ENTREPRENEURSHIP

Course Objective: The course is designed to impart the necessary managerial skills and tactics required
for an emerging Entrepreneur for the Engineering students to enhance their prospects as an Entrepreneur.
Course Outcomes:
 The Students’ gain knowledge on the stages of Startup and the turbulence environment it
undergoes and the stages related to growth of the Startup.
 The Students are exposed to the various business models and critically evaluating the
effectiveness of the business models and products
 The students understand the method of business traction, create roles and build their A- team
 The students understand the various channels of revenue building and exploration of new
revenue avenues.
 The students understand the need of sales planning and people plan and also financial modeling
 The students are exposed to the legal implications affecting the company’s prospects and
identifying right mentors and advisors to support startups
Unit – I: Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship & Refining Business Model and Product:

Fundamentals and key concepts of entrepreneurship, refining the business model, products and services,
pivoting, types of business models, business model evolution, generating new business models, analyzing
the business model, adding new customer segment, product manager, significance and role of product
manager.
Unit – II: Business Planning & Exploring Revenue:
Business plan, sales plan, hiring sale team, people plan, financial planning, financial forecasting, create a
procurement plan, negotiating role play, understanding primary revenue sources, exploring customer
lifecycle for growth customers, exploring and identify secondary sources of revenue,
Unit- III: Funding the Growth & Building the A-Team:
Overview of funding, funding options for an entrepreneur, explore the right funding options, create
funding plan, pitch deck, introduction to building A-Team, pitching to attract the talent, setting your
team, defining roles, hiring the A-Team members.
Unit- IV: Brand and Channel Strategy & Leveraging Technologies:
Introduction to branding, drawn the venture’s golden circle, positioning and positioning statements,
creating brand name, logo, social media handle, Identify right channels, leaping ahead with technology,
digital marketing for startups, plan a social media campaign, digital collaboration, store documents
online, other technology platforms, make tech plan, platform wish list.
Unit V: Measuring Progress and Legal Matters:
Metrics for customer acquisition (CAC, CLV, and ARPU), metrics for customer retention and
satisfaction, find CAC, CLV and ARPU, key financial metrics, communicate metrics, new revenue
stream through key financial metrics, re-forecasting of financial plan, identify professional help for legal
and compliance requirements, searching of trademark and brand name and company name.
Unit –VI: Seeking Support and Final Project:
184
Mentors help to create successful startups, identify mentors and advisors, importance of mentors and
advisors, scout the board of directors, overview on final project, capstone project presentation, contents
of capstone project.
ESSENTIAL READINGS:
 Entrepreneurship Rajeev Roy “” oxford ,2012
 Entrepreneurship Development Khanka, ,S. Chand 2012
SUGGESTED READINGS:
 Small Scale industries and Entrepreneurship Vasanth Desai “Himalya publishing 2012
 Robert Hisrich et al “enterpreneruship TMH 2012
 Entrepreneurship Development Khanka, ,S.Chand 2012
 Entrepreneurship Development B.Janikairam and M Rizwana
 e-source: - www.learnwise.org
185
a b c d e F g h i j k L
x x x X
L T P/D C
3 - - 3
7ZC26 ECOLOGY AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT

Course Objectives:
To provide basic knowledge relating to the Ecology and Disaster Management, thus making the students
appreciate the current aspects related to both Ecology and Disaster Management.
Course outcomes:
CO1: Comprehend knowledge relating to the conservation of the environment.
CO2: Learn about bio-diversity and climatic changes occurring in the environment.
CO3: Know about the international treaties, conventions and organizations active in the field of
environmental protection.
CO4: To provide students an exposure to disasters, their significance and types.
CO5: To enhance awareness of institutional processes in the country
CO6: To gain a preliminary understanding of approaches of Disaster Risk Reduction (DRR)
Unit I ECOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT : Environment-Origin, Evolution of Environment and its

uses by Humans; Degradation of Natural Environment, Principles of Ecology; Composition and various
types of Ecosystem; International Solar Alliance.
Unit II BIO-DIVERSITY AND CLIMATE CHANGE: Classification of Biodiversity, Biodiversity

loss, Methods of biodiversity conservation, Conservation of Natural Resources such as Soil, Land, Water
and Energy. Sustainable Development and Cleaner Technology. Green house effect and Global
Warming, Strategies to cope with Green House Effect, Desertification, Depletion of ozone layer.
Unit III INTERNATIONAL TREATIES, CONVENTIONS & ORGANIZATIONS: Indian Board

for Wildlife (IBW). United Nations Environmental Programme (UNEP), United Nations Framework
Convention for Climate Change (UNFCCC). International Union for conservation of Nature and National
Resources (IUCN), World Wide Fund for Nature (WWF). Montreal Protocol (1987), Kyoto Protocol
(1997), Paris Agreement (2016).
Unit IV: INTRODUCTION TO DISASTERS: Concepts and definitions (Disaster, Hazard,

Vulnerability, Resilience, Risks) Disasters – Classification, Causes, Impacts (including social, economic,
political, environmental, health, psychosocial, etc.). Differential impacts – in terms of caste, class,
gender, age, location, disability
Unit V: DISASTER MANAGEMENT IN INDIA: Hazard and vulnerability profile of India.

Components of Disaster Relief: Water, Food, Sanitation, Shelter, Health, Waste Management;
Institutional arrangements (Mitigation, Response and Preparedness, DM Act and Policy, Other related
policies, plans, programs and legislation); Case studies.
186
Unit VI: APPROACHES TO DISASTER RISK REDUCTION: Disaster cycle – its Analysis, Phases.
Culture of safety, prevention, mitigation and preparedness; Community-based DRR: Structural and
nonstructural measures, roles and responsibilities of community, Panchayati Raj Institutions / Urban
Local Bodies (PRIs / ULBs), district administration, states, centre, and other stakeholders; Case studies.
ESSENTIAL READINGS:
 Environment and Ecology – Anil Kumar De and Arnab Kumar De, 2009, New Age International (P)
Limited.
 B. K. Khanna: “Disasters: All you wanted to know about”, New India Publishing Agency, New Delhi
 Amita sinvhal ,”Understanding earthquake disasters”TMH,2010
SUGGESTED READINGS:
 ICSE Environment Education for Class X – Dr. M.P. Mishra , 2009, S.Chand and Company
 Pradeep sanhi,Madhavi malalgoda and arya bandhu,”Diasaster risk reduction in south asia “PHI
187
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M
Open Elective -II

IV-I 7CC38 Communications Théory 3 - - 3
Prerequisites: PTSP, SS, AC
Course Objectives:
 To provide both the theory and practice of digital communication including signal design,
modulation methods, demodulation methods and their performance evaluation.
 To make the learners understand concept and applications of various source coding to maximize
the channel capacity and error control coding techniques for providing reliable
communications.
CO Demonstrate the principle of converting analog signal to digital by using PCM, DM,ADM
1 systems.
CO Explore baseband transmission and optimal reception of digital signals using different filters
2 and M-ary Error Probabilities.
CO Design and compare ASK,PSK,FSK,DPSK,QPSK modulators and demodulators .
3
CO Demonstrate the concepts of information theory , source coding techniques ,channel capacity
4 and can find channel capacity and coding efficiency.
CO Demonstrate encoding and decoding techniques of different channel coding techniques like
5 ,block codes, cyclic codes, convolutional codes.
CO Explore the knowledge on different types of spread sprectrum modulation
6 techniques,DSSS,FHSS,CDMA and PN sequence.and OFDM

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT I
188
INTRODUCTION TO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

Communication systems,, Analog and digital signals, Historical review of telecommunication, Channel
effect, Noise in communication system, Internal noise and External noise, Introduction to modulation and
detection, Need for modulation.
UNIT II
AMPLITUDE MODULATION
Amplitude Modulation- Generation of AM Waves: Square Law Modulator, Detection of AM Waves:
Envelope Detector, Double sideband suppressed carrier and single sideband modulation, Generation and
Detection of DSB-SC and SSB-SC signals, Comparison of AM techniques, Commercial Applications of
AM.
UNIT-III
ANGLE MODULATION
Types of Angle Modulation, Frequency modulation-Narrowband FM and wideband FM, Time domain
representation of FM and PM, Relationship between FM and PM signals, Generation of FM signals,
Detection of FM signals , Comparison of FM & AM, Commercial Applications of FM,PM.
UNIT-IV
ELEMENTS OF DIGITAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
Model of Digital Communication Systems, Advantages of digital communication systems, Digital
Representation of Analog signal, Sampling Theorem.
PULSE ANALOG MODULATION:
PAM generation and demodulation, PWM, PPM, Comparison of analog pulse modulations.
UNIT-V
PULSE CODE MODULATION:
PCM Generation and Reconstruction, Quantization Noise, Non uniform Quantization and Companding,
DPCM, DM, Noise in DM, ADM.
UNIT-VI
DIGITAL MODULATION TECHNIQUES
Introduction, Amplitude Shift Keying, ASK transmitter and receiver, Frequency Shift Keying, FSK
transmitter and receiver, Phase Shift Keying, BPSK, Coherent PSK Detection, DPSK,QPSK,
Comparison of Digital modulation systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. B. P. Lathi, Modern Analog and Digital Communication, 3rd Ed., Oxford University Press
2. K. Sam Shanmugham, Digital and Analog Communication Systems, John Wiley & Sons
3. Simon Haykin, Digital communications -, John Wiley, 2005
4. H. Taub and D. Schilling, Principles of Communication Systems –, TMH, 2003
5. A. Bruce Carlson, & Paul B. Crilly, “Communication Systems – An Introduction to Signals & Noise
in Electrical Communication”, McGraw-Hill International Edition, 5th Edition, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. John Proakis, Digital Communications –, TMH, 1983.
2. Singh & Sapre, Communication Systems Analog & Digital –, TMH, 2004.
3. Sklar: Digital Communication, 2nd Ed., Pearson Education
4. “Digital Communications”, J.S Chitode, Technical publication, Pune.
189
7AC44 FUNDAMENTALS OF MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTATION

L T P C
3 - - 3
x x x x x
Course Objective:
The basic principles of all measuring instruments and in measurement of electrical and non-electrical
parameters viz., Resistance, Inductance, Capacitance, voltage, current Power factor, Power, Energy,
Strain, Temperature, Torque, Displacement etc. and the different types of electrical and non electrical
transducers. It introduces the different signal analyzers and oscilloscopes.
Course Outcomes
The student should be able to
1. Understand the principle of operation of different types of instruments viz., PMMC, moving
iron type of instruments, the required characteristics of an instrument in general. The student
demonstrates the ability to compensate for the errors in the instruments and to extend the
range of the instruments.
2. Demonstrates the knowledge of Potential and Current transformers; the errors in them and
the effect of having an open/short in the secondary circuits; Understand the principle of
operation of Dynamometer and Moving-iron type of Power factor meters.
3. Comprehends the principle of operation of dynamometer type of Wattmeter and Induction
type of Energy meter; use the wattmeter to measure the Active and Reactive power and
demonstrates the ability to extend the range of them.
4. Identify and use different techniques of measurement of Resistance, Inductance and
Capacitance values.
5. Understand the principle of operation of Different type of digital voltmeters, wave analyzers,
spectrum analyzers and Cathode ray Oscilloscope.
6. Demonstrates the ability in characterizing the different types of transducers and uses them to
measure Strain, Gauge Sensitivity, Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration, Force, Torque and
Temperature.
UNIT-I MEASURING INSTRUMENTS- INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:

Significance of Measurement, static characteristic of system- Linearity, Sensitivity, Precision, Accuracy -
Classification - Deflecting, Control and Damping torques, Ammeters and Voltmeters, PMMC, Moving
iron type instruments, Expression for the Deflecting torque and Control torque, Errors and
Compensations, Extension of range using Shunts and Series resistance.
UNIT –II: INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS

Introduction, advantages, burden of instrument transformer, Current Transformer - errors in current
transformer, Effect of secondary open circuit, Potential transformer- errors in potential transformer,
Testing of current transformers with silsbee’s method.
Power Factor Meters: Type of P.F. Meters, Dynamometer and Moving iron type, 1- ph and 3-ph meters.
UNIT –III MEASUREMENT OF POWER& ENERGY:

Single phase dynamometer wattmeter-LPF and UPF-Double element and three element dynamometer
wattmeter, Expression for deflecting and control torques, Extension of range of wattmeter using
instrument transformers, Measurement of active and reactive powers in balanced and unbalanced
190
systems, Single phase induction type energy meter, Driving and braking torques, Testing by phantom
loading, Three phase energy meter .
UNIT - IV MEASUREMENT OF RESISTANCE - MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS- A.C.

BRIDGES:
Principle and operation of D.C. Crompton’s potentiometer, Standardization, Measurement of unknown
resistance, current, voltage. Method of measuring low- Medium and High resistance, sensitivity of
Wheatstone’s bridge, Carey Foster’s bridge, Kelvin’s double bridge for measuring low resistance,
Measurement of high resistance, loss of charge method, Measurement of inductance, Quality Factor,
Maxwell’s bridge, Hay’s bridge, Anderson’s bridge, Owen’s bridge. Measurement of capacitance and
loss angle, Desauty Bridge, Wien’s bridge, Schering Bridge.
UNIT-V DIGITAL VOLTMETERS- SIGNAL ANALYZERS- CRO:

Digital voltmeters, Successive approximation, Ramp, Dual slope integration continuous balance type,
Wave Analyzers, Frequency selective analyzers, Heterodyne, Application of Wave analyzers,
Harmonic Analyzers, Total Harmonic distortion, spectrum analyzers, Basic spectrum analyzers, Spectral
displays, Q meter and RMS voltmeters . CRO- Cathode Ray Tube (CRT), Screens, Probes, Applications
of CRO, Measurement of frequency and phase using CRO, Block diagram.
UNIT-VI MEASUREMENT OF NON-ELECTRICAL QUANTITIES:

Transducers - Classification of transducers, Advantages of Electrical transducers, Characteristics and
choice of transducers, Principle operation of Resistor, Inductor, LVDT and Capacitor transducers,
LVDT Applications, Strain gauge and its principle of operation, Guage factor- Thermistors,
Thermocouples, Piezo electric transducers, Photovoltaic, Photo conductive cells. Measurement of
strain, Gauge Sensitivity, Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration, Force, Torque, Measurement of
Temperature.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Electrical Measurements and measuring Instruments – E.W. Golding and F.C. Widdis, 5 th
Edition, Wheeler Publishing.
2. Transducers and Instrumentation– D.V.S Murthy, Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition.
3. A course in Electrical and Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation -A.K. Sawhney,
Dhanpatrai & Co. 18th Edition.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Measurements Systems, Applications and Design – D O Doeblin- Tata MC Graw-Hill.
2. Principles of Measurement and Instrumentation – A.S Morris, Pearson /Prentice Hall of India.
3. Electronic Instrumentation- H.S.Kalsi Tata MC Graw – Hill Edition, 3 rd Edition.
4. Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement techniques – A.D Helfrick and
W.D.Cooper, Pearson/Prentice Hall of India.
191
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATIONS RESEARCH

Code: 7BC53
Course Objectives:
The course aims at building capabilities in the students for analyzing different situations in the industrial/
business scenario involving limited resources and finding the optimal solution within constraints.
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Formulate and solve mathematical model (linear programming problem) for a physical situations
like production, distribution of goods and economics.
CO2: Recognize and Solve the problem of transportation involving a large number of shipping routes
with least transportation cost and generate optimal assignment strategy for different situations
CO4: Use Johnson’s rule to create the optimal sequencing schedule for a sequencing problem and make
decisions about replacing an item using replacement policy
CO5: Analyze the performance measures of Queing system and Calculate the EOQ for minimizing the
total inventory cost
CO6: Apply simulation techniques for solving various types of problems and general idea development
about Markov chains
UNIT – I
INTRODUCTION: Definition, Characteristics and Phases and Types of models, applications.
LINEAR PROGRAMMING PROBLEM- Formulation – Graphical solution, Simplex method-Types
of variables, Unique and Multiple optimal solution, Redundancy & Degeneracy in LPP, Unbounded
solution, Artificial variables techniques - Big-M method with feasible and infeasible solutions, Two–
phase method, Primal to Dual formation with Duality Principle.
UNIT – II
TRANSPORTATION PROBLEM – Formulation – methods of finding initial solution (NW corner,
VAM, Least cost Method) Optimal solution (Stepping stone Method, MODI method) Special cases in
TP: unbalanced, Degeneracy, Restriction and maximization case.
ASSIGNMENT PROBLEM – Formulation – Optimal solution (Hungarian Method) - Variants of
Assignment Problem-Unbalanced, Restriction, Maximization, Airlines layover case, Traveling Salesman
problem.
UNIT – III
SEQUENCING – Introduction – Terminology, Assumptions, Johnson’s procedure- Processing n jobs
through two machines – Processing n jobs through three machines – Processing two jobs through ‘m’
machines (Gantt Chart).
REPLACEMENT: Introduction – Types of failure, Replacement of items that deteriorate with time –
when money value is not counted and counted – Replacement of items that fail completely, Group
replacement.
UNIT – IV
THEORY OF GAMES: Introduction and Terminologies, Criterion and optimal strategy – Solution of
games with saddle points: Mixed Strategies-Rectangular games without saddle points, Dominance
principle, Average Relational Dominance, m X 2 & 2 X n games -Graphical method and Sub Game
Method, Matrix Method, Application of LPP in game theory.
UNIT – V
WAITING LINES: Introduction, Terminology, Structure of a queue, calling population characteristics-
size, behavior, pattern of arrivals, Kendall-Lee notation, Queuing Models: Single Channel: Poisson
192
arrivals: exponential service times: with finite and infinite population, Multichannel: Poisson arrivals:
exponential service times with infinite population
INVENTORY : Introduction, Inventory costs, Concept of EOQ, Single item Deterministic models with
and without shortages, Single item inventory models with one price break and multiple price breaks,
Stochastic models – Instantaneous demand and no set up cost.
UNIT – VI
SIMULATION: Definition – Types of simulation – phases of simulation– applications of simulation –
Inventory and Queuing problems – Advantages and Disadvantages
Markov chains: Introduction to Markov chains, Analysis Assumptions, Input output probabilities,
Applications (Only basic understanding)
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Operations research / Hira & Gupta
2. Operation Research /J.K.Sharma/Macmillan Publishers.
REFERENCES:
1. Quantitative Techniques in Management: N D Vohra, TMH
193
Department of Mechanical Engineering

PRINCIPALS OF MANUFACTURING PROCESSES
Code: 7BC52
Course Objective:
The main objective of the course how manufacturers use technology to change raw materials into
finished products, also introduce the basic concepts of casting, pattern preparation, gating system and
knowledge on basic features of various welding and cutting processes, and also to study the concepts of
press working process and their applications.
Course Outcomes:
After the end of the course the students should have an:
 Ability to understand the need for manufacturing processes and various material properties
 Ability to understand the principle of casting, Patterns used, Pattern allowance and Gating
systems used in casting, and various casting methods
 Ability to understand the basic principle of welding and distinguish between various welding
types and their applications
 Ability to understand the principles of metal working, various types of metal working techniques,
Knowledge of hot working and cold working, Ability to understand the bulk deformation
processes of rolling,
 Ability to understand the bulk deformation processes of extrusion and forging, their applications
and forces involved in these operations
 Ability to understand and distinguish the various press working operations with respect to their
applications, advantages and disadvantages, understand the various types of plastics and their
processing techniques
UNIT – I
Introduction: Concept of Manufacturing processes, its importance, classification of manufacturing
processes, Selection of a manufacturing process
Engineering Properties and their measurement: Strength, Hardness, ductility, Toughness
Unit-II
CASTING: Advantage of casting and its applications, Casting terms Sand casting procedure, Patterns –
Definition- uses- Types of patterns – Materials used for patterns, pattern allowances, Principles of Gating
& Risers, Cores-Definition-Need-Method of making,
Special casting processes: Centrifugal, Die, Investment - Principle and Applications
UNIT – III
Metal Fabrication Processes: Introduction, classification
Welding: Classification of welding process types of welded joints
Electric Arc welding: Principle of AC & DC welding, Electrodes, Applications,
Inert Gas welding: TIG & MIG, Principle and Applications, Resistance welding: Principle, Spot welding
& Seam welding Friction welding, Thermit welding Explosive welding
Gas welding and Cutting: Principle, Oxy – Acetylene welding equipment and Technique Soldering &
Brazing. Heat affected zones in welding; welding defects – causes and remedies
UNIT – IV
194
Metal forming Process: Nature of plastic deformation, Advantages of mechanical working processes,
classification - Recovery, Recrystallization and Grain growth, Hot working and cold working-
Characteristics and Differences
Rolling: Rolling fundamentals – Terminology of rolled products, theory of rolling, types of Rolling
mills
UNIT - V
Forging: Forging operations,Smith forging, Drop Forging, Machine forging– forging defects.
EXTRUSION: Extrusion principle, Hot extrusion and cold extrusion - Forward extrusion and
backward extrusion – Impact extrusion, Hydrostatic extrusion.
Wire drawing, Tube drawing and Swaging
UNIT- VI
Sheet Metal Operations: Press operations, Shearing actionStamping, forming and other cold working
processes: Blanking and piercing, Bending and forming, coining & Embossing, spinning Stretch forming,
Types of presses and press tools (Brief treatment)
Plastics: Processing methods: Blow moulding, Compression moulding and Injection moulding
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Manufacturing Technology / P.N. Rao/TMH
2. Production Technology /Sarma P C
REFERENCES :
1. Manufacturing Engineering and Technology/Kalpakjian S/ Pearson Edu.
195
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M
Year/Sem Sub. Code Subject Name (Professional Elective-II) L T P/D C

IV-I 7C719 CMOS Digital IC Design 3 - - 3
PRE-REQUISITES:
A Course on Digital IC Applications and VLSI Design
COURSE DESCRIPTION:
History and overview. Integrated Circuit (IC) technology developments. Design styles and characteristics
of CMOS digital circuits.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1: Demonstrate advanced knowledge in the MOS Design
Static and dynamic characteristics of CMOS to design and to develop the Digital Integreated Circuits for
different Applications. • The concepts of Semiconductor Memories, Flash Memory, RAM array
organization.
CO2: Analyze complex engineering problems critically in the domain of CMOSDigital Integrated
Circuits for conducting research.
CO3: Solve engineering problems for feasible and optimal solutions in the corearea of CMOS Digital
ICs.
CO4: Apply the CMOS Digital IC concepts for usage of modern CAD tools andtheir Limitations.
The student will be able to understand the MOS Design. • In this course, students can study
Combinational MOS Logic Circuits and Sequential MOS Logic Circuits. • Another main object of this
course is to motivate the graduate studentsto design and to develop the Digital Integreated Circuits for
different Applications.
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
DETAILED SYLLABUS:
UNIT-I: MOS Design
History and overview. Integrated Circuit (IC) technology developments.
Pseudo NMOS Logic – Inverter, Inverter threshold voltage, Rise time, Fall time, Pseudo NMOS logic
gates, Transistor equivalency, CMOS Inverter logic.
UNIT-II: Combinational MOS Logic Circuits:
MOS logic circuits with NMOS loads, Primitive CMOS logic gates – NOR & NAND gate,Complex
Logic circuits design – Realizing Boolean expressions using NMOS gates and CMOSgates , AOI and
OIA gates, CMOS full adder, CMOS transmission gates, Designing withTransmission gates.
UNIT-III: Sequential MOS Logic Circuits
196
Behaviour of bistable elements, SR Latch, Clocked latch and flip flop circuits, CMOS D latchand edge
triggered flip-flop.
UNIT-IV: Dynamic Logic Circuits
Basic principle, Voltage Bootstrapping, Synchronous dynamic pass transistor circuits, DynamicCMOS
transmission gate logic, High performance Dynamic CMOS circuits.
UNIT-V: Semiconductor Memories
Types, RAM array organization, DRAM – Types, Operation, Leakage currents in DRAM celland refresh
operation, SRAM operation Leakage currents in SRAM cells, Flash Memory- NORflash and NAND
flash.
UNIT VI: DESIGN METHODOLOGY AND TOOLS
Introduction, Structured Design Strategies, Design Methods, Design Flows,Design Economics, Data
Sheets and Documentation.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Digital Integrated Circuit Design – Ken Martin, Oxford University Press, 2011.
2. CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits Analysis and Design – Sung-Mo Kang, YusufLeblebici, TMH, 3rd
Ed., 2011.
3. CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits And Systems Perspective, 3/E Weste, Weste Neil H.E. Pearson
Education India.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Introduction to VLSI Systems: A Logic, Circuit and System Perspective – Ming-BO Lin,CRC Press,
2011
2. Digital Integrated Circuits – A Design Perspective, Jan M. Rabaey,AnanthaChandrakasan,
BorivojeNikolic, 2nd Ed., PHI.
3. Eugene D Fabricus, “Introduction to VLSI Design, “McGraw Hill International Edition, 1990.
197
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M
Year/Se Sub. Code Subject Name (Professional Elective-II) L T P/ C

m D
IV-I 7C720 Embedded Python Programming 3 - - 3
A b C d e f g h i j k l m
x X x x x x x x
Course Outcomes:
CO1: Gains exposure towards Python versions and their specifications.
CO2: Build programs using primitive data types.
CO3: Construct and use data structures for various applications
CO4: Write applications that include functions, modules, packages along with respective
exceptional handling mechanism.
CO5: Write applications using Files – access and mnipulate
CO6: Write applications using OO features of Python
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Unit -I:Introduction to Python

Why Pyhton, History, Features, Modes of Execution, Setting up path, working with Python Basic
Syntax, Variable and Data Types, Operators. Conditional Statements (If, If- else, Nested if-else)
Unit-II: Control Statements I/O, and String
Control Statements: Looping (for, While Nested loops) Control Statements (Break, Continue,
Pass).
Input-Output: Printing on screen, Reading data from keyboard
String Manipulation: String literals, Accessing Strings, Characters and Substrings in Strings, Basic
Operations, String slices, Concatenation
Unit-III: Lists, Tuples and Dictionaries

Lists: Accessing list, Operations, Working with lists Function and Methods
Tuple: Accessing tuples, Operations, Working.
Dictionaries: Accessing values in dictionaries, working with dictionaries, Properties Functions
and Methods.
Unit-IV:
198
File Handling: Introduction to Files, File I/O - Opening & Closing files, Accessing and
manipulating Files - Read, Write and Append to files, data/time operations, Working with File
Structure, Directories, HandlingDirectories
Unit-V: Functions and Modules
Functions: Function and Methods Defining a function, calling a function, Types of
functions, Function Arguments, Anonymous functions, Global and local variables
Modules: Importing module,Math module, Random module, Packages
Exception Handling: Exception, Exception Handling, Except clause
Unit-VI:Classes and Objects

Basics of Object-Oriented Analysis and Design, Structuring Classes with Inheritance and
Polymorphism, Overloading Overriding, Datahiding.
Regular expressions: Match function, Search function, Matching VS Searching, Modifiers
Patterns.
Familiarization with Python packages -JSON, XML, HTTPLib, URLLib, SMTPLib
TEXT BOOK:
1. [Beginning Python. From Novice to Professional, 2nd ed. - [Hetland] (2008)
2. Fundamentals of Python: First Programs, Kenneth A. Lambert, Cengage Publisher, ISBN-10: 1-
111-82270-0 (2012)
Reference books:
1. Introduction to Computation and Programming using Python, Revised and Expanded Edition,
John V. Guttag, The MIT Press.
2. Programming Python, Fourth Edition by Mark Lutz, O'Relly
3. Python Programming using problem solving approach, Reema Thareja, Oxford Higher
Education.
199
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M
Year/Se Sub. Subject Name (Professional Elective-II) L T P/ C

m Code D
7C72
IV-I DSP Processors and Architectures 3 - - 3
1
A B c d e f g h i j k l m
X X x x x
Course Objectives:
 To study the architecture of Digital Signal Processors and Interfacing of processor to I/O
devices
CO1 Understand the concepts of DFT,FFT digital filters
CO2 Illustrate the concepts of Computational Accuracy in DSP Implementations
CO3 Explain the Architectures for Programmable DSP Devices:
CO4 Explain Programmable Digital Signal Processors
CO5 Distinguish Analog Devices Family of DSP Devices .
CO6 Illustrate Interfacing Memory and I/O Peripherals to Programmable DSP Devices

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT I
Introduction to DSP Processors: Differences between DSP and other p architectures, their comparison
and need for special ASPs, RISC & CISC CPUs .
UNIT II
Overview of DSP processor design: fixed point DSPs– Architecture of TMS 320C 5X, C54X Processors
, addressing modes, Assembly instructions, Pipelining and on-chip peripherals. Floating point DSPs:
Architecture of TMS 320 – IX.
UNIT III
Data formats, F.P. operations, addressing modes, instructions, pipelining and peripherals.
200
UNIT IV
DSP interfacing & software development tools: I/O interfacing with A/D converters, PCs, Dual port
RAMS, EPGAs,
UNIT V
DSP tools – Assembler, debugger, c-compiler, linker, editor, code composer studio.
UNIT VI
Applications using DSPs adaptive filtering, spectrum analysis, Echo cancellation modems, voice
synthesis and recognition. Brief ideas of AD, Motorola DSP CPUs and their comparison with TI CPU S.
SUGGESTED READING:
1. C. Marren & G. Ewess, “A Simple Approach to Digital Signal Processing”, WILEY Inter-science,
1996.
2. K. Shin, “DSP Applications with TMS 320 Family”, Prentice Hall, 1987.
3. B. Ventakaramani, M. Bhaskar, “Digital Signal Processes, Architecture Processing and
Applications”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2002.
201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M
Year/Sem Sub. Code Subject Name (Professional Elective-II) L T P/D C

IV-I 7CC22 Wireless Communications and Networks 3 - - 3
A b c d e f g h i j k l m
x x x x x x x x x x
Prerequisites: CMC
Course objectives:
 To provide an overview of Wireless Communication networks area and its applications in
communication engineering.
 To appreciate the contribution of Wireless Communication networks to overall technological
growth.
 To understand the various terminology, principles, devices, schemes, concepts, algorithms and
different methodologies used in Wireless Communication Networks.
CO1 Explain wireless communication systems and Modern wireless communication systems with
examples.
CO2 Characterise Multiple Access Techniques for Wireless Communication and calculate capacity
of cellular systems.
CO3 Explain Traffic routing in wireless networks, Wireless data services, Common channel
signaling.
CO4 Describe about Mobile IP And Wireless Access Protocol
CO5 Develop different Wireless LAN protocols
CO6 Define About Fundamentals Of 3G Services, Its Protocols And Applications.

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Syllabus Content
UNIT-I
Introduction to Wireless Communication Systems: Evolution of mobile radio communications,
Examples of wireless communication systems, Paging systems, Cordless telephone systems, Comparison
of various wireless systems.
202
Modern wireless communication systems: Second generation cellular networks, Third generation
wireless networks, Wireless in local loop, Wireless LAN, Bluetooth and PAN.
UNIT- II
Multiple Access Techniques for Wireless Communication: Introduction to multiple access, FDMA,
TDMA, Spread spectrum multiple access, Space division multiple access, Packet Radio, Capacity of
cellular systems.
UNIT-III
Wireless Networking: Differences between wireless and fixed telephone networks, Development of
wireless networks, Fixed network transmission hierarchy, Traffic routing in wireless networks, Wireless
data services, Common channel signaling.
UNIT- IV
Mobile IP And Wireless Access Protocol: Mobile IP: IP Packet Delivery, Agent Discovery, Tunneling
And Encapsulation, IPV6-Network Layer In The Internet- Mobile IP Session Initiation Protocol WAP
Architecture-overview, WML scripts, WAP service, WAP session protocol, Wireless transaction,
Wireless datagram protocol.
UNIT- V
Wireless LAN: Introduction-WLAN Technologies: Infrared, UHF Narrowband, Spread Spectrum
-IEEE802.11: System Architecture, Protocol Architecture, Physical Layer, MAC Layer, 802.11b,
802.11a – Hiper LAN: WATM, BRAN, HiperLAN2 – Bluetooth: Architecture, Radio Layer, Baseband
Layer, Link Manager Protocol, Security – IEEE802.16-WIMAX: Physical Layer, MAC, Spectrum
Allocation For WIMAX, Introduction to OFDM, Blue tooth protocol Architecture.
UNIT- VI
Wireless WAN: Overview Of UTMS Terrestrial Radio Access Network-UMTS Core Network
Architecture: 3G-MSC, 3G-SGSN, 3G-GGSN, SMS-GMSC/SMS-IWMSC, Firewall, DNS/DHCP-High
Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA)- LTE Network Architecture And Protocol.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Theodore S. Rappaport, “Wireless Communications and applications”, Pearson Education -2003.
2. Kaveh Pahlavan, Prashant Krishna Murthy, “Principles of Wireless networks”, Pearson
Education, 2002.
3. Jochen Schiller, ”Mobile Communications”, Second Edition, Pearson Education 2012. (Unit IV,
V)
4. Vijay Garg , “Wireless Communications And Networking”, First Edition, Elsevier 2007.(Unit VI)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. P.Nicopolitidis, M.S.Obaidat, G.I.Papadimitria, A.S. Pomportsis, “Wireless Networks”, John
wily & sons, 2003.
2. Dr. Sunil kumar, S.manvi, M.S.Kakkasageri, ”Wireless and Mobile Networks, Concepts and
Protocols”, Wiley India, 2010.
3. Jon W.Mark and W.Zhqung , “ Wireless Communication and Networking “, PHI, 2005.
203
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M
Year/Sem Sub. Code PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE-II L T P/D C

IV-I 7C723 Digital Design and Verification with System 3 - - 3
Verilog
Course Description:
This course gives a student an in-depth introduction to the main SystemVerilog enhancements to the
Verilog hardware description language (HDL), discusses the benefits of the new features, and
demonstrates how design and verification can be more efficient and effective when using SystemVerilog
constructs.
The course is broken down into two modules: The Design module examines improvements for RTL
design and synthesis; the Verification module explores verification enhancements such as object-oriented
design, assertions and randomization.
Prerequisites:
 A working knowledge of Verilog HDL
 The ability to navigate a file system and use a text editor
 A basic understanding of digital hardware design and verification
Course Outcomes
CO Understand the UVM concepts
1
CO Explore the class instances and functions
2
CO Comprehend the UVM Configurations
3
CO Analyzing UVM sequences and Modeling in UVM
4
CO Developing Reusable Test benches using UVM
5
CO Analyzing the Case studies of Layered test bench for SPI, APB and AXI.
6

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Syllabus Contents:
Unit-1 : Introduction to Functional Verification: What is Verification?, What do we verify?,
Verification Abstractions, Behavioral level, Transaction level, Functional / RTL level, Gate level,
Transaction level; Importance of (Functional) Verification in Chip design life cycle, Verification goals;
204
Overview of various Functional Verification techniques: Simulations, FPGA Prototyping, Emulation,

HW/SW Co-verification, Formal Verification, Semiformal Verification, Models of Functional
Verification. Black box, White box, Gray box, Verification Hierarchy: Chip-level, Cluster / Subsystem
level, IP level, Module / Unit level.
Unit- 2 : Overview of SoC Architectures and Functional Verification Environment: What is an SoC ?,
Advantages of SoCs over conventional ASICs?, Typical components of an SoCs, Sample SoC
Architectures, Typical SoC based Testbench environment , Stimuli Generators, Hard coded, Direct
Stimuli from the environment, Stimuli from the model of the environment (BFMs), Random Stimuli
Generation; Predictors: Golden/Reference Model, More Abstract (Functional, Transaction Level),
Hardwired response, Response database; Transactors, Monitors , Scoreboards , Coverage Collectors -
Coverpoints, Property Checkers - Assertions.
Unit-3 :SystemVerilog Language Concepts: Evolution of SystemVerilog : Differences between Verilog

and System Verilog HDL, New features added in System Verilog (New Data type additions, Arrays -
Fixed, Packed, Dynamic, Queues, Associated, Structures & Unions, New Operators, New additions to
Subroutines, New additions to Procedural statements & Control flow, Concurrency: Fork.join,
Fork..join_any, Fork..join_none, Automatic Variables, Interfaces, Program block);
Unit-4 : Object Oriented Programming Concepts-I: Classes : Encapsulating properties & methods,
Object memory creation, Working with Object handles, Object copying : Shallow and Deep copy, Object
cloning, Object protection, Object variables Vs Class variables: Static keyword, Object Randomization,
Randomization Seed - A deep look, Randomization variables, Constraint Block, Weighted
Randomization, Controlling Randomization, Solve order, Inline Constraints - with constraints, Object
Inheritance, Limitations of Inheritance, Polymorphism and Methods overriding ,
Unit-5: Object Oriented Programming Concepts-II: Virtual Interfaces, Inter thread Synchronization &
Communication: Events, Semaphores, Mailboxes, Packages, Assertions, Immediate assertions,
Procedural assertions, Temporal operators, Boolean operators, Sequences, Properties, Functional
Coverage: Cover points & Bins, Covergroups, Cross coverage, Sampling coverpoints, Calculating
functional coverage, Interfacing with C - DPI, Compiler Directives.
Unit-6 : Advanced Testbench Design using SystemVerilog: Introduction to Layered testbench,

architecture, Driver, Monitor, Transactor, Generator, Configurations - Device, Transaction, Scoreboard,
Reference models, Bus function models.
Textbooks:
1. SystemVerilog For Verification: A Guide to Learning the Testbench Language Features by Chris
Spear & Greg Tumbush (3rd Edition/5th Edition).
2. A Practical Guide For SystemVerilog Assertions by Srikanth Vijayaraghavan & Meyyappan
Ramanathan.
Reference Books:
1. A Practical Guide For SystemVerilog Assertions by Srikanth Vijayaraghavan & Meyyappan
Ramanathan.
2. Logic Design and verification using System Verilog by Donald Thomas
205
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M
Year/Sem Sub. Code Subject Name (Professional Elective-III) L T P/D C

IV-I 7C724 Embedded System Design 3 - - 3
a b c d e f g h i j k
X X X X X
On completion of this course you should be able to:

1. Understand the basic architecture of Embedded System and their classification.
2. Explore the architecture of ARM processor.
3. Understand the addressing modes and data processing instructions of ARM processor.
4. Understand the ARM thumb instruction set and its capabilities.
5. Use both assembly and C language based ARM programming.
6. Explore the memory management techniques in ARM.
7. Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT-I
Introduction to embedded system:
Embedded system architecture, classifications of embedded systems, challenges and design issues in
embedded systems, fundamentals of embedded processor and microcontrollers, CISC vs. RISC,
fundamentals of VonNeuman/Harvard architectures, types of microcontrollers, selection of
microcontrollers.
UNIT –II:
ARM Architecture:
ARM Design Philosophy, Registers, Program Status Register, Instruction Pipeline, Interrupts and Vector
Table, Architecture Revision, ARM Processor Families.
UNIT –III:
ARM Programming Model – I:
Instruction Set: Data Processing Instructions, Addressing Modes, Branch, Load, Store Instructions, PSR
Instructions, Conditional Instructions.
UNIT –IV:
ARM Programming Model – II:
206
Thumb Instruction Set: Register Usage, Other Branch Instructions, Data Processing Instructions, Single-
Register and Multi Register Load-Store Instructions, Stack, Software Interrupt Instructions
UNIT –V:
ARM Programming:
Simple C Programs using Function Calls, Pointers, Structures, Integer and Floating Point Arithmetic,
Assembly Code using Instruction Scheduling, Register Allocation, Conditional Execution and Loops.
UNIT –VI:
Memory Management:
Cache Architecture, Polices, Flushing and Caches, MMU, Page Tables, Translation, Access Permissions,
Context Switch.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. ARM Systems Developer’s Guides- Designing & Optimizing System Software – Andrew N.
Sloss, Dominic Symes, Chris Wright, 2008, Elsevier.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Embedded Microcomputer Systems, Real Time Interfacing – Jonathan W. Valvano – Brookes / Cole,
1999, Thomas Learning.
207
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M

IV-I 7C725 Artificial Neural Networks 3 - - 3
A B c d e f G h i j k l m
X X x x x
Course Objectives:
 To study the concepts of Artificail intelligence and computer vision and also the applications of
Neural networks
CO1 Understand the concepts of Artificail Intelligence

CO2 Illustrate the concepts of Artificial Neural sysystem
CO3 Llustrate computer vision
CO4 Explain Probabilistic models and neural networks
CO5 Illustrate concept Neural language
CO6 Explain applications of Neural networks

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT - I
Artificial Intelligence: Definition, Study of AI techniques, problems and Problems space, AI
characteristics, Heuristics. Problem solving Methods: Forward and backward reasoning, problem trees,
problem graph, hill climbing, search method, problem reduction, constraint satisfaction, means and
analysis, game playing, mini max algorithms, alphabetic heuristics.
UNIT - II:
Introduction:
Introduction to ANS (Artificial Neural systems) Technology, ANS simulation, Types of Neural
Networks: Hopfield, perceptron and related models, Adaline and Madaline: Adaline and the Adaptive
Linear Combiner, the Madaline and simulating the Adaline. Essential vector operations, Lateral
Inhibition and Sensory Processing.
UNIT - III
Computer Vision:
208
Perception, early processing, representation and recognition of scenes, Guzman‟s algorithms of spurting
objects in a scene, Waltz algorithm.
UNIT - IV:
Probabilistic Models, Fuzzy ARTMAP and Recurrent Networks:-Probabilistic Neural Networks, General
Regression Neural Networks, Fuzzy ARTMAP, Recurrent Back propagation Neural Networks, Hybrid
Learning Neural Networks:-Counter propagation Network, Radial basis Function Networks.
UNIT - V
Neural Language understanding problems, syntactic analysis, semantic analysis, augmented transition
networks.
UNIT - VI
Application of Neural Networks:- Design and optimization of Systems: Non-Linear optimization, Inverse
design
problems, Pattern Recognition Applications: Control Chart pattern Recognition, Recognition of Machine-
Cells in a group technology layout. Complex pattern Recognition tasks: Pattern mapping, Temporal
patters, pattern variability, Neocognitron, Addition of lateral inhibition and Feedback to the
Neocognitron.
SUGGESTED READING:
1. Elaine Rich, Artificial Intelligence, Mc Graw Hill, 1985. 2. Nilson, Principles of Artificial
Intelligence. 3. Winston, The Psychology of Computer.
2. Nilson, Principles of Artificial Intelligence. 3. Winston, The Psychology of Computer.
3. James A. Freeman and David M. Skapura,Neural Networks; Algorithms Applications and
Programming Techniques, Pearson Education, India,2008.
4. James A. Anderson ,An introduction to Neural Networks ,PHI,2003.
5. B.Yegnanarayana,Artificial Neural Networks, PHI Publications India,2006.
6. M.Ananda Rao and J.Srinivas, Neural Networks: Algorithms and Applications, Narosa
Publications 2009.
209
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M

IV-I 7C726 Software defined radio 3 - - 3
A B C d e f G h i j k L m
X X X x x x
Prerequisites: Signals & Systems, Analog Communications, Digital Communications.
Course Objectives
1. This course describes the fundamental radio components and how these components are
implemented in software.
2. The principles of software architecture to support the SDR will be developed. Policy and
cooperation mechanisms that enable SDR to interoperate will be developed.
3. Basic principles of Cognitive Radio (CR) which is an extended form of SDR will be introduced.
4. In this course you will study SDR & CR and investigate their role in future communication
systems.
Course Outcomes
Students who successfully complete this course will have
1. An ability to make system-level decisions for software-defined radio technology and products
2. An ability to implement smart antenna algorithms
3. Knowledge of digital hardware architectures and understanding of development methods
4. An understanding of middleware in SDR
5. Understanding of analog RF components
6. Understand the basic principles of Cognitive Radio

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT I
Introduction to SDR
What is a Software Radio? The need for Software Radios, Characteristics and benefits of a Software
Radio, Design principles of Software Radio
UNIT-II
Radio frequency implementation issues
210
The purpose of the RF Front-End, Dynamic range: The principal challenge of receiver design. RF
receiver front-end topologies, Enhanced flexibility of the RF Chain with Software Radios, Importance of
the components to overall performance, Transmitter architectures and their Issues, noise and distortion
in the RF Chain, ADC and DAC distortion
UNIT-III
Digital hardware choices
Key hardware elements, DSP Processors, Field Programmable Gate Arrays, Trade-offs in using DSPs,
FPGAs and ASICs, Power management issues, Combination of DSPs, FPGAs, and ASICs.
UNIT-IV
Digital generation of signals
Comparison of direct digital synthesis with analog signal synthesis, Approaches to direct digital
synthesis, Analysis of spurious signals, Spurious components due to periodic jitter, Band pass signal
generation, Performance of direct digital synthesis systems, Hybrid DDS-PLL Systems, Applications of
Direct Digital Synthesis, Generation of random sequences.
UNIT-V
Analog to digital and digital to analog conversion
Parameters of ideal data converters, Parameters of practical data converters, Techniques to improve data
converter performance, Common ADC and DAC architectures
UNIT-VI
Introduction to Cognitive Radio
Motivation of Cognitive Radio, Dynamic Spectrum Access, User hierarchy in cognitive radio networks,
Usage scenarios for cognitive radio, Cognitive Cycle, Spectrum Management: spectrum sensing,
spectrum decision, spectrum mobility, spectrum sharing, Classification of spectrum sensing techniques..

Text Books:
1. J.H. Reed, ‘Software-Radio, A Modern Approach to Radio Engineering ’, Prentice-Hall, 2002

2. Ezio Biglieri, Andrea. J. Goldsmith, Larry J. Greenstein, Narayan B. Mandayam,H. Vincent
Poor, ‘Principles of Cognitive Radio’, Cambridge University Press.
References:
1. Joseph Mitola ‘Software Radio Architecture: Object-Oriented Approaches to Wireless Systems

Engineering’ Wiley-Interscience; 1st edition 2000
2. Yong Soo Cho,Jaekwon Kim, Won YoungYang, Chung G. Kang ‘MIMO-OFDM Wireless
Communications with MATLAB’ John Wiley & Sons (2010).
3. Mohamed Ibnkahla ‘ Cooperative Cognitive Radio Networks, The Complete Spectrum Cycle’, CRC
Press.
211

IV-I 7EC75 COMPUTER NETWORKS LAB - - 2 1
Course Objectives:
To provide an understanding of the design concepts of framing Error Detection & correction,
Routing, Congestion concepts and Network tools.
Course Outcomes:
1. Implement and analyze framing methods of data link layer.

2. Implement and analyze framing methods of data link layer.
3. Illustrate and implement error detection & correction techniques.
4. Implement different Routing Algorithm.
5. Understand basic Network Commands.
6. Use of Wireshark and NS-2 tools
Computer Networks Lab Exercises:
1. Implement the data link layer framing methods such as
a) Character / Byte stuffing
b) Bit stuffing.
2. Implement on a data set of characters the three CRC polynomials
a) CRC 12
b) CRC 16
c) CRC CCITT.
3. Implement Hamming code for error detection and error correction
4. Implement Dijkstra's algorithm to compute the shortest path through a graph.
5. Take an example subnet graph with weights indicating delay between nodes. Now obtain Routing
table for each node using distance vector routing algorithm.
6. Implement Congestion control using Leaky-Bucket Algorithm
7. Execute the basic Networking Commands
i. Arp ii. Hostname
iii. ipconfig iv. ipconfig/all
v. Ipconfig/renew vi. Ipconfig/release
212
Vii. Ipconfig/flushdns viii. Pathping
ix. Ping x. Route
xi. tracert
Beyond Syllabus
1. Installation of NS-2
2. Demonstration of NS-2
213
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M

IV-I 7C781 ANTENNA SIMULATION LAB - - 2 1
Prerequisites:
AWP, EMTL
Course Objectives:
The objectives of this lab is
 To perform laboratory experiments on designing of various antennas and measure the
performance parameters.
Course Outcomes: After studying this laboratory course, the students will be able to
CO Understand the design of dipole antenna for various frequencies.
1
CO Understand the design of monopole antenna for variation in radius of the wire
2
CO Design of Microstrip patch antenna in different shapes
3
CO Understand the design of standard horn antenna
4
CO Analyze the characteristics of yagi-uda antenna
5
CO Verify the radiation pattern of different types of antenna
6

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Syllabus content:
1. Dipole antenna
2. Dipole antenna with lambda variation
3. Monopole antenna
4. Monopole antenna with wire radius variation
5. Microstrip rectangular patch antenna
6. Microstrip circular patch antenna
7. Horn antenna
8. Yagi-uda antenna
9. Radiation pattern measurement of dipole antenna
214
10. Radiation pattern measurement of patch antenna

11. Radiation pattern measurement of yagi-uda antenna
12. Radiation pattern of broad side antenna array
13. Radiation pattern of End fire antenna array
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M

IV-I 7C782 Micro Wave and Optical Communications Lab - - 2 1
x x x x x x x x x
Prerequisites: MWOC
Course Objectives:
The objective of this course is to provide the students an in-depth knowledge and practice about the
microwave and optical components and in analyzing the microwave and optical equipments.
CO Analyze the characteristics of RKO and GUNN diode
1
CO Understand the principles governing attenuation and working of DC
2
CO Measure the K, S, Z and f at microwave frequencies.
3
CO Analyse the design principles of circulator and magic Tee
4
CO Understand the basic characteristics of LED and LASER
5
CO Measure the DR,NA and Losses for Digital and Analog Links
6

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Part – A (Any 8 Experiments)

1. Reflex Klystron Characteristics.
2. Gunn Diode Characteristics.
215
3. Attenuation Measurement.
4. Directional Coupler Characteristics.
5. VSWR Measurement.
6. Impedance and Frequency Measurement.
7. Waveguide parameters measurement.
8. Scattering parameters of Circulator.
9. Scattering parameters of Magic Tee.
Part-B
1. Characterization of LED.
2. Characterization of Laser Diode.
3. Intensity modulation of Laser output through an optical fiber.
4. Measurement of NA
216

IV-I 7C764 Project -I - - 4 2
A b C d e f g h i j k l M
x X x x x x x x x
Course Objective
To enhance the knowledge on selecting a projcet , learn related tools and enhance programming and
communication skills for employabilty.
Course Outcomes:

Students identify vast application areas for mobile / wireless communication / computing.

They also understand the working principle of GSM technology.

Students understand various media access control methods that are meant for wireless
communication, each methods’ pros and cons
 Understand the issues in the Network layer in the wireless communication and identifying
suitable solutions for the same
 Understand the issues in the Transport layer in the wireless communication and identifying
 Understand MANETs with an example like Bluetooth technology.
 Understand Security Issues related to mobile computing and various solutions to mitigate the
security problems.
 Prepare for the Project Phase_II
The evaluation is for 100 marks. It is internal evaluation only.
The committee consists of HOD, a Senior Faculty member and Internal Guide.
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Division of marks for internal assessment – 100 marks

 Progress of Project work and the corresponding interim report
as evaluated by internal guides at the end of 5 weeks : 10 Marks
 Seminar at the end of 5 weeks : 10 Marks
 Progress of Project work as evaluated by guides
at the end of 10 weeks : 10 Marks
 Evaluation by the Guides ( at the end of 15 weeks) : 20 Marks
217
 Project Report : 10 Marks

 Final presentation and defense of the project : 30 Marks
100 Marks
218

Code
III-I 7C662 Summer Industry Internship – II - - - 1
Course Objective:
Course Outcomes:
4. Implement the solution using the appropriate modern tools.

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
100 marks. Evaluation is carried out in B.Tech IV year I semester (7 th Semester).
219
IV-II SUBJECTS
220
a b c d e f g h i j k
x x x
L T P/D C
3 0 0 3
7ZC15 FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS, MARKETS AND SERVICES
Course Objective: The objective of the course is to provide to students an understanding of Financial
Markets, the major Institutions involved and the Services offered within this framework.
Course Outcomes:
1. 1.This unit enables the students to understand the financial structure and the financial sector
reforms after 1991.
2. The unit gives the exposure on the role of RBI and the Regulating and credit policies adopted by
the RBI.
3. The students get awareness on the role of Non-Banking financial institutions and the role of
financial institutions in India.
4. The unit educates the students to know the role of regulatory bodies like SEBI and also to know
the capital and money market instruments
5. The unit equips the students to understand about the asset fund based financial services
6. The students will get exposure about the investment banking and merchant banking.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION: The structure of financial system, Equilibrium in financial markets, Indicators of
Financial Development, Financial system and Economic Development, Financial Sector Reforms after
1991.
UNIT II
BANKING INSTITUTIONS: Structure and Comparative performance, Functions and Role of RBI,
Competition, Interest rates, Spread; Bank Capital Adequacy norms; Banking Innovations – BPLR to
Base rate, Core Banking System, Financial Inclusion, Current rates: Policy rates, Reserve Ratios,
Exchange rates, Lending/ Deposit rates.
UNIT III
NON BANKING FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS: Structure and functioning of Unit Trust of India and
Mutual Funds, Growth of Indian Mutual funds and their Regulation, Role of AMFI. Performance of Non-
Statutory Financial Organizations: IFCI, IRBI, NABARD, SIDBI and SFCs.
UNIT IV
221
FINANCIAL AND SECURITIES MARKETS: -, Role and functions of SEBI, Structure and functions
of Call Money Market, Government Securities Market – T-bills Market, Commercial Bills Market,
Commercial paper and Certificate of Deposits; Securities Market – Organization and Structure, Listing,
Trading and Settlement, SEBI and Regulation of Primary and Secondary Markets.
UNIT V
ASSET/FUND BASED FINANCIAL SERVICES: Lease Finance, Consumer Credit and Hire
purchase Finance, Factoring - Definition, Functions, Advantages, Evaluation, Forfeiting, Bills
Discounting, Housing Finance, Venture Capital Financing. Fee-based Advisory services: Stock Broking,
Credit Rating.
UNIT VI
INVESTMENT BANKING AND MERCHANT BANKING:
Investment Banking: Introduction, Functions and Activities, Underwriting, Banker to an Issue, Debenture
Trustees and Portfolio managers, Challenges faced by Investment Bankers.
Merchant Banking: Definition, Merchant Banks Vs Commercial Banks, Services of Merchant Banks.
ESSENTIAL READINGS:
 L.M. Bhole: Financial Institutions and Markets, TMH, 2009.

 E. Gordon, K. Natarajan: Financial Markets and Services, Himalaya Publishing House, 2013.
 Vasant Desai: Financial Markets and Financial Services, Himalaya,2009
SUGGESTED READINGS:
 Pathak: Indian Financial Systems, Pearson, 2009

 M.Y. Khan: Financial Services, TMH, 2009.
 S. Gurusamy: Financial Services and System, Cengage,2009
 Justin Paul and Padmalatha Suresh: Management of Banking and Financial Services, Pearson,
2009.
 Gomez, Financial Markets, Institutions and Financial Services, PHI, 2012.
 R M Srivatsava: Dynamics of Financial Markets and Institutions in India, Excel, 2013.

222
OPERATING SYSTEMS CONCEPTS (7EC67)
Course Objectives:
Learn the basics of operating Systems. Understand process management and synchronization. Learn
principles of memory, I/O and file management in a secured environment.
Course Outcomes:
1. Describe the basic functionalities and structure of the Operating System
2. Explain the concepts and implementations of: Processes, Process Scheduling. Describe, contrast and
compare various types of Operating systems like Windows and Linux.
3. Comprehend the concepts of Synchronization and Deadlocks in the Operating System
4. Discuss the concepts of Memory Management(Physical and Virtual memory)
5. Explain the concepts of File System with regard to directory and disk management algorithms.
6. Students understand the concepts of I/O systems, protection and security in a case study given
UNIT 1:
Introduction: Concept of Operating Systems, Generations of Operating systems, Types of Operating
Systems, OS Services, Types of OS Services, System Calls, Types of System Calls, Structure of an OS-
single structure, layered approach.
UNIT 2:
Processes: Definition, Process Relationship, Different states of a Process, Process State transitions,
Process Control Block (PCB), Context switching. Process Vs Thread Process Scheduling: Foundation
and Scheduling objectives, Types of Schedulers, Scheduling criteria: CPU utilization, Throughput,
Turnaround Time, Waiting Time, Response Time; Scheduling algorithms: Pre-emptive and Non pre-
emptive, FCFS, SJF, RR; Multiprocessor
Scheduling
UNIT 3:
Inter-process Communication: Critical Section, Race Conditions, Mutual Exclusion, Hardware
Solution, Strict Alternation, Peterson’s Solution, The Producer\ Consumer Problem, Semaphores, ,
Monitors, Message Passing, Classical IPC Problems: Reader’s & Writer Problem, Dinning Philosopher
Problem etc.
UNIT 4:
Deadlocks: Definition, Necessary and sufficient conditions for Deadlock, Deadlock Prevention,
Deadlock Avoidance: Banker’s algorithm, Deadlock detection and Recovery.
UNIT 5:
Memory Management: Basic concept, Logical and Physical address map, Memory allocation:
Contiguous Memory allocation – Fixed and variable partition–Internal and External fragmentation and
Compaction; Paging: Principle of operation – Page allocation – Hardware support for paging, Protection
and sharing, Disadvantages of paging.
Virtual Memory: Basics of Virtual Memory – Hardware and control structures –Locality of reference,
Page fault , Working Set , Dirty page/Dirty bit – Demand paging, Page Replacement algorithms:
Optimal, First in First Out (FIFO), Second Chance (SC), Not recently used (NRU) and Least Recently
used (LRU).
223
UNIT 6:
I/O Hardware: I/O devices, Device controllers, Direct memory access Principles of I/O Software: Goals
of Interrupt handlers, Device drivers, Device independent I/O software, Secondary-Storage Structure:
Disk structure, Disk scheduling algorithms
File Management: Concept of File, Access methods, File types, File operation, Directory structure, File
System structure, Allocation methods (contiguous, linked, indexed), Free-space management (bit vector,
linked list, grouping), directory implementation (linear list, hash table),
Disk Management: Disk structure, Disk scheduling - FCFS, SSTF, SCAN, C-SCAN, Disk reliability,
Disk formatting, Boot-block, Bad blocks
Suggested books:
1. Operating System Concepts Essentials, 9th Edition by AviSilberschatz, Peter Galvin,
Greg Gagne, Wiley Asia Student Edition.
2. Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles, 5th Edition, William Stallings,
Prentice Hall of India.
Suggested reference books:
1. Operating System: A Design-oriented Approach, 1st Edition by Charles Crowley, Irwin
Publishing
2. Operating Systems: A Modern Perspective, 2nd Edition by Gary J. Nutt, Addison-
Wesley
3. Design of the Unix Operating Systems, 8th Edition by Maurice Bach, Prentice-Hall
of India
4. Understanding the Linux Kernel, 3rd Edition, Daniel P. Bovet, Marco Cesati,
O'Reilly and Associates
224
x x
L T P/D C
3 0 0 3
7ZC24 INNOVATION & DESIGN THINKING

(Common to all Branches)
Course Objective: The objective of the course is to make students understand the nature of Innovation,
creativity and IPRs, and to motivate the student to start his/her own enterprise with innovative skills.
Course Outcomes:
1. The students gain the knowledge on the inputs required for innovation and also gain familiarity
on Entrepreneurship.
2. The students will get exposure on creative methods of ideation and the importance of protecting
the ideas.
3. The students gain knowledge on design thinking and types of thinking.
4. The students gain familiarity on emerging technologies like Internet of things (IoT).
5. The students understand the process of building the startup.
6. The students gain knowledge on various startup funding and also to branding building for the
startup.
Unit – I: Introduction to Innovation: - Meaning of Innovation, Difference between innovation and

invention, Difference between Innovation and Creativity, Need to be Creative , Importance of
Innovation, Innovation as a Competitive Advantage, Innovation Continuum, Innovation Cycle,
Disruptive Innovation, , Breakthrough innovations and its consequences on the society, Challenges in
Innovation.
Unit – II: Creative Thinking : - Types of Creative Thinking, Creative Thinking Process, Components
of Creativity, Characteristics of a Creative Mindset, New product ideas, Idea generation methods,
Principles of Idea Generation, Difference between Idea Generation and Brainstorming, Killing the ideas
through Stage Gate Models, Process of Reverse Thinking. Intellectual Property Rights, Importance of
IPR, Role of WIPO, Case Studies on Patents and Infringement of Rights.
Unit – III: Design Thinking & Liberal Art: - Concept of Design Thinking, Difference between
Designer and Scientist, Stages of Design Thinking, Difference between Convergent Thinking and
Divergent Thinking. Definition of Liberal Art and its Importance of Liberal Art , Role of Art and Culture
to Innovate Business.
Unit – IV: Emerging Technologies: - Meaning of Internet of Things, Components of IoT, Benefits of
IoT, Types of Product – Service hybrid, examples of IoT enabled Innovations, Impact of IoT on
Business, Future of IoT. Case Study on IoT. Innovation Leadership & Network: - Leadership, Skills and
Characteristics of an Innovation Leadership, Meaning of Innovation Network, Significant of Innovation
Network, Define Social Media Analysis, Steps to Build an Innovation Network.
Unit –V: Building Startup
Kelly Johnsons KISS Principle, Road map for building a startup, identify, analyze and evaluate
funding, advantages of crowd funding. Pricing strategies. Determining factors for Monetizing Innovation,
Process of Monetization, Fixing the price of an Innovative Project. Detailed study on market potential,
225
pitfalls and Negative effects of Monetizing innovation. Reasons for failure of Monetization of
Innovation.
Unit-VI: Startup Funding & Branding

Sources of funding: Bootstrapping, Angel Investors, Crowd funding, Venture capitalists, Advantages of
crowd funding, Schemes of Government through Startup India, role of Institutional support and
Commercial Banks. Introduction to branding a startup and developing branding strategies.
ESSENTIAL READINGS:
 Peter Drucker (1993), “Innovation and Entrepreneurship”, Hyper Business Book.
 C.K. Prahalad, M.S. Krishnan, The new age of Innovation – TATA McGRAW-HILL Edition
2008.
 “Innovation by Design", Gerald H. (Gus) Gaynor, AMACOM {American Management
Association), NYC, 2002
SUGGESTED READINGS:
 Bholanath Dutta: Entrepreneurship – Text and cases, Excel, 2009.
 Vasanth Desai: Entrepreneurship, HPH, 2009
 Barringer: Entrepreneurship, Pearson, 2009.
 H. Nandan: Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship, PHI, 2009.
 John M Nicholas “Project Management for Business and Technology” Prentice Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd.
 Stay Hungry Stay Foolish, Rashmi Bansal and published by IIM., Ahmedabad
226
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M
Year/Sem Sub. Code Subject Name (Open Elective-III) L T P/D C

IV-II 7CC39 Introduction to VLSI and Embedded Systems 3 - - 3
Prerequisites: STLD, Programmaing concepts of any language
Course Objectives:
 To provide basic knowledge in embedded system design using Embedded C.
 To introduce syntax, lexical conventions, data types and memory related to Verilog HDL.
 To design, test and implementation of thedigital hardware using various modeling styles.
CO1 Understand levels of design description, concurrency, simulation and synthesis.

CO2 Apply language constructs, data types, operators available in verilog HDL.
CO3 Design combinational logic and sequential logic in gate level modeling.
CO4 Demonstrate the use of development software for a particular application and choosing
appropriate OS.
CO5 Understanding and building basic embedded system using 8051.Understanding its design
CO6 Design of embedded systems and implementation of switch reading.

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT – I:
LANGUAGE CONSTRUCTS AND CONVENTIONS: Introduction, Keywords, Identifiers, White
Space, Characters, Comments, Numbers, Strings, Logic Values, Strengths, Data Types, Scalars and
Vectors, Parameters, Operators. Verilog Module structure.
UNIT – II
delays, Blocking and Non blocking Assignments
UNIT – III
227

delays, Blocking and Non blocking Assignments
UNIT – IV
Programming Embedded Systems in C
Introduction ,What is an embedded system, Which processor should you use, Which programming
language should you use, Which operating system should you use, How do you develop embedded
software, Conclusions
UNIT – V
The 8051 Architecture: Architecture of 8051 Micro controller, Memory Organization. Special Function
Registers. Input/Output Ports and Circuits, External Memory, Counter and Timers, Serial data
Input/Output, Interrupts.
UNIT – VI
Reading Switches
Introduction, Basic techniques for reading from port pins, Example: Reading and writing bytes, Example:
Reading and writing bits (simple version), Example: Reading and writing bits (generic version),
Adding Structure to the Code
Introduction, Object-oriented programming with C, The Project Header (MAIN.H), The Port Header
(PORT.H), Example: Restructuring the ‘Hello Embedded World’ example, Example: Restructuring the
goat-counting example, Further examples, Conclusions
TEXT BOOKS:
2. T.R. Padmanabhan and B. Bala Tripura Sundari, Design through Verilog HDL – WSE, 2004
IEEE Press.
3. Embedded C - Michael J. Pont, 2nd Ed., Pearson Education, 2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
2. J. Bhaskar, A Verilog Primier, BSP, 2003.

3. PICmicro MCU C-An introduction to programming, The Microchip PIC in CCS C - Nigel
Gardner
228
FUNDAMENTALS OF RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES

L T P C
7AC45 3 - - 3
x x x x
Course Objectives:
Becomes familiar with solar energy, its radiation, Collection, storage and application and also gets
introduced to other forms of Renewable Energy sources viz., the Wind energy, Biomass energy,
geothermal energy and ocean energy.
Course Outcomes:
The student should be able to
1. Understand the role and potential of new and renewable energy sources realize the potential of
solar energy, its impact on environment; define and understand the terms describing the different
angles that one may incur in setting up a solar panel and be able to use the instruments for
measuring solar radiation.
2. Demonstrates the knowledge of different techniques of solar collection and storage.
3. The student becomes familiar with the different types of horizontal and vertical axis wind mills
and understands the performance characteristics of the same. The student also demonstrates the
knowledge of different Bio-gas digesters and factors influencing its yield.
4. Aware of the potential of geothermal energy in India and will be able to characterize different
types of geothermal wells.
5. Aware of the different methods of kinetic energy extraction from Ocean waves and tides and
thermal energy extraction from Oceans.
6. Demonstrates the knowledge of Direct Energy Conversion in different phenomena viz., Joule
Thomson effect, Seebeck effect, Peltier effect etc. and the principle of operation of Fuel Cells.
UNIT – I -PRINCIPLES OF SOLAR RADIATION:

Role and potential of new and renewable source, The solar energy option, Environmental impact of solar
power, Physics of the sun, the solar constant, Extraterrestrial and terrestrial solar radiation, Solar
radiation on titled surface, Instruments for measuring solar radiation and sun shine, Solar radiation data.
UNIT-II- SOLAR ENERGY COLLECTION STORAGE AND APPLICATIONS: Flat plate and
concentrating collectors, Classification of concentrating collectors, orientation and thermal analysis,
advanced collectors.
Different methods, Sensible, Latent heat and stratified storage, solar ponds. Solar Applications- solar
heating/cooling technique, solar distillation and drying, photovoltaic energy conversion.
UNIT – III WIND ENERGY:

Sources and potentials, Horizontal and vertical axis windmills, Performance characteristics, Betz criteria
BIO-MASS: Principles of Bio-Conversion, Anaerobic/aerobic digestion, Types of Bio-gas digesters, Gas
yield, Combustion characteristics of bio-gas, Utilization for cooking, I.C.Engine operation and economic
aspects.
UNIT – IV GEOTHERMAL ENERGY:

Resources, types of wells, methods of harnessing the energy, Potential in India.
UNIT-V OCEAN ENERGY:
229
OTEC, Principles utilization, Setting of OTEC plants, Thermodynamic cycles. Tidal and wave energy,
Potential and conversion techniques, Mini-hydel power plants and their economics.
UNIT-VI DIRECT ENERGY CONVERSION:

Need for DEC, Carnot cycle, Limitations, principles of DEC. Thermoelectric generators, seebeck, Peltier
and joul Thomson effects, Figure of merit, materials, Applications, MHD generators, Principles,
Dissociation and ionization, Hall effect, Magnetic flux, MHD accelerator, MHD Engine, Power
generation systems, Electron gas dynamic conversion, economic aspects. Fuel cells – principles -
Faraday’s law’s - Thermodynamic aspects - selection of fuels and operating conditions.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Non-Conventional Energy Sources - G.D. Rai
2. Renewable Energy Technologies - Ramesh & Kumar /Narosa.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Renewable energy resources - Tiwari and Ghosal/ Narosa.
2. Non-Conventional Energy - Ashok V Desai /Wiley Eastern.
3. Non-Conventional Energy Systems - K Mittal /Wheeler
230
PRINCIPALS OF AUTOMATION AND ROBOTICS

Code: 7BC55
Course Outcomes:
After completing the subject, students will be able to:
 Understand a production system, principles of automobile
 understand the methods of work part transfer mechanical buffer storage control functions
 understand the implementation of automated flow lines
 know the analysis and design of material handling systems, automated guided vehicle system
 understand adaptive control systems and Applications.
 understanding the business process Engineering. Concept of concurrent Engineering, techniques of
rapid prototype.
UNIT – I
Introduction: Production system, Automated manufacturing systems, Reasons, Principles and strategies
of automation, Basic elements of automated system, pneumatic and hydraulic circuit components,
Assembly system and line balancing: Manual Assembly process, and work transport systems, Line
pacing, Analysis of manual assembly lines, line balancing methods-problems, ways of improving line
balance
lines.
UNIT – II
Analysis of Automated flow lines: System configuration, Workpart transfer, General terminology and
analysis of transfer lines without and with buffer storage.
Automated Assembly systems: Fundamentals and Design of assembly systems.
UNIT – III
Automated material handling: Principles, Types of equipment, functions, analysis and design of material
handling systems, conveyor systems, automated guided vehicle systems-technology, Analysis of material
transport systems.
Automated storage systems: Basic terminology, AS/RS; Carousel storage, work in process storage,
UNIT – IV
Adaptive control systems: Introduction, Adaptive control with optimization, Adaptive control with
constraints, Application of A.C. in Machining operations. Use of various parameters such as cutting
force, Temperature, vibration and acoustic emission. Concept of Concurrent Engineering, MRP,MRP II,
Techniques of Rapid Proto typing.
Unit – V: Robotics:
Classification and structure of Robotic systems, structure of continuous path robot systems, drives
and control systems, control approaches for robots.
231
Unit – VII
Robot arm kinematics, the direct kinematics problem and inverse kinematic solutions, planning of
manipulator trajectories, robot sensors, range sensors, proximity sensors, touch sensors, force and
torque sensors, programming, manual teaching, lead through teaching, programming languages,
storing and operating task programmes, robot selection and application.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing: M.P. Groover./PE/PHI
2. Mittal and Nagrath, ‘Robotics and Control’, Tata Mc Graw Hill.
REFERENCES:
1. Computer control of Manufacturing Systems by Yoram Coreom.
2. CAD / CAM/ CIM by Radhakrishnan.
232
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M
Year/Sem Sub. Code Subject Name (Professional Elective-IV) L T P/D C

IV-II 7C827 Digital Design and Verification with Universal 3 - - 3
Verification Methodology
Course Description:
This course gives a student an in-depth introduction to the Universal Verification Methodology, discusses
the benefits of the new features, and demonstrates how design and verification can be more efficient and
effective when using UVM.
 Prerequisites:
 A working knowledge of Verilog and System Verilog.
 Basic idea of verification methods
Course Outcomes
CO Understand the UVM concepts
1
CO Explore the class instances and functions
2
CO Comprehend the UVM Configurations
3
CO Analyzing UVM sequences and Modeling in UVM
4
CO Developing Reusable Test benches using UVM
5
CO Analyzing the Case studies of Layered test bench for SPI, APB and AXI.
6
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
CO 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO 4 3 3 2 3 2 3 2
CO 5 3 3 2 3 2 3 2
CO 6 3 2 2 3 2 3 2
Over 3 3 2 3 2 3 2
all
Syllabus Contents:
Chapter1 : UVM Methodology Concepts:What are methodologies? Why?,Evolution of Verification
methodologies, Introduction to UVM, Overview of UVM Environment, UVM Library, UVM Phasing,
UVM Reporting , UVM Transactions, TLM Basics.
233
Chapter2 : Declaring and using class instances, including static members,Class inheritance and
aggregation (composite classes), Class property randomization, Randomization constraints—relational,
distribution, and conditional Subprograms, including void functions.
Chapter3 : UVM Configuration, UVM Driver, UVM Sequence, Sequencer and Virtual Sequencers,
UVM Monitor, UVM Agent, UVM Factory, UVM Callbacks, UVM Register layer.
Chapter 4 : UVM sequences, Connecting to a DUT, Interface and module UVCs, Multichannel
sequences (virtual sequences), Building a scoreboard, Transaction-level modeling (TLM), Functional
coverage modeling, Register Modeling in UVM.
Chapter 5: Developing Reusable Testbenches using UVM:Modeling Data Items for Generation,
Creating the Driver, Creating the Sequencer, Creating the Monitor, Instantiating Components, Creating
the Agent, Creating the Environment, Transaction-Level Components, Enabling Scenario Creation,
Managing End of Test, Implementing Checks and Coverage.
Chapter6 : Case studies of Layered testbench for SPI, APB and AXI.
Textbooks:
1. The UVM Primer: A Step-by-Step Introduction to the Universal Verification Methodology by
Ray Salemi.
2. A Practical Guide to Adopting Universal Verification Methodology (UVM) by Sharon Rosenberg &
Kathleen A Meade (2nd Edition.
References:
1. Universal Verification Methodology (UVM) 1.2 User’s Guide
url: https://www.accellera.org/images//downloads/standards/uvm/uvm_users_guide_1.2.pdf.
2. A Practical Guide to Adopting the Universal Verification Methodology (UVM) Second
Edition Paperback – by Sharon Rosenberg , Kathleen Meade .
234
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M
Year/Se Sub. Code Subject Name (Professional Elective-IV) L T P/ C

m D
EMBEDDED REAL TIME OPERATING
IV-II 7C828 3 - - 3
SYSTEMS
x x x x x x x x
Course outcomes:
1. Understand the Basic concepts of UNIX operating Systems and files, commands usage.
2. Understand the Real time Systems concepts and classification of Real time systems.
3. Design concepts of scheduling algorithms and its applications.
4. Understand the Interprocess communications and its applications in Real time systems.
5. Understand the Exceptional handling and Interrupts and Timers
6. Understand the case study of RTOS.
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT – I
Introduction: Introduction to UNIX/LINUX, Overview of Commands, File I/O,( open, create, close,
lseek, read, write), Process Control ( fork, vfork, exit, wait, waitpid, exec).
UNIT - II
Real Time Operating Systems: Brief History of OS, Defining RTOS, The Scheduler, Objects, Services,
Characteristics of RTOS, Defining a Task, Tasks States and Scheduling, Task Operations, Structure,
Synchronization, Communication and Concurrency. Defining Semaphores, Operations and Use, Defining
Message Queue, States, Content, Storage, Operations and Use.
Unit III: Scheduling

Commonly used Approaches to Real Time Scheduling Clock Driven, Weighted Round Robin, Priority
Driven, Dynamic Vs State Systems, Effective release time and Dead lines, Offline Vs Online Scheduling.
UNIT - IV
Inter-process Communication
Inter-process Communication and Synchronization of Processes, Tasks and Threads- Multiple Process.
Problem of Sharing data by multiple tasks & routines, Inter-process communication
235
UNIT - V
Exceptions, Interrupts and Timers: Exceptions, Interrupts, Applications, Processing of Exceptions
and Spurious Interrupts, Real Time Clocks, Programmable Timers, Timer Interrupt Service Routines
(ISR), Soft Timers, Operations.
UNIT - VI
Case Studies of RTOS: RT Linux, Micro C/OS-II, Vx Works, Embedded Linux, and Tiny OS.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Embedded Systems- Architecture, Programming and Design by Rajkamal, 2 nd ed., 2008,TMH.
2. Real Time Systems- Jane W. S. Liu- PHI.
3. Real Time Systems- C.M.Krishna, KANG G. Shin, 1996, TMH
4. Qing Li, “Real Time Concepts for Embedded Systems”, 2011, Elsevier.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rajkamal, “Embedded Systems- Architecture, Programming, and Design”, 2007, TMH.
2. W. Richard Stevens, Stephan A. Rago, “Advanced UNIX Programming”, 2006, 2nd Edition,
Pearson.
3. Dr. Craig Hollabaugh, “Embedded Linux: Hardware, Software and Interfacing”, 2008, 1st
Edition, Pearson.
236
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M

IV-II 7CC29 Artificial Intelligence 3 - - 3
The student who has completed this course will

CO1- Demonstrate fundamental understanding of the history of artificial intelligence(AI) and its
foundations
CO2- Apply basic principles of AI in solutions that require problem solving, inference, perception,
knowledge representation, and learning.
CO3- Demonstrate awareness and a fundamental understanding of Expert Systems and its applications
CO4- Demonstrate fundamental understanding of models of machine learning.
CO5- Apply basic principles of Supervised learning
CO6- Apply basic principles of Unsupervised learning
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Unit 1: Foundations for AI

AI: Application areas, AI Basics - Search techniques Depth First Search, Breadth First Search, Divide
and Conquer, Greedy Method, A*, AO*, Branch and Bound, Gradient Descent, NN basics (Perceptron
and MLP, FFN, Backpropagation), Knowledge and Reasoning.
Unit 2: Artificial Neural Networks

Use of ANN, Evolution of NN, Biological Neuron, Basics of ANN, Activation Function, McCulloh-Pitts
Neuron Model.
Unit 3: Expert System

Need and Justification for ES, Characteristics and Components of ES, Expert System Development,
Application and Case Studies.
Unit 4: Foundations for ML

ML Fundamentals & Techniques overview, Basics of Vectors and Matrices, Data Preprocessing,
Machine Learning terminology, ML Classification - Model Assumptions, Probability estimation,
Required data processing M-estimates, Feature selection: Mutual information K-Nearest Neighbors
Unit 5: Supervised Learning
237
Linear Regression, Logistic Regression, Decision Tree and issues, Bayesian Classification, Hidden Mark,
Case Based Reasoning
Unit 6: Unsupervised Learning

Clustering Types and Methods, Expectation Maximization, Self Organizing Maps, Adaptive Resonance
Theory
Text Books
1. Artificial Intelligence And Machine Learning By VINOD CHANDRA S.S., ANAND
HAREENDRAN S., PHI Learning India, 2014, ISBN-978-81-203-4934-6
2. Machine Learning by Vincy Joseph Anuradha Srinivasaraghavan, 2019,Wiley India Pvt Ltd., ISBN –
978-81-265-7851-1
3. Artificial Intelligence Making a System Intelligent by Dr. Nilakshi Jain, 2019,Wiley India Pvt Ltd.,
ISBN – 978-81-265-7994-5
Reference Books
1. Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach, by Stuart Russell and Peter Norvi, Stuart Russell and
Peter
Norvig, 2010. Pearson Education, Inc. ISBN: 978-0-13-604259-4
2. Artificial Intelligence (3rd Edition)by Patrick Henry Winston
3. Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning by Christopher M Bishop.
238
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M

IV-II 7C830 Satellite Communications 3 - - 3
Prerequisites: MWOC
Course objectives:
The course objectives of this course are
 To introduce the working principles and various design aspects of satellite sub-systems.
 To get acquinted with the multiple access techniques and the working principle of GPS systems.
CO Demonstrate the orbital mechanics.
1
CO Design the satellite subsystem.
2
CO Estimate the C/N and able to measure the relevant values.
3
CO Evaluate the satellite link.
4
CO Recall Multiple access concepts and discuss earth station technology
5
CO Apply the knowledge of GPS in real time applications.
6

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Syllabus Content
UNIT-I
INTRODUCTION
Origin of Satellite Communications, Historical Back-ground, Basic Concepts of Satellite
Communications, Kepler’s laws of orbital motion. Frequency allocations for Satellite Services,
Applications, Future Trends of Satellite Communications.
ORBITAL MECHANICS AND LAUNCHERS
Orbital Mechanics, Look Angle determination, Orbital perturbations, Orbit determination, launches and
launch vehicles, Orbital effects in communication systems’ performance
239
UNIT-II
SATELLITE SUBSYSTEMS
Attitude and orbit control system, telemetry, tracking, Command and monitoring, power systems,
communication subsystems, Satellite antenna Equipment reliability and Space qualification.
UNIT-III
SATELLITE LINK DESIGN
Basic transmission theory, system noise temperature and G/T ratio, Design of down link and up link.
.
UNIT-IV
MULTIPLE ACCESS
Frequency division multiple access (FDMA) Intermediation, Calculation of C/N. Time division Multiple
Access (TDMA) Frame structure, Examples. Satellite Switched TDMA. Onboard processing, DAMA,
Code Division Multiple access (CDMA),Spread Spectrum transmission and reception.
Applications: Design of a Remote sensing satellite in IRS-4.
UNIT-V
EARTH STATION TECHNOLOGY
Introduction, Transmitters, Receivers, Antennas, Tracking systems, Terrestrial interface, Primary power
test methods.
Low Earth Orbit And Geo-Stationary Satellite Systems: Orbit consideration, coverage and frequency
considerations, Delay & Throughput considerations, System considerations.
UNIT VI
SATELLITE NAVIGATION & THE GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM
Radio and Satellite Navigation, GPS Position Location principles, GPS Receivers and codes, Satellite
signal acquisition, GPS Navigation Message, GPS signal levels, GPS receiver operation, GPS C/A code
accuracy, Differential GPS.
TEXT BOOKS
1.Timothy Pratt, Charles Bostian and Jeremy Allnutt, Satellite Communications – WSE, Wiley
Publications, 2nd Edition, 2003.
2.Wilbur L. Pritchard, Robert A Nelson and Henri G.Suyderhoud, Satellite Communications
Engineering –2nd Edition, Pearson Publications, 2003.
REFERENCES
1. M. Richharia, Satellite Communications Design Principles – BS Publications, 2nd Edition, 2003.
2. D.C Agarwal, Satellite Communication - Khanna Publications, 5th Ed.
3. 3K.N. Raja Rao, . Fundamentals of Satellite Communications – PHI, 2004
4. Dennis Roddy, Satellite Communications – McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition.
240
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M

IV-II 7C831 Radar Communications 3 - - 3
Prerequisites: MWE
Course Objectives:
 Be acquainted with the principle and working of various types of Radar Systems.
 To study the principles of phased arrays.
CO1 Recognise the basics of Radar systems and its applications and its frequencies (Understand)
CO2 Differentiate the Radar parameters, how it affects the Range measurement. (Analyse)
CO3 Recall the Doppler Effect, and draw backs of CW radars. (Remember)
CO4 Discuss the basic concepts of Moving target indicators and evaluate the draw backs of MTI
Radars.(Understand)
CO5 Differentiate concept of scanning and tracking. (Analyse)
CO6 Understand various types of displays and different phased arrays.

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
SYLLABUS CONTENT
Unit-I
Nature of Radar, Maximum Range, Radar equation. Block diagram. Radar frequencies and applications.
Prediction of Range performance. MDS, Rx Noise, Modified range equation. Related problems.
Unit-II
SNR
Envelope Detectors. Integration of Radar Pulses. RCS of Targets (simple targets-sphere, cone-sphere.
PRF and Range Ambiguities. System losses.
Unit-III
CW AND FMCW RADAR:
Doppler Effect. CW Radar, Block diagram, Applications of CW Radar. Rx bandwidth requirements. FM
CW Radar, Block diagram and characteristics. FM- CW Altimeter.
241
UNIT-IV
MTI RADAR
Block diagram of MTI Radar with Power Amplifier and Power Oscillators. Non Coherent MTI Radar.
Delay line Cancellers. Double Cancellation. Blind Speeds. Filter Characteristics, Limitations to MTI
performance. MTI vs Pulse Doppler Radar. Staggered PRF, Range gated Doppler Filters.
.UNIT – V
TRACKING RADARS
Tracking Radars: Sequential lobing. Conical Scan. Mono Pulse tracking Radars. Phase Comparison
Mono Pulse.
Matched filter Receiver: MFR Response Characteristics & derivation. Correlation Functions & Cross
Correlation Receiver, Efficiency of Matched Filter, Matched Filter with Non White Noise.
UNIT – VI
RADAR RECEIVERS
Noise Figure & Noise Temperature, Radar Displays, Types of Duplexers.
Phased arrays: basic concepts, Beam steering and beam width changes. Series Vs parallel feeds.
Applications, Advantages & limitations. ECCM.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Merrill I. Skolnik, Introduction to Radar Systems, McGraw-Hill, 2nd Edition, 1981.
REFERENCES
1. Merrill I.Skolnik,Introduction to Radar systems,McGraw-Hill,3rd Edition ,2001.
2. Byron Edde, Radar Principles,Technology,Applications. Pearson Edition, 2004.
242
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M
Year/Sem Sub. Code Subject Name (Professional Elective-V) L T P/D C
IV-II 7C832 Mixed Signal Design 3 - - 3
Course Objectives:
This course will introduce design and analysis of mixed-signal integrated circuits. Apply principles of
hierarchical mixed signal CMOS VLSI, from the transistor up to the system level, to the understanding of
CMOS circuits and systems
CO1 Understand the concepts of Switched capacitors Circuits
CO2 know the concepts of PLLS
CO3 study concepts of Data Converter Fundamentals
CO4 Explore the concepts of Nyquist Rate A/D Converters and develop its applications
CO5 Understand concepts of the Oversampling Converters and Continuous-Time Filters
CO6 Understand concepts of concepts of Continuous-Time Filters, CMOS Trans conductors

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT I
Switched Capacitor Circuits: Introduction to Switched Capacitor circuits basic building blocks, Operation
and Analysis, Non-ideal effects in switched capacitor circuits, Switched capacitor integrators first order
filters, Switch sharing, Biquad filters.
UNIT II
Phased Lock Loop (PLL): Basic PLL topology, Dynamics of simple PLL, Charge pump PLLs Lock acquisition,
Phase/Frequency detector and charge pump, Basic charge pump PLL, Non-ideal effects in PLLs-PFD/CP
non idealities, Jitter in PLLs, Delay locked loops, applications.
UNIT III
243
Data Converter Fundamentals: DC and dynamic specifications, Quantization noise, Nyquist rate D/A
converters- Decoder based converters, Binary-Scaled converters, Thermometer-code converters, Hybrid
converters.
UNIT IV
Nyquist Rate A/D Converters: Successive approximation converters, Flash converter, Two-step A/D
converters, Interpolating A/D converters, Folding A/D converters, Pipelined A/D converters, Time-
interleaved converters.
UNIT V
Oversampling Converters: Noise shaping modulators, Decimating filters and Interpolating filters, Higher
order modulators, Delta sigma modulators with multi-bit quantizers, Delta sigma D/A.
UNIT VI
Continuous-Time Filters: Introduction to Gm-C Filters, Bipolar Trans conductors, CMOS Trans
conductors Using Triode and Active Transistors, Bi CMOS Tran conductors, MOSFET-C Filters.
Text Books:
1. Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits- Behzad Razavi, TMH Edition, 2002
2. Analog Integrated Circuit Design- David A. Johns,Ken Martin, Wiley Student Edition, 2013
Reference Books:
1. CMOS Mixed-Signal Circuit Design - R. Jacob Baker, Wiley Interscience, 2009.
2. CMOS Analog Circuit Design –Philip E. Allen and Douglas R. Holberg, Oxford University Press,
International Second Edition/Indian Edition, 2010.
244
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M

IV-II 7C833 System On-chip Architecture 3 - - 3
A b C d e f g h i j k m
X X X X X X
OBJECTIVES
After going through this course the student will be able to
 Understand the System Architecture and Processor Architecture, approach for a SOC Design.
 Learn the, Basic concepts in Processor Micro Architecture, and Learn Different Types of
Processors like VLIW Processors, Superscalar Processors etc.
 Learn about SOC external memory, Scratchpads and Cache memory and Multilevel Caches.
 Learn the SOC Design approach, Design and evaluation, Applications Like Image compression
etc
1. Know basics of System Architecture
2. Understand the various types of Processors like VLIW Processors, Superscalar Processors.
3. Distinguish Cache memory and Multilevel Caches, SOC external memory.
4. Know the Concept of Inter Connect Architectures, SOC Standard Buses and Reconfiguration
Technologies.
5. Know the concepts and issues related to Interconnect Configuration.
6. Explore the SOC Design approach and develop its applications.

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT-I: Introduction
Introduction to the System Approach: System Architecture, Components of the system, Hardware &
Software, Processor Architectures, Memory and Addressing. System level interconnection, an approach
for SOC Design, System Architecture and Complexity.
UNIT-II: Processors :
Introduction , Processor Selection for SOC, Basic concepts in Processor Architecture, Micro
Architecture, Basic elements in Instruction handling. Buffers: minimizing Pipeline Delays, Branches,
More Robust Processors, Vector Processors and Vector Instructions extensions, VLIW Processors,
Superscalar Processors.
245
UNIT-III: Memory Design for SOC:

Overview of SOC external memory, Internal Memory, Size, Scratchpads and Cache memory, Cache
Organization, Cache data, Write Policies, Strategies for line replacement at miss time, Types of Cache,
Split – I, and D – Caches, Multilevel Caches, Virtual to real translation , SOC Memory System, Models
of Simple Processor – memory interaction.
UNIT-IV: Interconnect Customization and Configuration:

Inter Connect Architectures, Bus: Basic Architectures, SOC Standard Buses, Analytic Bus Models, Using
the Bus model, Effects of Bus transactions and contention time. SOC Customization: An overview,
Customizing Instruction Processor.
UNIT-V: Interconnect Configuration:
Reconfiguration Technologies, Mapping design onto Reconfigurable devices, Instance- Specific design,
Customizable Soft Processor, Reconfiguration – overhead analysis and trade-off analysis on
reconfigurable Parallelism.
UNIT-VI: Application Studies / Case Studies:
SOC Design approach, AES algorithms, Design and evaluation, Image compression – JPEG
compression.
Text Books
 Computer System Design System-on-Chip – Michael J. Flynn and Wayne Luk, Wiely India Pvt.
Ltd.
 Design of System on a Chip: Devices and Components – Ricardo Reis, 1st Ed., 2004, Springer
Reference Books
 ARM System on Chip Architecture – Steve Furber –2nd Ed., 2000, Addison Wesley
Professional.
 System on Chip Verification – Methodologies and Techniques – Prakash Rashinkar, Peter
Paterson and Leena Singh L, 2001, Kluwer Academic Publishers.
246
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M

IV-II 7C834 Machine Learning 3 - - 3
Course Objectives :
CO1. introduce basic concepts and techniques of Machine Learning
CO2. have a thorough understanding of the Supervised and Unsupervised learning techniques
CO3. study the various probability based learning techniques
CO4. analyze the dimensionality reduction models
CO5. Tunderstand graphical models of machine learning algorithms
CO6. Apply analytical learning algorithms

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT I: INTRODUCTION:
Learning(Book-1) – Types of Machine Learning – Supervised Learning – The Brain and the Neuron –
Design a Learning System(Book-2) – Perspectives and Issues in Machine Learning – Concept Learning
Task – Concept Learning as Search – Finding a Maximally Specific Hypothesis – Version Spaces and the
Candidate Elimination Algorithm – Linear Discriminants: (Book-1) – Perceptron – Linear Separability –
Linear Regression.
UNIT II: LINEAR MODELS:
Multi-layer Perceptron(Book-1) – Going Forwards – Going Backwards: Back Propagation Error – Multi-
layer Perceptron in Practice – Examples of using the MLP – Overview – Deriving Back-Propagation –
Radial Basis Functions and Splines – Concepts – RBF Network – Curse of Dimensionality –
Interpolations and Basis Functions – Support Vector Machines
UNIT III: TREE AND PROBABILISTIC MODELS:

Learning with Trees (Book-1) – Decision Trees – Constructing Decision Trees – Classification and
Regression Trees – Ensemble Learning – Boosting – Bagging – Different ways to Combine Classifiers –
Basic Statistics – Gaussian Mixture Models – Nearest Neighbor Methods – Unsupervised Learning – K
means Algorithms
UNIT IV: DIMENSIONALITY REDUCTION AND EVOLUTIONARY MODELS:
247
Dimensionality Reduction(Book-1) – Linear Discriminant Analysis – Principal Component Analysis –

Factor Analysis – Independent Component Analysis – Locally Linear Embedding – Isomap – Least
Squares Optimization – Evolutionary Learning – Genetic algorithms – Genetic Offspring: - Genetic
Operators – Using Genetic Algorithms – Reinforcement Learning – Overview – Getting Lost Example
UNIT V: GRAPHICAL MODELS:
Markov Chain Monte Carlo Methods (Book-1) – Sampling – Proposal Distribution – Markov Chain
Monte Carlo – Graphical Models – Bayesian Networks – Markov Random Fields – Hidden Markov
Models – Tracking Methods
UNIT – VI ANALYTICAL LEARNING
Learning with perfect domain theory (Book-2) – Explanation based Learning – Inductive analytical
approach to learning – KBANN algorithm
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Stephen Marsland, ―Machine Learning – An Algorithmic Perspective‖, Second Edition, Chapman and
Hall/CRC Machine Learning and Pattern Recognition Series, 2014.
2. Tom M Mitchell, ―Machine Learning‖, First Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Peter Flach, ―Machine Learning: The Art and Science of Algorithms that Make Sense of Data‖, First
Edition, Cambridge University Press, 2012.
2. Jason Bell, ―Machine learning – Hands on for Developers and Technical Professionals‖, First Edition,
Wiley, 2014
3. Ethem Alpaydin, ―Introduction to Machine Learning 3e (Adaptive Computation and Machine
Learning Series), Third Edition, MIT Press, 2014
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Distinguish between, supervised, unsupervised and semi-supervised learning
 Apply the apt machine learning strategy for any given problem
 Suggest supervised, unsupervised or semi-supervised learning algorithms for any given problem
 Design systems that uses the appropriate graph models of machine learning
 Modify existing machine learning algorithms to improve classification efficiency
248
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H M

IV-II 7C835 5G Communications 3 - - 3
Pre-requisites:
Probability & Stochastic process, Cellular mobile Communications
Course Objectives:
This course is intended to impart to the students the principles of
 The fundamental concepts and design principles in “Multiple-Input Multiple-

Output” (MIMO) wireless communications –channel capacity, antenna
diversity, space-time coding.
 The fundamental concepts in “Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing”
(OFDM) communications – transmission, synchronization, peak-to-average
power ratio (PAPR) reduction.
 This fundamental concepts of massive MIMO will present a comprehensive
analytical development of the various concepts in massive MIMO and
mmWave MIMO technologies for 5G together with practical insights and
problem solving.
Course Outcome:
After Learning this course, the student will be able to gain knowledge and understanding of:-
 OFDM’s transceiver architecture
 The problem of PAPR and how to reduce the PAPR.
 To understand how the OFDM receiver performs synchronization
 Channel modeling and propagation
 MIMO Capacity, space-time coding
 Massive MIMO and mmWave MIMO technologies for 5G

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
UNIT 1: Fast Fading Wireless Channel Modeling ,Rayleigh/Ricean Fading Channels ,BER Performance
249
in Fading Channels ,Diversity modeling for Wireless Communications ,BER Performance Improvement
with diversity ,Types of Diversity – Frequency, Time, Space.
UNIT 2: OFDM Basics I: Introduction to OFDM Effect- Multicarrier Modulation and Cyclic Prefix-
Channel model and SNR performance- OFDM Issues of PAPR- Frequency and Timing Offset Issues.
UNIT 3: Bit Error Rate Analysis: BER Analysis for Space Time Coding, Transmit Beamforming ,
Receiver Selection Combining, Receiver Equal Combining, Receiver Maximal Ratio Combining.
UNIT 4: Introduction to MIMO, Beam forming Antennas, Diversity: Receive- antenna diversity;
Transmit-antenna diversity, MIMO Diversity and applications ,MIMO Channel Capacity of
ZF,LMMSE,MMSE .
UNIT 5: Introduction to MIMO: MIMO Channel Capacity-SVD and Eigen modes of the MIMO
Channel-MIMO Spatial Multiplexing – BLAST-MIMO Diversity – Alamouti, OSTBC, MRT-MIMO ‐
OFDM.
UNIT 6: Introduction to 5G Wireless Technologies: Key specs and New Techniques for
5G,Introduction to MIMO Wireless Communication Systems ,Channel Estimation for MIMO Systems,
Multi-user MIMO Wireless Systems ,Introduction to Massive MIMO Wireless Systems ,Generalized
Spatial Modulation, mmWave MIMO Wireless Systems and Challenges.
Text Books:
1. MIMO-OFDM for LTE, WiFi and WiMAX Li Wang, Ming Jiang, Lajos L. Hanzo,
YosefAkhtman Weily 2011
2. MIMO-OFDM Wireless Communications with MATLAB Yong Soo Cho,Jaekwon Kim,
Won YoungYang, hung G. Kang John Wiley & Sons (2010)
References:
1. OFDM for Wireless Communications Systems Ramjee Prasad, Artech House Publishers (2004).
2. MIMO Wireless Communications EzioBiglieri Robert Calderbank Anthony Constantinides
Andrea Goldsmith ArogyaswamiPaulraj H. Vincent Cambridge University Press (2007)
250
3.
IV-II 7C865 PROJECT –II - - 10 5
A B c d e f g h i j k l
X X X X X X X X X X x
Course Objective
To enhance the knowledge on selecting a projcet , learn related tools and enhance programming and
communication skills for employabilty.
Course Outcomes:
 Identify vast application areas for mobile / wireless communication / computing.
 They also understand the working principle of GSM technology.
 Students understand various media access control methods that are meant for wireless
communication, each methods’ pros and cons
 Understand the issues in the Network layer in the wireless communication and identifying
 Understand the issues in the Transport layer in the wireless communication and identifying
 Understand MANETs with an example like Bluetooth technology.
 Understand Security Issues related to mobile computing and various solutions to mitigate the
security problems.
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
Overall 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Out of total 200 marks for project work (in the final year second semester), 50 marks shall be for Internal
Evaluation and 150 marks for the External Evaluation at the end of the Semester.
External Evaluation of the project (viva-voce) shall be conducted by a committee appointed by the Chief
Superintendent. The committee consists of an external examiner, HOD, a Senior Faculty Member and
Internal Guide.
The pattern of Internal Evaluation is as follows:
Division of marks for internal assessment – 50 marks
 Progress of Project work and the corresponding interim report
as evaluated by internal guides at the end of 5 weeks : 05 Marks
 Progress of Project work as evaluated by guides
at the end of 10 weeks : 05 Marks
 Evaluation by the Guides ( at the end of 15 weeks) : 10 Marks
 Project Report : 05 Marks
 Final presentation and defense of the project : 15 Marks
If the project is conducted internally the marks will be given by Internal Guide himself.
251
Division of Marks for External Evaluation – 150 Marks

Pattern of External Evaluation for Project
1. Final Project Report : 30 Marks
2. Presentation : 20 Marks
3. Demonstration / Defense of Project : 100 Marks
252

ECE - A-18 - I To IVyear-29jun20-2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ECE - A-18 - I To IVyear-29jun20-2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ECE - A-18 - I To IVyear-29jun20-2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B.

Tech-ECE - I to IV year 2018-19

B. Tech (Electronics and Communication Engineering)

Programme Educational Objectives

Engineering Graduates will be able to:

PO.1. Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering

PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES of B. Tech-ECE

The graduates will be able to:

1.0 Under-Graduate Degree Programme in Engineering & Technology (E&T)

Sl. No. Branch

1.2. Credits (Semester system for B.Tech year)

2.0 Eligibility for admission

3.0 B.Tech. Programme structure

3.2.1 Semester scheme

3.2.2 Credit courses

% of Marks Secured in a Letter Grade

3.2.3 Subject Course Classification

Sl. Category Suggested Breakup

4.0 Course registration

5.0 Subjects / courses to be offered

6.0 Attendance requirements:

6.4 Shortage of attendance below 65% in aggregate shall NO CASE be condoned.

7.0 Academic requirements

7.3 Promotion Rules based upon credits

S. No. Promotion Conditions to be fulfilled

8.0 Evaluation - Distribution and weightage of marks

In addition, Internship industry-oriented mini-project, group project, Project – I will also be

Sl.No Description Marks

Semester end examination - 70 marks

Pattern of external evaluation for Project – I in IV year I semester.

Sl.No Description Marks

Sl.No Description Marks

Division of marks for External Evaluation for project II – 70 Marks

Sl.No Description Marks

8.3 Theory Subjects

8.3.1 Pattern for Continuous Internal Evaluation ( CIE) 30 marks

a) Part – A of Mid Test will have 10 questions – 5 marks

d) Multiple choice questions (10) - 5 marks

e) Assignment – I three questions from each unit – total of 9 questions

Similarly assignment – II will be given to be Submitted before Mid Test II

S.No. Attendance Range Marks Awarded

b) Pattern for External Examinations - (70 marks)

8.4 Pattern of Evaluation for Lab subjects - (100 marks)

8.4.3 In case computer based examinations

8.6. Technical Seminar (100 marks)

Sl.No Description Marks

Student must secure 40% i.e. 40 marks to be successful

8.7 Comprehensive Viva-voce (II-II, III-II and IV-II*)

S.No. Description marks

The sessional marks awarded by the Department are not final.

The recommendations of the Committee are final and binding.

9.0 Grading procedure

% of Marks Secured in a Letter Grade Grade Points

Credit points (CP) = grade point (GP) x credits …. For a course

Illustration of calculation of SGPA

Letter Grade Credit

SGPA = 152/21 = 7.24

Illustration of calculation of CGPA: